Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 12th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 12th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives

Question 1.
What are halogen derivatives of hydrocarbons?
Answer:
The replacement of hydrogen atom/s in aliphatic or aromatic hydrocarbons by halogen atom/s results in the formation of halogen derivatives of hydrocarbons.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives Important Questions

Question 2.
How are halogen derivatives of hydrocarbons classified?
Answer:
Halogen derivatives of alkane are classified as :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 1

  1. Monohalogen derivative (or alkyl halide) : It is a halogen derivative of an alkane in which one hydrogen atom is replaced by one halogen atom and it is also called alkyl halide. E.g. C2H5Br.
  2. Poh halogen derivatives : These are halogen derivatives in which more than one hydrogen atoms of an alkane are substituted by corresponding number of halogen atoms.

They are classified as follows :
(i) Dihalogen derivatives : The compounds formed by the substitution of two hydrogen atoms of an alkane by two halogen atoms are called dihalogen derivatives.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 2

They are further classified as :

  • Vicinal dihalides Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 3(Two halogen atoms on vicinal or adjacent carbon atoms)
  • Geminal dihalides : CH3 – CHCI2 (Two halogen atoms on the same carbon atom)

(ii) Trihalogen derivatives : The compounds formed by the substitution of three hydrogen atoms of an alkane by three halogen atoms are called trihalogen derivatives.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 4

(iii) Tetrahalogen derivatives : The compounds formed by the substitution of four hydrogen atoms of an alkane by four halogen atoms are called tetrahalogen derivatives. E.g. CCI4.

Question 3.
What are alkyl halides? How are they classified?
Answer:
The compound formed by the replacement of one hydrogen atom in an alkane by a halogen atom is called an alkyl halide. The halogen atom is bonded to sp3 hybridised carbon. Alkyl halides are classified into the following three classes depending on the type of the carbon to which halogen atom is bonded.

(1) Primary (1°) alkyl halide : Alkyl halide in which a halogen atom is bonded to a primary carbon atom is called primary alkyl halide.

[Primary (1°) carbon atom i.e., the carbon atom which is attached to only one carbon atom.]
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 5

They are represented by the general formula R – CH2 – X.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives Important Questions

(2) Secondary (2°) alkyl halide : Alkyl halide in which a halogen atom is bonded to a secondary carbon atom is called secondary alkyl halide. [Secondary (2°) carbon i.e., the carbon atom which is attached to two other carbon atoms.]
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 6

They are represented by the general formula Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 7 (R and R’ can be same or different)

(3) Tertiary (3°) alkyl halide : Alkyl halide in which halogen atom is bonded to a tertiary carbon atom is called tertiary alkyl halide. [Tertiary (3°) carbon i.e., the carbon atom which is attached to three other carbon atoms.]
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 8

They are represented by the general formula Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 9 (R, R’ and R” may be same or different)

Question 4.
Explain the following :
(1) Alkyl halide or haloalkanes
(2) Allylic halides
(3) Benzylic halide
(4) Vinylic halide
(5) Haloalkyne
(6) Aryl halide or haloarenes.
Answer:
(1) Alkyl halide or haloalkanes : In alkyl halides or haloalkanes the halogen atom is bonded to sp3 hybridized carbon which is a part of saturated carbon chain.
Example : Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 9

(2) Allylic halides : In allylic halides, halogen atom is bonded to a sp3 hybridized carbon atom next to a carbon-carbon double bond.

Example : Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 11

(3) Benzylic halide : In benzylic halides, halogen atom is bonded to a sp3 hybridized carbon atom which is further bonded to an aromatic ring.
Example : Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 12

(4) Vinylic halides : In vinylic halides, halogen atom is bonded to a sp2 hybridized carbon atom of aliphatic chain. Vinylic halide is a haloalkene.
Example : Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 13

(5) Haloalkyne : In haloalkynes, halogen atom is bonded to a sp hybridized carbon atom.
Example : Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 14

(6) Aryl halides or haloarenes : In aryl halides, halogen atom is directly bonded to the sp2 hybridized carbon atom of aromatic ring.
Example : Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 15

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives Important Questions

Question 5.
Give the IUPAC names of the following :
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 16
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 16

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives Important Questions

Question 6.
Draw the structures of the following compounds:
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 18
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 19
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 20
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 21

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives Important Questions

Question 7.
Write the structure of-
(a) 3-chloro-3-ethylhex-l-ene
(b) 1-Iodo-2, 3-dimethylbutane
(c) 1, 3, 5-tribromobenzene
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 22

Question 8.
Write structures of
(a) 2-iodo-3-methyl pentane
(b) 3-chiorolleNane
(c) 1-chloro-2, 2-dimethyl propane
(d) 1-chloro-4-ethyl cyclohexane.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 25

Question 9.
Write the possible isomers of monochloro derivatives of 2,3-Dimethylbutane and write their IUPAC names.
Answer:
The given parent hydrocarbon has molecular formula, C6H14. The monochloro derivative of this compound has molecular formula C6H13CI.
The parent hydrocarbon is,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 25
Hence the structures of isomers of monochioroderivative are.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 27

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives Important Questions

Question 10.
Write structures and IUPAC names of all possible isomers of C5H11Br and classify them as l°/2°/3°.
Answer:
C5H11Br is a monohalogen derivative.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 28

Question 11.
How are following compounds obtained from alcohols :
(1) ethyl chloride C2H5CI
(2) isopropyl chloride (CH3 CHCI – CH3)
(3) tert-butyl chloride (CH3)3 – CI?
Answer:
Alcohols in the presence of Lucas reagent which is a solution of concentrated HCI and ZnCI2 form alkyl halides. Hydrogen chloride is used with zinc chloride (Grooves’ process) for primary and secondary alcohols.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 31

(3) Tertiary alcohols don’t need ZnCI2 to react with HCI.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 32
The order of reactivity of alcohols with a given halo acid is 3° >2°> 1°.

Question 12.
How are following compounds prepared from alcohols:
(1) ethyl bromide (C2H5Br)
(2) isopropyl bromide (CH3 – CHBr – CH3)
(3) tert-butyl bromide (CH3)3 C – Br?
Answer:
(1) Ethyl alcohol on heating with conc. hydrobromic acid (48%) forms ethyl bromide.
OR
When ethyl alcohol is treated with a mixture of NaBr and H2SO4, ethyl bromide is formed. Here HBr is generated in situ.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 33
(2) Isopropyl alcohol, on reaction with NaBr and dil. H2SO4 forms isopropyl bromide.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 34
(3) Tertiary alcohol on reaction with sodium bromide and dil. H2SO4 forms tert-butyl bromide.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 35

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives Important Questions

Question 13.
How is ethyl iodide obtained from ethyl alcohol?
Answer:
When ethyl alcohol is treated with sodium or potassium iodide in 95 % phosphoric acid, ethyl iodide is formed. Here HI is generated in situ.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 36

Question 14.
How will you prepare the following :

(1) Ethyl chloride (chloroethane) from ethyl alcohol using
(i) PCI3
(ii) PCI5 and
(iii) SOCI2.
Answer:
(i) When ethyl alcohol is refluxed with phosphorus trichloride, ethyl chloride is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 37
(ii) When ethyl alcohol is refluxed with phosphorus pentachloride, ethyl chloride is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 38
(iii) When ethyl alcohol is refluxed with thionyl chloride, in the presence of pyridine, ethyl chloride is formed. The by-products obtained are gases. Therefore, this method is preferred for preparation of alkyl chloride.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 39

(2) Isopropyl chloride (2-chloropropane) from isopropyl alcohol using
(i) PCI3
(ii) PCI5
(iii) SOCI2.
Answer:
When isopropyl alcohol is refluxed with phosphorus trichloride, isopropyl chloride is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 40

When isopropyl alcohol is refluxed with phosphorus pentachloride, isopropyl chloride is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 41

When isopropyl alcohol is refluxed with thionyl chloride, in the presence of pyridine, isopropyl chloride is formed. The by-products obtained are gases. Therefore, this method is preferred for the preparation of alkyl chloride.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 42

(3) Ethyl bromide (bromoethane) from ethyl alcohol.
Answer:
When ethyl alcohol is treated with a mixture of red phosphorus and bromine or hydrobromic acid (phosphorus tribromide is generated in situ), ethyl bromide is formed.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 43

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives Important Questions

(4) Ethyl iodide (do ethane) from ethyl alcohol.
Answer:
When ethyl alcohol is heated with a mixture of red phosphorus and iodine, (phosphorus triiodide is generated in situ), ethyl iodide is formed.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 44

Question 15.
Explain halogenation of methane.
Answer:
Halogenation : A reaction of alkanes with halogens (CI2, Br2, I2) in the presence of appropriate conditions forming a mixture of alkyl halides.
(1) Chlorination:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 44
(2) When excess of chlorine is used, tetrachioro methane, a major product is obtained. When excess of methane is used, chioromethane, a major product is obtained. The order of reactivity of halogens towards alkane is
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 47
(3) lodination:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 48
However, iodination reaction is a reversible reaction. HI being a strongest reducing agent reduces methyl iodide back to methane.

(4) Fluorination: A reaction of alkane with fluorine is explosive and also hydrofluoric acid is poisonous and corrosive. Hence, alkyl fluorides are not prepared by halogenation of alkane.

Question 16.
Predict the possible products of the following reaction :
(1) Bromination of propane
(2) Bromination of n-butane
(3) Bromination of 2-Methyl propane.
Answer:
(1) Bromination of propane
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 49
(2) Bromination of n-butane
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 50
(3) Bromination of 2-Methyl propane
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 51

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives Important Questions

Question 17.
How are following compounds prepared by halogenation of ethane :
(1) Chloroethane
(2) Bromoethane
(3) Iodoethane?
Answer:
(1) Chlorination of ethane : When ethane (excess) is reacted with a limited quantity of chlorine in the presence of diffused sunlight or U.V. light or at high temperature, chloroethane is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 52

(2) Bromination of ethane : When ethane is heated with Br2 in the presence of anhydrous AlBr3, bromoethane is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 53

(3) Iodination : When ethane is reacted with I2 in the presence of suitable oxidising agents like-HgO or HIO3 or dilute HNO3 iodoethane is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 54

Question 18.
Direct iodination of alkanes is not possible.
Answer:
(1) Direct iodination of alkanes using iodine is highly reversible.
\(\mathrm{RH}+\mathrm{I}_{2} \rightleftharpoons \mathrm{RI}+\mathrm{HI}\)
(2) Hydroiodic acid HI being strong reducing agent, it reduces RI to alkane RH.
(3) The reaction takes place only in the presence of a suitable oxidizing agent like HgO, HIO3 or dilute HNO3 which decomposes HI. Hence, direct iodination of alkanes is not possible.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 55

Question 20.
How are following compounds obtained from alkenes :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 56
Answer:
(1) Ethene on reaction with hydrogen chloride forms
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 57
(2) Ethene on reaction with hydrogen bromide forms
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 58
(3) Propene on reaction with hydrogen iodide forms
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 59
(4) but-2-ene on reaction with hydrogen iodide forms 2-iodobutane.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 60

Question 19.
State and explain Markovnikov’s rule.
Answer:
Markovnikov’s rule : When an unsymmetrical reagent is added to an unsymmetrical alkene, the negative part of the reagent gets attached to that carbon atom of the double bond which carries less number of hydrogen atoms.

Example : Addition of HBr’to unsymmetrical alkene like propene gives two products.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 61

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives Important Questions
Isopropyl bromide is the major product, since the negative part (Br) of HBr is attached to carbon atom of a double bond with less number of hydrogen atoms.

Question 20.
Explain peroxide effect.
OR
Write a note on the Kharasch-Mayo effect.
OR
Explain the addition of HBr to (unsymmetrical alkene) propane in the presence of benzoyl peroxide.
Answer:
The addition of HBr to an unsymmetrical alkene (propane) in the presence of benzoyl peroxide takes place in the opposite orientation to that of Markovnikov’s rule and this is known as Kharasch-Mayo effect or peroxide effect or Anti-Markovnikov addition.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 62

Question 21.
Write the structure of alkyl halide obtained by the action hydrogen bromide on 2-Methyiprop-1-ene in the presence of peroxide.
Answer:
In the presence of peroxide. HBr to 2-Methyl prop-I-cne forms l-Bromo-2-methylpropane.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 63

Question 22.
How are alkyl iodides prepared from alkyl chlorides/bromides?
Answer:
Alkyl iodide is prepared by treating alkyl chloride or alkyl bromide with sodium iodide, in the presence of dry acetone, sodium chloride or sodium bromide precipitates from the solution and can be separated by filtration. This reaction is known as Finkelstein reaction.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 70

Question 23.
How are alkyl fluorides prepared with alkyl chlorides/alkyl bromides?
Answer:
When alkyl chloride or alkyl bromide is heated with metallic fluorides like AgF, CaF2, CoF2 or Hg2F2, alkyl fluoride is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 71

This reaction is known as Swarts reaction.

Question 24.
Explain the preparation of haloarenes using electrophilic substitution.
Answer:
When arene is treated with chlorine or bromine in dark at ordinary temperature in the presence of lewis acid as a catalyst like Fe, FeCI3 or anhydrous AlCI3, aryl chloride or aryl bromide is formed.

When toluene is brominated in dark at ordinary temperature in the presence of iron, a mixture of ortho and para bromo tolerene is obtained.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 72

Ortho and para isomers can be easily separated as there is large difference in melting points of ortho and para isomers.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives Important Questions

Question 25.
Write a note on Sandmeyer’s reaction.
Answer:
Aryl halides are most commonly prepared by replacement of nitrogen of diazonium salt. The replacement of diazonium group by -Cl or -Br using cuprous salt is called Sandmeyer’s reaction. When a primary aromatic amine (like aniline) suspended in cold F1C1, is treated with sodium nitrite, a diazonium salt (benzene diazonium chloride) is formed. When diazonium salt is treated with cuprous chloride or cuprous bromide, aryl halide (chlorobenzene or bromobenzene) is formed.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 73

When benzene diazonium salt is mixed with potassium iodide, iodobenzene is formed.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 74

Question 26.
Define the following :
Answer:
(1) Monochromatic light : It consists of rays of single wavelength vibrating in different planes perpendicular to the direction of propagation of the light.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 77
(2) Plane polarized light : A light having oscillations only in one plane perpendicular to direction of propagation of light is known as plane polarized light.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 78
(3) Optical isomerism : The steroisomerism in which the isomers have different spatial arrangements of groups/atoms around a chiral atom is called optical isomerism.

(4) Optical activity : The property of a substance by which it rotates plane of polarization of incident plane polarized light is known as optical activity.

(5) Optically active compound : The compound which rotate the plane of plane polarized light is called optically active compound.

(6) Enantiomers : The optical isomers which are non-superimposable mirror images of each other are called enantiomers or enantiomorphs or optical antipodes.
Example : 2-chlorobutane, lactic acid

(7) Chiral carbon atom : Carbon atom in a molecule which carries four different groups/atoms is called chiral carbon atom.

Chiral atom in a molecule is marked with asterisk (*)

For example : C in lactic acid
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 79

(8) Chiral molecule : When a molecule contains one chiral atom, it acquires a unique property i.e. it is non- superimposable with its mirror image is said to be chiral molecule.

(9) Chirality : The relationship between a chiral molecule and its mirror image is similar to the relationship between left and right hands. Therefore it is called handedness or chirality.

(10) Dextrorotatory substance or r/-Isomer : An optically active substance (or isomer) which rotates the plane of a plane polarized light to the right hand side (RHS) is called dextrorotatory substance (or isomer) and denoted by d or (+) sign.

(11) Laevorotatory substance or /-Isomer : An optically active substance (or isomer) which rotates the plane of a plane polarized light to the left hand side (LHS) is called laevorotatory substance (or isomer) and denoted by / or (-) sign.

(12) Racemic mixture or Racemate : A mixture containing equimolar quantities of dextro (d) and laevo (/) optical
isomers which is optically inactive due to molecules of one enantiomer is cancelled by equal and opposite optical rotation due to molecules of the other enantiomer is called a racemic mixture or racemate. It is represented as (dl) or (+).

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives Important Questions

Question 27.
Calculate the number of isomers for 2-chlorobutane.
Answer:
The number of optical isomers possible for a compound is 2n where n = number of asymetric carbon atoms.
As n = 1 for 2-ehlorobutane, 2n = 21 = 2. Hence, it has two optical isomers.

Question 28.
How many optical isomers are possible for C5H11 CI?
Answer:
The number of optical isomers : 3.

Question 29.
How many optical isomers are possible for glucose?
Answer:
The number of optical isomers : 16.

Question 30.
Draw the structures and indicate the chiral carbon atoms in
(1) Lactic acid
(2) 2-Chlorobutane.
Answer:
(1) In lactic acid structure, Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 80 the starred carbon atom is chiral carbon atom as it is attached to four different substituents, COOH, OH, CH3 and H.
(2) In 2-chlorobutane structure, Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 81 the starred carbon atom is chiral carbon atom as it is attached to four different substituents, -CH2 – CH3 (ethyl), CH3 (methyl), Cl and H.

Question 31.
Identify chira! and achiral molecules.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 82

Question 32.
Complete the following reactions and explain optical activity of the products formed:
(i) Pent-1-ene with HBr
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 84
(ii) Pent-2-ene with HBr
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 85

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives Important Questions

Question 33.
C6H12 (A) on treatment with HCI produced a compound Y. Which is optically active, what is structure A?
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 86

Question 34.
A racemic mixture is optically inactive. Explain.
Answer:

  • A racemic mixture contains equimolar (or equimolecular) quantities of the dextrorotatory (d-) and laevorotatory (l-) isomers (enantiomers) of a compound.
  • The d-enantiomer rotates the plane of plane-polarized light to the right, while the l-enantiomer rotates the same to the left to the same extent.
  • The quantities of the d- and l-enantiomers being the same, both the rotations are of the same magnitude, but of opposite directions. Hence, they cancel each other. Hence, a racemic mixture is optically inactive.
  • It is represented as dl or ( + ). Example : ( ± ) lactic acid

Question 35.
Explain Fischer projection formula with illustration.
OR
Write a note on Fischer projection formula.
Answer:
Fischer projection formula or cross formula : The three dimensional (3-D) view of a molecule is presented on plane of paper. A Fischer projection formula can be drawn by visualizing the main carbon chain verical in the molecule. Each carbon on the vertical chain is represented by a cross.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 89

Conventionally the horizontal lines of the cross represent bonds projecting up from the carbon and the vertical lines represent the bonds going below the carbon.

Question 36.
Explain Wedge formula with illustration
OR
Write a note on Wedge formula.
Answer:
Wedge formula : When a tetrahedral carbon is imagined to be present in the plane of paper all the four bonds at this carbon cannot lie in the same plane. The bonds in the plane of paper are represented by normal lines, the bonds projecting above the plane of paper are represented by solid wedges (or simply by bold lines) while bonds going below the plane of paper are represented by broken wedges (or simply by broken lines).
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 90

Question 37.
Give a laboratory test to confirm the presence of halogen in the original organic compound.
Answer:
Haloalkanes are of neutral type in aqueous medium. On warming with aqueous sodium or potassium hydroxide the covalently bonded halogen in haloalkane is converted to halide ion.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 94

When this reaction mixture is acidified by adding dilute nitric acid and silver nitrate solution is added a precipitate of silver halide is formed which confirms presence of halogen in the original organic compound.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 95

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives Important Questions

Question 38.
Define the following :
Answer:
(1) Mechanism of a reaction : It is a step by step description of exactly how the reactants are transformed into products in as much details as possible.
(2) Substitution reaction : When a group bonded to a carbon in a substrate is replaced by another group to get a product with no change in state of hybridization of that carbon, the reaction is called substitution reaction.

Question 39.
Describe the action of aqueous KOH (or NaOH) on :
(1) ethyl bromide
(2) isopropyl bromide
(3) tert-butyl chloride
(4) methyl bromide
(5) 2-chlorobutane.
Answer:
(1) Ethyl bromide : When ethyl bromide (bromoethane) is refluxed with aqueous potassium hydroxide, ethyl alcohol is formed. The reaction is called a hydrolysis reaction.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 96
(2) Isopropyl bromide : When isopropyl bromide (2-bromopropane) is boiled with aqueous potassium hydroxide, isopropyl alcohol is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 97
(3) Tert-butyl chloride : When tert-butyl chloride is refluxed with aqueous potassium hydroxide, tert-butyl alcohol is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 98
(4) Methyl bromide : When methyl bromide (bromomethane) is heated with aq. KOH, it is hydrolysed to methyl alcohol (methanol).
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 99
(5) 2-chlorobutane : When 2-Chlorobutane is boiled with aqueous KOH, Butan-2-ol is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 100

Question 40.
Describe the action of sodium ethoxide on
(1) ethyl bromide
(2) methyl bromide :
OR
Write a note on Williamson’s synthesis.
OR
How are ethers prepared from alkyl halides?
Answer:
Williamson’s synthesis : When an alkyl halide (R – X) is heated with sodium alkoxide (R – O – Na), an ether is obtained. In this reaction halide (-X) of alkyl halide is replaced by an alkoxy group (-OR). This reaction is known as Williamson’s synthesis. This method is used to prepare simple (or symmetrical) ethers and mixed (or unsymmetrical) ethers.

Sodium alkoxide is obtained by a reaction of sodium with an alcohol.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 101

(1) Simple (symmetrical) ether : When an alkyl halide and sodium alkoxide having similar alkyl groups are heated, symmetrical ether is obtained.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 102

e.g., When ethyl bromide is heated with sodium ethoxide, diethyl ether is formed.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 103

(2) Mixed (unsymmetrical) ether : When an alkyl halide and sodium alkoxide having different alkyl groups are heated, unsymmetrical ether is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 104
When methyl bromide is heated sodium ethoxide, ethyl methyl ether is formed.Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 105
When ethyl bromide is heated with sodium meihoxide, ethyl methyl ether is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 106

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives Important Questions

Question 41.
What is the action of silver salt of carboxylic acid on alkyl halide?
Answer:
When an alkyl halide (R – X) is heated with silver salt of carboxylic acid (R -COOAg). an ester is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 107

Question 42.
Describe the action of alcoholic silver acetate on
(1) methyl bromide
(2) ethyl bromide.
Answer:
(1) Methyl bromide : When methyl bromide is heated with an alcoholic silver acetate, methyl acetate is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 108
(2) Ethyl bromide : When ethyl bromide is heated with an alcoholic silver acetate, ethyl acetate is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 109

Question 43.
What is the action of alcoholic silver propionate on ethyl bromide?
Answer:
When ethyl bromide is heated with an alcoholic silver propionate. ethyl propionate is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 110

Question 44.
Describe the action of excess of ammonia on (I) ethyl bromide (2) n.propyl bromide.
Answer:
(1) Ethyl bromide : When ethyl bromide is boiled under pressure with an excess of alcoholic ammonia, ethylamine (ethanamine) is formed. This is known as ‘ammonolysis of ethyl bromide.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 111

(2) n-propyl bromide : When n-propy1 bromide is boiled under pressure with an excess of ammonia, n-propyl amine (propanamine) is formed.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 112

Question 45.
What is ammonolysis? Give a suitable example for the reaction.
Answer:
When an alkyl halide is boiled under pressure with an excess of alcoholic solution of ammonia (NH3), corresponding (primary amine) alkyl amine is formed. This reaction is known as ammonolysis of alkyl halide.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 113

(1) Ethyl bromide : When ethyl bromide (bromoethane) is refluxed with aqueous potassium hydroxide, ethyl alcohol is formed. The reaction is called a hydrolysis reaction.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 96
(2) Isopropyl bromide : When isopropyl bromide (2-bromopropane) is boiled with aqueous potassium hydroxide, isopropyl alcohol is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 97
(3) Tert-butyl chloride : When tert-butyl chloride is refluxed with aqueous potassium hydroxide, tert-butyl alcohol is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 98
(4) Methyl bromide : When methyl bromide (bromomethane) is heated with aq. KOH, it is hydrolysed to methyl alcohol (methanol).
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 99
(5) 2-chlorobutane : When 2-Chlorobutane is boiled with aqueous KOH, Butan-2-ol is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 100

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives Important Questions

Question 46.
Describe the action of aqueous alcoholic potassium cyanide on
(1) ethyl bromide
(2) methyl iodide.
Answer:
Ethyl bromide : When ethyl bromide (bromoethane) is boiled with alcoholic solution of potassium cyanide in aqueous ethanol, ethyl cyanide (ethyl nitrile) is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 114
(2) Methyl iodide : When methyl iodide is boiled with alcoholic solution of potassium cyanide, methyl cyanide is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 115

Question 47.
Describe the action of alcoholic silver cyanide on
(1) ethyl bromide
(2) methyl chloride.
OR
Explain isocyanide reaction of
(1) ethyl bromide
(2) methyl chloride.
Answer:
(1) Ethyl bromide : When ethyl bromide is heated with alcoholic silver cyanide, ethyl isocyanide is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 116
(2) Methyl chloride : When .methyl chloride is heated with alcoholic silver cyanide, methyl isocyanide is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 117
The above reactions (1) and (2) are called isocyanide reaction.

Question 48.
Describe the action of potassium nitrite on
(i) ethyl bromide,
(ii) methyl chloride.
Answer:
(1) Ethyl bromide : When ethyl bromide is treated with potassium nitrite, ethyl nitrite is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 118
(2) Methyl chloride : When methyl chloride is treated with potassium nitrite, methyl nitrite is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 119

Question 49.
Describe the action of silver nitrite on (1) ethyl chloride (2) n-propyl bromide.
Answer:
(1) Ethy chloride : When ethyl chloride is treated with silver nitrite, nitroethane is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 120
(2) n-Propyt bromide: When n-propyl bromide is treated with silver nitrate, nitropropane is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 121

Question 50.
How will you convert (the following:

(1) Ethyl bromide to ethanol.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 128

(2) Ethyl bromide to propane nitrile.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 129

(3) Ethyl bromide to ethyl amine.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 130

(4) Ethyl bromide to ethyl acetate.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 131

(5) Ethyl bromide to ethyl isocyanide.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 132

(6) Ethyl bromide to ethyl methyl ether.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 133

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives Important Questions

(7) Ethyl bromide to n-butane.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 134

(8) Ethyl bromide to Ethyl magnesium bromide.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 135

Question 51.
Define the following :
Answer:
(1) Nucleophilic bimolecular reaction (SN2) : The substitution reaction in which a nucleophile reacts with the substrate and the rate of the reaction depends on the concentration of the substrate and the nucleophile is called a nucleophilic bimolecular reaction.

Example :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 136

(2) SN1 reaction : The substitution reaction in which a nucleophile reacts with the substrate and the rate of the reaction depends only on the concentration of the substrate is called nucleophilic unimolecular or first order reaction or SN1 reaction.

Question 52.
Explain, the mechanism of alkaline hydrolysis (reaction with aqueous KOH) of tert-butyl bromide (2-Bromo-2-methylpropane) with energy profile diagram.
OR
Explain only reaction mechanism for alkaline hydrolysis of tert-butyl bromide.
Answer:
(i) Consider alkaline hydrolysis of tert-butyl bromide (2-Bromo-2 methylpropane) with aqueous NaOH or KOH.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 137
(ii) Kinetics of the reaction : Due to steric hindrance of voluminous three methyl groups around carbon, nucleophile OH- cannot attack carbon atom directly. Hence, the reaction takes place in two steps.

Step I : This involves heterolytic fission of C – Br covalent bond in the substrate forming carbocation and Br. This is a slow process.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 138

Step II : This step involves attack of nucleophile OH- or carbocation forming C – OH bond and product tert-butyl alcohol. Since it involves ionic charge neutralisation, it is a fast step.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 139

Rate Determining Step (R.D.S.) : Since the first step is a slow step, it is R.D.S., and therefore the rate of the reaction depends on the concentration of only one reactant, (CH3) C – Br.
Rate = R = k [(CH3)3 C – Br] where k is a rate constant of the reaction.

SN1 reaction : The reaction between tert.butyl bromide and hydroxide ion to form tert.butyl alcohol follows a first-order kinetics. The rate of this reaction depends only on the concentration of one substance (tert-butyl bromide) and is independent of the concentration of alkali added. It is an unimolecular first (1st) order Nucleophilic Substitution reaction denoted as SN reaction.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives Important Questions

Stereochemistry and mechanism of the reaction : The reaction takes place in two steps and both the steps involve formation of transition states (T.S.).

T.S. -1 for first step :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 140

In this transition state, C – Br bond is partially broken, so that carbon atom carries partial positive charge (+δ) and Br carries partial negative charge (-δ) which further breaks forming carbocation and Br . Tert-butyl cation (carbocation) has a planar structure and the CH3 – C – CH3 bond angle is 120°. It is the intermediate of the reaction. It is unstable. In this step, hybridisation of carbon atom changes from sp3 (tetrahedral geometry) to sp (planar geometry).

T.S. – II for second step :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 141

In this transition state, C – OH bond is partially fonned so that carbon atom carries partial positive charge (+ δ) and OH carries partial negative charge ( -δ) which further forms tert-butyl alcohol.

Formation of a racemic mixture : Since OH has equal probability of the attack on carbocation from frontside and from backside, the products obtained are equal. In case of optical active alkyl halide, a racemic mixture is obtained.

Question 53.
Discuss SN2 mechanism of methyl bromide using aqueous KOH. Draw energy profile diagram.
OR
Discuss the mechanism of alkaline hydrolysis of methyl bromide or Bromomethane.
Answer:
(1) Consider alkaline hydrolysis of methyl bromide (Bromomethane). CH3Br with aqueous NaOH or KOH.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 142

(2) Stereochemistry and Kinetics of the reaction iR.D.S.) : This hydrolysis reaction takes place only in one step which is a rate determining step i.e. R.D.S. The rate of hydrolysis reaction depends on the Concentration of CH3Br
and 0H which are present in the R.D.S. of the reaction.
Rate = R = k [CH3Br] (OH]
where k is rate constant of the reaction.

SN2 reaction : The reaction between methyl bromide and hydroxide ion to form methanol follows a second order kinetics, since the rate of the reaction depends on the concentrations of two reacting species, namely methyl bromide and hydroxide ion it is bimolecular second order (2nd) Nucleophilic Substitution reaction denoted by SN2.

(3) Mechanism of the reaction :
(i) It is a single step mechanism. The reaction takes place in the following steps :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 143

(ii) Backside attack of the nucleophile : Nucleophile, OH attacks carbon atom of CH3Br from back side i. e. from opposite side to that of the leaving group i.e. Br to experience minimum steric repulsion and electrostatic repulsion between the incoming nucleophile (OH) and leaving Br.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives Important Questions

(iii) Transition state : When a nucleophile, OH approaches carbon atom of CH3Br, the potential energy of the system increases until a transition state (T.S.) of maximum potential energy is formed in which C – Br bond is partially broken and C – OH bond is partially formed. The negative charge is equally shared by both incoming nucleophile- OH and outgoing, leaving group-Br. (Thus, the total negative charge is diffused.)

(iv) In CH3Br, carbon atom is sp3 -hybridized and CH3Br molecule is tetrahedral. The hybridisation of carbon atom changes to sp2 hybridisation. The transition state contains pentacoordinate carbon having three δ (sigma) bonds in one plane making bond angles of 120° with each other i.e., H1; H2 and H3 atoms lie in one plane while two partial covalent bonds containing Br and OH lie collinear and on opposite sides perpendicular to the plane.

(v) Inversion of configuration : The transition state decomposes fast by the complete breaking of the C-Br bond and the new C-OH bond is formed on the other side. The breaking of C-Br bond and the formation of C-OH bond take place simultaneously. The energy required to break the C-Br bond is partly obtained from the energy released when C-OH bond is formed. The formation of product CH3OH is accompanied by complete or 100% inversion of configuration forming again sp3-hybridized carbon atom giving tetrahedral CH3OH molecule. But in this structure the positions of H2 and H3 atoms in the reactant (CH3Br) and in product are on the opposite side. This inversion of configuration is called Walden inversion.

Question 54.
Discuss the factors influencing SN1 and SN2 mechanism.
Answer:
(1) Nature of substrate : SN2 : The transition state (T.S.) of SN2 mechanism + is pentacoordinate, it is crowded. As a result SN2 mechanism is favoured in primary halides and least favoured in tertiary halides.

SN1 : A planar carbocation intermediate is formed in SN1 reaction. Bulky alkyl groups can be easily accommodated in planar carbocation and it has no steric crowding. As a result SN1 mechanism is favoured in tertiary halides and least favoured in primary halides.

The carbocation intermediate is stabilized by + effect of alkyl substituents and also by hyperconjugation y effect of alkyl substituents containing a-hydrogens. As a result, SN1 mechanism is favoured in tertiary halides and least favoured in primary halides.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 148

Thus, tertiary alkyl halides undergo nucleophilic substitution by SN1 mechanism while primary halides follow SN2 mechanism.

(2) Nucleophilicity of the reagent : A strong nucleophile attacks the substrate faster and favours SN2 mechanism. The rate of SN1 mechanism is independent of the nature of nucleophile. Nucleophile does not react in the 1st step (slow step) of SN1. Nucleophile reacts fast after the carbocation intermediate is formed.

(3) Solvent polarity : (1) SN1 reaction proceeds more rapidly in polar protic solvents than in aprotic solvent. Polar protic solvent decreases the rate of SN2 reaction. (2) In SN2 mechanism, rate depends on substrate as well as nucleophile. A polar solvent stabilizes nucleophile by solvation. Thus solvent deactivates the nucleophile by stabilizing it. Hence, aprotic solvents or solvent of low polarity will favour SN2 mechanism.

Question 55.
How does relative reactivity for alkaline hydrolysis with respect to SN2 and SN1 vary in the following alkyl halides :
(1) Bromomethane
(2) Bromoethane
(3) 2-Bromopropane
(4) 2-Bromo-2-methylpropane ?
Answer:
(A) Relative reactivity for SN2 mechanism decreases in the order of :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 153
(B) Relative reactivity for SN1 mechanism decreases in the order of :
2-Bromo-2-methylpropane > 2-Bromopropane > Bromoethane > Bromomethane
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 154

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives Important Questions

Question 56.
Explain with reason the relative order of reactivity of l°/2°/3° alkyl halides by SN1 mechanism.
Answer:
In alkaline hydrolysis of an alkyl halide by SN1 mechanism, the formation of carbocation as an intermediate product is involved.

The increasing order of a stability of carbocation is,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 155
The stability order for carbocation is 3° > 2° > 1°.
Therefore the increasing order of reactivity by SN1 mechanism of alkyl halides is
(1°) primary < (2°) secondary < (3°) tertiary

Question 57.
Which one of the following is more easily hydrolysed in SN1 and SN2 reaction by aqueous KOH, C6H5 CHCIC6H5 and C6H5CH2CI?
Answer:
In SN1 reaction C6H5CHCI C6H5 will be more easily hydrolysed than C6H5CH2CI
In SN2 reaction C6H5 CH2CI will be more easily hydrolysed than C6H5CHCIC6H5.

Question 58.
Choose the member that will react faster than the following pairs by SN1 mechanism.
(1) l-bromo-2, 2-dimethyl propane or 2-bromopropane.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 159
Answer:
The reactivity of SN1 reaction depends on the steric hindrance, in 2-bromopropane, a-carbon atom is attached to two methyl groups suffers greater steric hindrance to nucleophilic attack than l-bromo-2, 2-dimethyl propane. Hence, 2-bromopropane react faster by SN1 mechanism.

(2) 2-Iodo-2-methyl butane or 2-iodio-3-methyl butane.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 160
Answer:
Since, 2-Iodo-2-methyl butane is a tertiary alkyl halide, it undergoes SN-1 reaction faster than 2-iodo-3-methyl butane.

(3) 1-Chloro propane or 2-chloropropane.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 161
Answer:
Since, 2-chloropropane is a secondary alkyl halide, it undergoes SN-1 reaction faster than 1-chloropropane.

(4) 2-Iodo-2-methyl butane or tert-butyl chloride.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 162
Answer:
Since, iodine is a better leaving group than chloride 2-iodo-2-methyl butane undergo SN-1 reaction faster than tert-butyl chloride.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives Important Questions

Question 59.
Write a note on elimination reaction.
OR
Explain dehydrohalogenation reaction.
Answer:
When alkyl halide having at least one β-hydrogen is boiled with alcoholic solution of potassium hydroxide (KOH), an alkene is formed due to elimination of hydrogen atom from β-carbon and halogen atom from α-carbon, is called dehydrohalogenation.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 164

Tertiary butyl bromide when heated with alcoholic solution of potassium hydroxide forms isobutylene.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 165

This reaction is called β-elimination (or 1,2-elimination) reaction as it involves elimination of halogen and a β-hydrogen atom.

As hydrogen and halogen is removed in this reaction it is also known as dehydrohalogenation reaction.

Question 60.
Describe the action of alcoholic potassium hydroxide (aic. KOH) on
(1) ethyl bromide
(2) n-propyl bromide
(3) isopropyl bromide
(4) tert-butyl chlorIde.
Answer:
(1) Ethyl bromide : When ethyl bromide (bromoethane) is heated with alcoholic potassium hydroxide (alcoholic alkali). ethene (gas) is formed by the dehydrobrominaion reaction.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 166

(2) n-PropI bromide : When n-propyl bromide is heated with alcoholic potassium hydroxide, propene is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 167

(3) Isopropvl bromide : When isopropyl bromide (2-bromopropane) is boiled with alcoholic potassium hydroxide, propcne is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 168

(4) Tert-hutyl chloride: When ten-butyl chloride (2-chloro-2-methyl propanc) is hcatcd with alcoholic KOH.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 169

Question 61.
Describe the action of alc.KOH on 2-bromobutane.
When 2-bromobutane is boiled with alc.KOH on 2-bromobutane, a mixture of but-l-ene and but-2-ene is formed.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 170

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives Important Questions

Question 62.
Explain Saytzelf’s rule with suitable example.
Answer:
Saytzcff’s rule : In dehydrohalogenation reaction the preferred product is that alkene which has the greater number of alkyl groups attached to the doubly bonded carbon atoms.

Hence the number of alkyl substituents on doubly bonded Carbon atoms increases, the stability of the alkene giving its major products.

Hence the increasing stability of alkenes is.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 171

There are two types of fi hydrogens (β1 and β2) therefore two alkenes are expected.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 172

Question 63.
What is a Grignard reagent ?
Answer:
Grignard reagent : An organometallic compound in which the divalent magnesium is directly linked to an alkyl group (R -) and a halogen atom (X), and has general formula R – Mg – X is called Grignard reagent. OR When alkyl halide is treated with magnesium in dry ether as solvent, it gives alkyl magnesium halide. It is known as Grignard reagent.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 185

The carbon-magnesium bond is highly polar and magnesium-halogen bond is in ionic in nature. Grignard reagent is highly reactive. It is an important reagent and used in the preparation of a large number of organic compounds.

Question 64.
How is Grignard reagent prepared ?
Answer:
Grignard reagent is an alkyl magnesium halide, R – Mg – X obtained by the reaction of alkyl halide R – X with magnesium (Mg) in dry ether.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 186

When an alkyl halide like CH3I is added from a dropping funnel to a flask containing pieces of pure Mg in pure and dry ether (diethyl ether) and a trace of iodine, Grignard reagent, CH3 – Mg – I is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 187

Ethyl iodide when treated with magnesium in presence of dry ether forms ethyl magnesium iodide.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 188

Question 65.
Write a note on Grignard reagent.
Answer:
(1) Ethyl bromide : When ethyl bromide (bromoethane) is heated with alcoholic potassium hydroxide (alcoholic alkali). ethene (gas) is formed by the dehydrobrominaion reaction.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 166

(2) n-PropI bromide : When n-propyl bromide is heated with alcoholic potassium hydroxide, propene is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 167

(3) Isopropvl bromide : When isopropyl bromide (2-bromopropane) is boiled with alcoholic potassium hydroxide, propcne is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 168

(4) Tert-hutyl chloride: When ten-butyl chloride (2-chloro-2-methyl propanc) is hcatcd with alcoholic KOH.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 169

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 170

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives Important Questions

Question 66.
Describe the action of water on
(1) methyl magnesium iodide
(2) ethyl magnesium iodide.
Answer:
(1) Methyl magnesium iodide : When methyl magnesium iodide is treated with water, methane is obtained
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 190
(2) Ethyl magnesium iodide : When ethyl magnesium iodide is treated with water, ethane is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 191

Question 67.
Describe the action of ammonia on
(1) ethyl magnesium bromide
(2) n-propyl magnesium chloride.
Answer:
(1) Ethyl magnesium bromide : When ethyl magnesium bromide is treated with ammonia, ethane is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 192
(2) n-Propyl magnesium chloride : When n-propyl magnesium chloride is treated with ammonia, propane is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 193

Question 68.
Explain Wurtz reaction. OR Explain the action of sodium with alkyl halides.
Answer:
(1) When an alkyl halide is treated with metallic sodium in dry ether, the corresponding higher alkane is formed. This is called Wurtz reaction or Wurtz coupling reaction.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 194
(2) In this reaction the alkyl radicals from two molecules of the reacting alkyl halide combine or couple to form the higher alkane.

(3) Thus, methyl bromide reacts with sodium in ether to form ethane (C2H6), while ethyl bromide under the same conditions forms n-butane (C4H10).
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 195

(4) If a mixture of two different alkyl halides is treated with Na in dry ether, then a mixture of alkanes is obtained called self coupling products. For example, a mixture of CH3Br and C2H5Br gives propane along with C2H6 and C4H10.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 196

Question 69.
Explain the reaction of haloarene with alkyl halide and sodium metal.
Write a note on Wurtz-Fittig reaction.
Answer:
When an alkyl halide and an aryl halide is treated with sodium metal in dry ether the corresponding alkylarene (alkyl benzene) is formed. The reaction is known as Wurtz-Fittig reaction. This reaction allows alkylation of alkyl halides.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 197

Question 70.
Describe the action of aryl halide on sodium metal.
Answer:
Aryl halide reacts with sodium metal in dry ether, biphenyl is formed. This reaction is known as Fittig reaction.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 198

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives Important Questions

Question 71.
Identify the product A of following reaction.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 200
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 201

Question 72.
Explain the following substitution reactions of chlorobenzene :
(1) Halogenation
(2) Nitration
(3) Sulphonation.
Answer:
(1) Halogenation : When chlorobenzene is reacted with chlorine in presence of anhydrous ferric chloride, a mixture of ortho and para-dichlorobenzene (major product) is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 203
(2) Nitration : When chlorobenzene is heated with nitrating mixture (cone, nitric acid -I- cone, sulphuric acid) a mixture of l-chloro-4-nitro benzene (major product) and l-chloro-2-nitrobenzene is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 204
(3) Sulphonation : When chlorobenzene is heated with concentrated sulphuric acid, a mixture of 4-chlorobenzene sulphonic acid (major product) and 2-chlorobenzene sulphonic acid is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 205

Question 73.
Describe the action of the following on chlorobenzene :
(1) Methyl chloride in the presence of anhydrous AICI3
(2) Acetyl chloride in the presence of anhydrous AICI3.
Answer:
(1) Methyl chloride in the presence of anhydrous AICI3 : When chlorobenzene is treated with methyl chloride in the presence of anhydrous AICI3, a mixture of l-chloro-4-methyl benzene (major product) and l-chloro-2-methyl benzene is formed. Since, the alkyl group is introduced in the benzene ring, the reaction is termed as Friedel Craft’s alkylation.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 206

(2) Acetyl chloride in the presence of anhydrous AICI3 : When chlorobenzene is reacted with acetyl chloride in the presence of anhydrous AICI3, a mixture of 2-chloro acetophenone and 4-chloro acetophenone (major product) is formed. Since, the acetyl group is introduced in the benzene ring, the reaction is termed as Friedel Craft’s acylation.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 207

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives Important Questions

Question 74.
Write a note on Friedel Craft’s reaction.
Answer:

(1) Methyl chloride in the presence of anhydrous AICI3 : When chlorobenzene is treated with methyl chloride in the presence of anhydrous AICI3, a mixture of l-chloro-4-methyl benzene (major product) and l-chloro-2-methyl benzene is formed. Since, the alkyl group is introduced in the benzene ring, the reaction is termed as Friedel Craft’s alkylation.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 206

(2) Acetyl chloride in the presence of anhydrous AICI3 : When chlorobenzene is reacted with acetyl chloride in the presence of anhydrous AICI3, a mixture of 2-chloro acetophenone and 4-chloro acetophenone (major product) is formed. Since, the acetyl group is introduced in the benzene ring, the reaction is termed as Friedel Craft’s acylation.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 207

Question 75.
Convert 1-chlorobutane into the following compounds :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 221
Answer:
(1) 1-Chlorobutane to butan-l-ol :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 222
(2) 1-Chlorobutane to 1-iodobutane :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 223
(3) 1-Chlorobutane to n-butyl cyanide (CH3 – CH2 – CH2 – CH2 – CN) :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 224
(4) l-Chlorobutane to Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 225
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 226

Question 76.
Predict the expected product of substitution reactions :
(1) Isobutyl chloride + sodium ethoxide.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 227

(2) n-butyl chloride + sodium.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 228

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives Important Questions

(3) 1-chloropropane + aq. potassium hydroxide.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 229

(4) Aniline + NaNO2/HCl.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 230

Question 77.
Write the products:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 231
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 232

Question 78.
Identify A and B in the following :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 234
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 235

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 236
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 237

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 238
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 239

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 267
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 239

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 240
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 241

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 242
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 243

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives Important Questions

Question 79.
State the uses of the following compounds :
(1) Dichloromethane (CH2CI2)
(2) Trichloromethane or Chloroform (CHCI3)
(3) Tetrachloromethane or carbon tetrachloride (CCI4)
(4) Iodoform (CHI3)
(5) Freons
(6) DDT (p, p’-Dichlorodiphenyl trichloroethane).
Answer:
(1) Dichloromethane (CH2CI2) :

  • Dichloromethane dissolves wide range of organic compounds, hence it is used as solvent for many chemical reactions.
  • It is used as a solvent as a paint remover and degreaser.
  • It is used as propellant in aerosols and as a fumigant pesticide for grains and strawberries.
  • It is used to decaffinate tea or coffee.

(2) Trichloromethane or Chloroform (CHCI3) :

  • Chloroform in the production of chlorofluoromethane, freon refrigerant R-22.
  • It is used as solvent in pharmaceuticals, pesticides, gums, fats, resins and dye industry.
  • It is a good source of dichlorocarbene species.

(3) Tetrachloromethane or carbon tetrachloride (CCI4) :

  • Carbon tetrachloride is used in the manufacture of refrigerants.
  • It is used as a dry cleaning agent and as a pesticide for stored grains.
  • It is very useful solvent for oils, fats and resins. It serves as a source of chlorine.

(4) Iodoform (CHI3) :

  • Iodoform is used as antiseptic, dressing of wounds and sores.
  • On small scale it is used as disinfectant.

(5) Freons :

  • Freons are widely used as propellants in aerosol, products of food, cosmetics and pharmaceutical industries.
  • Freons containing bromine in their molecules are used as fire extinguishers.
  • They are used in aerosol insecticides, solvent for cleaning clothes and metallic surfaces.
  • It is used as foaming agents in the preparation of foamed plastics and in production of certain fluorocarbons.
  • It is used as refrigerants and air conditioning purposes.

Question 80.
State the environmental effects of the following compounds :
(1) Dichloromethane (CH2CI2)
(2) Trichloromethane or chloroform (CHCI3)
(3) Tetrachloromethane or carbon tetrachloride (CCI4)
(4) Iodoform (CHI3)
(5) Freon.s (CCI2F2, CCI3F, CHCIF2)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 247
Answer:
(1) Dichloromethane (CH2CI2) :

  • Higher levels of dichloromethane in air causes nausea, numbness in fingers and toes, dizziness.
  • Lower levels of dichloromethane causes impaired vision and hearing.
  • Direct contact with eyes can damage cornea.

(2) Trichloromethane or chloroform (CHCI3) :

  • When chloroform is exposed to air in the presence of sunlight, it slowly oxidised to phosgene, a poisonous compound, therefore it is stored in dark, amber coloured bottles.
  • Chloroform vapour when inhaled for a short time causes dizziness, headache and fatigue and if inhaled for a long time affects central nervous system.

(3) Tetrachloromethane or carbon tetrachloride (CCI4) :

  • Exposure to carbon tetrachloride causes eye irritation, damages nerve cells, vomiting sensation, dizziness, unconciousness or death. Long exposure to chloroform may affect liver.
  • When mixed with air it causes depletion of the ozone layer, which affects human skin leading to cancer.

(4) Iodoform (CHI3) : Iodoform has a strong smell. It causes irritation to skin and eyes. It may cause respiratory irritation or breathing difficulty, dizziness, nausea, depression of central nervous system, visual disturbance.

(5) Freons (CCI2F2, CCI3F, CHCIF2) :

  • Freon as refrigerant causes ozone depletion.
  • Freons have low toxicity and low biological activity.
  • Freons from propane group are more toxic in nature.
  • Regular large inhalation of freon results in breathing problems, organ damage, loss of consciousness.

(6) DDT :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 248

  • DDT is not readily metabolised by animals.
  • It is deposited and stored in fatty tissues.
  • Exposure to high doses of DDT may cause vomiting, tremors or shakiness.
  • Laboratory animal studies showed adverse effect of DDT on liver and reproduction.
  • DDT is a pressistent organic pollutant, readily absorbed in soils and tends to accumulate in the ecosystem.
  • When dissolved in oil or other lipid, it is readily absorbed by the skin. It is resistant to metabolism.
  • There is a ban on use of DDT due to all these adverse effects.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives Important Questions

Question 81.
What is the chemical name of freon?
Answer:
The chemical name of freon is Dichlorodifluoromethane.

Question 82.
What is the chemical name of DDT ?
Answer: The chemical name of DDT is p, p’-Dichlorodiphenyltrichloroethane.

Activity :
(1) Collect detailed information about Freons and their uses.
(2) Collect information about DDT as a persistent pesticide.
Reference books :
(1) Organic chemistry by Morrison, Boyd, Bhattacharjee, 7th edition, Pearson.
(2) Organic chemistry by Finar, Vol 1, 6th edition, Pearson

Multiple Choise Questions

Question 83.
Select and write the most appropriate answer from the given alternatives for each sub-question :

Question 1.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 250
Answer:
(b) CH3 – CH2 – CH2 – I

Question 2.
The rate of SN2 reaction depends on the concentra¬tion of
(a) only the substrate
(b) only the reagent
(c) both the substrate and the reagent
(d) neither the substrate nor the reagent
Answer:
(c) both the substrate and the reagent

Question 3.
In SN2 reaction, the hydrolysis of alkyl halide shows
(a) the retention of configuration
(b) the inversion of configuration
(c) both retention and inversion of configuration
(d) no change in the configuration
Answer:
(b) the inversion of configuration

Question 4.
The one step exothermic reaction is
(a) SN1
(b) SN2
(C) SN
(d) S2N
Answer:
(b) SN2

Question 5.
Which of the following is correct about SN2 mechanism?
(a) Two step reaction
(b) Complete inversion of configuration
(c) Formation of carbonium ion
(d) Favoured by polar solvent
Answer:
(b) Complete inversion of configuration

Question 6.
Which of the following is not a nucleophile?
(a) Ammonia
(b) Ammonium ion
(c) Primary amine
(d) Secondary amine
Answer:
(d) Secondary amine

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives Important Questions

Question 7.
Which of the following undergoes nucleophilic substitution exclusively by SN2 mechanism ?
(a) ethyl chloride
(b) isopropyl chloride
(c) chlorobenzene
(d) benzyl chloride
Answer:
(d) benzyl chloride

Question 8.
Which of the following is most reactive towards nucleophilic substitution reaction ?
(a) CH2 = CH – CI
(b) CH3CH = CHCI
(c) C6H5CI
(d) CICH2 – CH = CH2
Answer:
(d) CICH2 – CH = CH2

Question 9.
The stability order of carbocation is
(a) 2° > 3° > 1°
(b) 3° > 2° > 1°
(c) 3° > 1° > 2°
(d) 1° > 3° > 2°
Answer:
(b) 3° > 2° > 1°

Question 10.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 255
(a) ethane
(b) propane
(c) n-butane
(d) n-pentane
Answer:
(c) n-butane

Question 11.
Which of the following characteristic properties of the enantiomers is correct?
(a) The enantiomers possess same physical and chemical properties
(b) The enantiomers are optically active compounds
(c) The enantiomers have different optical rotations
(d) All of these
Answer:
(d) All of these

Question 12.
The optically inactive compound is
(a) glucose
(b) lactic acid
(c) isopropyl alcohol
(d) 2-bromo butane
Answer:
(c) isopropyl alcohol

Question 13.
A compound with the molecular formula CH2OH(CHOH)3CH2OH has optically active forms
(a) 3
(b) 4
(c) 6
(d) 8
Answer:
(d) 8

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives Important Questions

Question 14.
A racemic mixture consists of
(a) equal amount of d and l isomers
(b) unequal amounts of d and / isomers
(c) unknown amounts of d and / isomers
(d) only d isomers
Answer:
(a) equal amount of d and l isomers

Question 15.
Which of the following compounds is not optically active ?
(a) Lactic acid
(b) Secondary butyl chloride
(c) n-propyl iodide
(d) Glucose
Answer:
(c) n-propyl iodide

Question 16.
Which of the following compounds shows optical activity ?
(a) n-butyl chloride
(b) isobutyl chloride
(c) sec-butyl chloride
(d) t-butyl chloride
Answer:
(c) sec-butyl chloride

Question 17.
The major product of the following reaction is
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 256
Answer:
(c)

Question 18.
The above reaction is known as
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 257
(a) Wurtz-Fittig reaction
(b) Friedel Craft’s reaction
(c) Sandmeyer’s reaction
(d) Swarts reaction
Answer:
(b) Friedel Craft’s reaction

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives Important Questions

Question 19.
Iodoform is used as
(a) an anaesthetic
(b) an antiseptic
(c) an analgesic
(d) an antibiotic
Answer:
(b) an antiseptic

Question 20.
p, p’-dichlorodiphenyl trichloroethane is used as
(a) insecticide
(b) anaesthetic
(c) antiseptic
(d) refrigerant
Answer:
(a) insecticide

Question 21.
The order of reactivity in nucleophilic substitution reaction is
(a) CH3F < CH3C1 < CH3I < CH3Br
(b) CH3F < CH3C1 < CH3Br < CH3I
(c) CH3F < CH3Br < CH3C1 < CH3I
(d) CH3I < CH3Br < CH3C1 < CH3F
Answer:
(b) CH3F < CH3C1 < CH3Br < CH3I

Question 22.
Racemate is
(a) optically active
(b) optically dextro rotatory
(c) optically inactive
(d) optically laevorotatory
Answer:
(c) optically inactive

Question 23.
The number of asymmetric carbon atoms in glucose are
(a) 2
(b) 3
(c) 4
(d) 5
Answer:
(c) 4

Question 24.
The geometry of carbon lum ion is
(a) Tetrahedral
(b) planar
(c) linear
(d) pyramidal
Answer:
(b) planar

Question 25.
In its nucleophilic substitution reaction, aryl halide resembles
(a) Vinyl chloride
(b) allyl chloride
(e) Benzyl chloride
(d) ethyl chloride
Answer:
(a) Vinyl chloride

Question 26.
The weakest C-Cl bond is present in
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 258
Answer:
(d)

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives Important Questions

Question 27.
Which alkyl halide among the following com¬pounds has the highest boiling point ?
(a) (CH3)3CCI
(b) CH3CH2CH2CH2CI
(c) CH3CH2CH2C1
(d) CH3CH(CH3)CH2CI
Answer:
(b) CH3CH2CH2CH2CI

Question 28.
It is difficult to break C-Cl bond in CH2 = CH – CI due to
(a) Hyper conjugation
(b) Resonance
(c) Electromeric effect
(d) Inductive effect
Answer:
(b) Resonance

Question 29.
Which one of the following when heated with metallic sodium will not give the corresponding alkane ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 259
Answer:
(c)

Question 30.
The most reactive alkyl halide towards SN2 reac¬tion is
(a) CH3X
(b) R3CX
(C) R2CHX
(d) RCH2X
Answer:
(a) CH3X

Question 31.
The number of electrons surrounding the carbon- ium ion is
(a) 6
(b) 8
(c) 10
(d) 7
Answer:
(a) 6

Question 32.
The lowest stability of carbocation among the compounds
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 260
Answer:
(a)

Question 33.
Carbon atom in methyl carbocation contains how many pairs of electrons?
(a) 8
(b) 4
(c) 3
(d) 5
Answer:
(b) 4

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives Important Questions

Question 34.
The optically inactive compound is
(a) Glucose
(b) Lactic acid
(c) 2-Chlorobutane
(d) 2-Chloropropane
Answer:
(d) 2-Chloropropane

Question 35.
The hydrogen halide which does not obey Markownikv rule in presence of peroxide is
(a) HC1
(b) HBr
(c) HF
(d) HI
Answer:
(b) HBr

Question 36.
Which one of the following is NOT used to prepare alkyl halide from an alcohol ?
(a) SOCl2
(b) PC13
(c) HC1 + ZnCl2
(d) NaCl
Answer:
(d) NaCl

Question 37.
The total number of electrons present in the central carbon atom of a free radical is
(a) 7
(b) 8
(c) 9
(d) 6
Answer:
(a) 7

Question 38.
In which of the following pairs both are nucleophiles ?
(a) BF3, AICI3
(b) NO+2, Cl
(c) CN, NH3
(d) Br+, BC13
Answer:
(c) CN, NH3

Question 39.
Which one of the following alkane is NOT formed in Wurtz reaction ?
(a) Methane
(b) Ethane
(c) Propane
(d) Butane
Answer:
(a) Methane

Question 40.
Which of the following groups has highest priority according to R, S convention?
(a) CH2OH
(b) COOH
(c) COCH3
(d) COOCH3
Answer:
(d) COOCH3

Question 41.
The halogen atom in aryl halides is
(a) o- and p-di reefing
(b) m-directing
(c) o, m and p-di reefing
(d) only m-directing
Answer:
(a) o- and p-di reefing

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives Important Questions

Question 42.
Chlorobenzene can be obtained by benzene diazonium chloride by
(a) Friedel Craft’s reaction
(b) Wurtz reaction
(c) Gatterman’s reaction
(d) Fittig reaction
Answer:
(c) Gatterman’s reaction

Question 43.
Which of the following carbocations is least stable ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 261
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 262
Answer:
(c)

Question 44.
But-l-ene on reaction with HCI in the presence of sodium peroxide yields
(a) n-butyl chloride
(b) isobutyl chloride
(c) secondary butyl chloride
(d) tertiary butyl chloride
Answer:
(c) secondary butyl chloride

Question 45.
Carbon tetrachloride is used as
(a) anaesthetic
(b) antiseptic
(c) dry cleaning agent
(d) fire extinguisher
Answer:
(c) dry cleaning agent

Question 46.
Identify the product D in the following sequence of reactions :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 263
(a) 2, 2-dimethyl butane
(b) 2, 3-dimethyl butane
(C) hexane
(d) 2, 4-dimethylpentane
Answer:
(b) 2, 3-dimethyl butane

Question 47.
The preparation of alkyl fluoride from alkyl chlor ide, in presence of metallic fluorides is known as
(a) Williamson’s reaction
(b) Finkeistein reaction
(c) Swarts reaction
(d) Wurlz reaction
Answer:
(c) Swarts reaction

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives Important Questions

Question 48.
UPAC name of the following compound is
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 10 Halogen Derivatives 264
(a) 3-Bromo-3, 4-dimetbyiheptane
(b) 3,4-dimethyl-3-bromoheptane
(c) 5-Bromo-4,5-dimethylheptane
(d) 4,5-dimethyl-5-bromoheptane
Answer:
(a) 3-Bromo-3, 4-dimetbyiheptane

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 Solutions

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 12th Chemistry Textbook Solutions Chapter 2 Solutions Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 12th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 Solutions

1. Choose the most correct answer.

Question i.
The vapour pressure of a solution containing 2 moles of a solute in 2 moles of water (vapour pressure of pure water = 24 mm Hg) is
(a) 24 mm Hg
(b) 32 mm Hg
(c) 48 mm Hg
(d) 12 mm Hg
Answer:
(d) 12 mm Hg

Question ii.
The colligative property of a solution is
(a) vapour pressure
(b) boiling point
(c) osmotic pressure
(d) freezing point
Answer:
(c) osmotic pressure

Question iii.
In calculating osmotic pressure the concentration of solute is expressed in
(a) molarity
(b) molality
(c) mole fraction
(d) mass per cent
Answer:
(a) molarity

Question iv.
Ebullioscopic constant is the boiling point elevation when the concentration of solution is
(a) 1 m
(b) 1 M
(c) 1 mass%
(d) 1 mole fraction of solute
Answer:
(a) 1 m

Question v.
Cryoscopic constant depends on
(a) nature of solvent
(b) nature of solute
(c) nature of solution
(d) number of solvent molecules
Answer:
(a) nature of solvent

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 Solutions

Question vi.
Identify the correct statement
(a) vapour pressure of solution is higher than that of pure solvent.
(b) boiling point of solvent is lower than that of solution
(c) osmotic pressure of solution is lower than that of solvent
(d) osmosis is a colligative property.
Answer:
(b) boiling point of solvent is lower than that of solution

Question vii.
A living cell contains a solution which is isotonic with 0.3 M sugar solution. What osmotic pressure develops when the cell is placed in 0.1 M KCl solution at body temperature ?
(a) 5.08 atm
(b) 2.54 atm
(c) 4.92 atm
(d) 2.46 atm
Answer:
(c) 4.92 atm

Question viii.
The osmotic pressure of blood is 7.65 atm at 310 K. An aqueous solution of glucose isotonic with blood has the percentage (by volume)
(a) 5.41%
(b) 3.54%
(c) 4.53%
(d) 53.4%
Answer:
(a) 5.41%

Question ix.
Vapour pressure of a solution is
(a) directly proportional to the mole fraction of the solute
(b) inversely proportional to the mole fraction of the solute
(c) inversely proportional to the mole fraction of the solvent
(d) directly proportional to the mole fraction of the solvent
Answer:
(d) directly proportional to the mole fraction of the solvent

Question x.
Pressure cooker reduces cooking time for food because
(a) boiling point of water involved in cooking is increased
(b) heat is more evenly distributed in the cooking space
(c) the higher pressure inside the cooker crushes the food material
(d) cooking involves chemical changes helped by a rise in temperature
Answer:
(a) boiling point of water involved in cooking is increased

Question xi.
Henry’s law constant for a gas CH3Br is 0.159 mol dm-3 atm at 250°C. What is the solubility of CH3Br in water at 25 °C and a partial pressure of 0.164 atm?
(a) 0.0159 mol L-1
(b) 0.164 mol L-1
(c) 0.026 M
(d) 0.042 M
Answer:
(c) 0.026 M

Question xii.
Which of the following statement is NOT correct for 0.1 M urea solution and 0.05 M sucrose solution ?
(a) osmotic pressure exhibited by urea solution is higher than that exhibited by sucrose solution
(b) urea solution is hypertonic to sucrose solution
(c) they are isotonic solutions
(d) sucrose solution is hypotonic to urea solution
Answer:
(c) they are isotonic solutions

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 Solutions

2. Answer the following in one or two sentences

Question i.
What is osmotic pressure ?
Answer:
(1) Definition : The osmotic pressure is defined as the excess mechanical pressure required to be applied to a solution separated by a semipermeable membrane from pure solvent or a dilute solution to prevent the osmosis or free passage of the solvent molecules at a given temperature. The osmotic pressure is a colligative property.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 Solutions 1
Osmosis and osmotic pressure

(2) Explanation : Consider an inverted thistle funnel on the mouth of which a semipermeable membrane is firmly fastened. It is filled with the experimental solution and immersed in a solvent like water. As a result, solvent molecules pass through the membrane into the solution in the funnel causing rising of level in the arm of thistle funnel. This increases the hydrostatic pressure. At a certain stage this rising level stops indicating an equilibrium between the rates of flow of solvent molecules from solvent to solution and from solution to solvent. The hydrostatic pressure at this stage represents osmotic pressure of the solution in the thistle funnel.

Question ii.
A solution concentration is expressed in molarity and not in molality while considering osmotic pressure. Why ?
Answer:

  1. While calculating osmotic pressure by equation, π = CRT, the concentration is expressed in molarity but not in molality.
  2. This is because the measurements of osmotic pressure are made at a certain constant temperature.
  3. Molarity depends upon temperature but molality is independent of temperature.
  4. Hence in osmotic pressure measurements, concentration is expressed in molarity.

Question iii.
Write the equation relating boiling point elevation to the concentration of solution.
Answer:
The elevation in the boiling point of a solution is directly proportional to the molal concentration (expressed in mol kg-1) of the solution.
Hence, if ΔTb is the elevation in the boiling point of a solution of molal concentration m then,
ΔTb ∝ m
∴ ΔTb = Kb m
where Kb is a proportionality constant.
If m = 1 molal,
ΔTb = Kb
Kb is called the ebullioscopic constant or molal elevation constant. Kb is characteristic of the solvent.

Question iv.
A 0.1 m solution of K2SO4 in water has freezing point of -0.43 °C. What is the value of van’t Hoff factor if Kf for water is 1.86 K kg mol-1?
Answer:
Given : m = 0.1 m, ΔTf = 0 – (-0.43) = 0.43 °C
Kf = 1.86 K kg mol-1, i = ?
ΔTf = i × Kf × m
∴ i = \(\frac{\Delta T_{\mathrm{f}}}{K_{\mathrm{f}} \times m}=\frac{0.43}{1.86 \times 0.1}\) = 2.312
van’t Hoff factor = i = 2.312

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 Solutions

Question v.
What is van’t Hoff factor?
Answer:
Definition of the van’t Hoff factor, i : It is defined as a ratio of the observed colligative property of the solution to the theoretically calculated colligative property of the solution without considering molecular change.

The van’t Hoff factor can be represented as,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 Solutions 2

This colligative property may be the lowering of vapour pressure of a solution, the osmotic pressure, the elevation in the boiling point or the depression in the freezing point of the solution. Hence,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 Solutions 3

  • When the solute neither undergoes dissociation or association in the solution, then, i = 1
  • When the solute undergoes dissociation in the solution, then, i > 1
  • When the solute undergoes association in the solution, then i < 1

From the value of the van’t Hoff factor, the degree of dissociation of electrolytes, degree of association of nonelectrolytes can be obtained.

van’t Hoff factor gives the important information about the solute molecules in the solution and chemical bonding in them.

Question vi.
How is van’t Hoff factor related to degree of ionization?
Answer:
Consider 1 dm3 of a solution containing m moles of an electrolyte AxBy. The electrolyte on dissociation gives x number of Ay+ ions and y number of Bx- ions. Let α be the degree of dissociation.

At equilibrium,
AxBy ⇌ xAy+ + yBx-
For 1 mole of electrolyte : 1 – α,  xα,  yα
and For ‘m’ moles of an electrolyte : m(1 – α), mxα, myα are the number of particles.
Total number of moles at equilibrium, will be,
Total moles = m(1 – α) + mxα + myα
= m[(1 – α) + xα + yα]
= m[1 + xα + yα – α]
= m[1 + α(x + y – 1)]

The van’t Hoff factor i will be,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 Solutions 4
If total number of ions from one mole of electrolyte is denoted by n, then (x + y) = n
∴ i = 1 + α(n – 1)
∴ α(n – 1) = i – 1
∴ α = \(\frac{i-1}{n-1}\) ……(1)
This is a relation between van’t Hoff factor i and degree of dissociation of an electrolyte.

Question vii.
Which of the following solutions will have higher freezing point depression and why ?
a. 0.1 m NaCl b. 0.05 m Al2(SO4)3
Answer:
(1) Freezing point depression is a colligative property, hence depends on the number of particles in the solution.
(2) More the number of particles in the solution, higher is the depression in freezing point.
(3) The number of particles (ions) from electrolytes are,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 Solutions 5
(4) Therefore Al2(SO4)3 solution will have higher freezing point depression.

Question viii.
State Raoult’s law for a solution containing a nonvolatile solute.
Answer:
Statement of Raoult’s law : The law states that the vapour pressure of a solvent over the solution of a nonvolatile solute is equal to the vapour pressure of the pure solvent multiplied by mole fraction of the solvent at constant temperature.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 Solutions

Question ix.
What is the effect on the boiling point of water if 1 mole of methyl alcohol is added to 1 dm3 of water? Why?
Answer:

  • The boiling point of water (or any liquid) depends on its vapour pressure.
  • Higher the vapour pressure, lower is the boiling point.
  • When 1 mole of volatile methyl alcohol is added to 1 dm3 of water, its vapour pressure is increased decreasing the boiling point of water.

Question x.
Which of the four colligative properties is most often used for molecular mass determination? Why?
Answer:

  1. Since osmotic pressure has large values, it can be measured more precisely.
  2. The osmotic pressure can be measured at a suitable constant temperature.
  3. The molecular masses can be measured more accurately.
  4. Therefore, it is more useful to determine molecular masses of expensive substances by osmotic pressure.

3. Answer the following.

Question i.
How vapour pressure lowering is related to a rise in boiling point of solution?
Answer:
(1) The boiling point of a liquid is the temperature at which the vapour pressure of the liquid becomes equal to the external pressure, generally 1 atm (101.3 × 103 Nm-2).

(2) When a liquid is heated, its vapour pressure rises till it becomes equal to the external pressure.
If the liquid has a low vapour pressure, it has a higher boiling point.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 Solutions 6
Vapour pressure curve showing elevation in boiling point

(3) When a nonvolatile solute is added to a solvent, its vapour pressure decreases, hence the boiling point increases.
This is explained by graphical representation of the vapour pressure and the boiling point of the pure solvent and the solution.

If T0 and T are the boiling points of a pure solvent and a solution, then the elevation in the boiling point is given by,
ΔTb = T – T0
The curve AB, represents the variation in the vapour pressure of a pure solvent with temperature while curve CD represents the variation in the vapour pressure of the solution.

(4) This elevation in the boiling point is proportional to the lowering of the vapour pressure, i.e., P0 – P, where P0 and P are the vapour pressures of the pure solvent and the solution.
[ΔTb ∝ (P0 – P) or ΔTb ∝ ΔP]

Question ii.
What are isotonic and hypertonic solutions?
Answer:
(1) Isotonic solutions : The solutions having the same osmotic pressure at a given temperature are called isotonic solutions.

Explanation : If two solutions of substances A and B contain nA and nB moles dissolved in volume V (in dm3) of the solutions, then their concentrations are,
CA = \(\frac{n_{\mathrm{A}}}{V}\) (in mol dm-3) and
CB = \(\frac{n_{\mathrm{B}}}{V}\) (in mol dm-3)

If the absolute temperature of both the solutions is T, then by the van’t Hoff equation,
πA = CART and πB = CBRT, where πA and πB are their osmotic pressures.
For the isotonic solutions,
πA = πB
∴ CA = CB
∴ \(\frac{n_{\mathrm{A}}}{V}=\frac{n_{\mathrm{B}}}{V}\)
∴ nA = nB
Hence, equal volumes of the isotonic solutions at the same temperature will contain equal number of moles (hence, equal number of molecules) of the substances.

(2) Hypertonic solutions : When two solutions have different osmotic pressures, then the solution having higher osmotic pressure is said to be a hypertonic solution with respect to the other solution.

Explanation : Consider two solutions of substances A and B having osmotic pressures πA and πB. If πB is greater than πA, then the solution B is a hypertonic solution with respect to the solution A.
Hence, if CA and CB are their concentrations, then CB > CA. Hence, for equal volume of the solutions, nB > nA.

Question iii.
A solvent and its solution containing a nonvolatile solute are separated by a semipermable membrane. Does the flow of solvent occur in both directions? Comment giving reason.
Answer:

  1. When a solvent and a solution containing a non-volatile solute are separated by a semipermeable membrane, there arises a flow of solvent molecules from solvent to solution as well as from solution to solvent.
  2. Due to higher vapour pressure of solvent than solution, the rate of flow of solvent molecules from solvent to solution is higher.
  3. As more and more solvent passes into solution due to osmosis, the solvent content increases, and the rate of backward flow increases.
  4. At a certain stage an equilibrium is reached where both the opposing rates become equal attaining an equilibrium.

Question iv.
The osmotic pressure of CaCl2 and urea solutions of the same concentration at the same temperature are respectively 0.605 atm and 0.245 atm. Calculate van’t Hoff factor for CaCl2.
Answer:
Given : πCacl2 = 0.605 atm;
πUrea = 0.245 atm
For urea solution, van’t Hoff factor, i = 1
πCacl2 = i × (CRT)Cacl2
πUrea = (CRT)Urea
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 Solutions 7
van’t Hoff factor = i = 2.47

Question v.
Explain reverse osmosis.
Answer:
Reverse osmosis : The phenomenon of the passage of solvent like water under high pressure from the concentrated aqueous solution like seawater into pure water through a semipermeable membrane is called reverse osmosis.

The osmotic pressure of seawater is about 30 atmospheres. Hence when pressure more than 30 atmospheres is applied on the solution side, regular osmosis stops and reverse osmosis starts. Hence pure water from seawater enters the other side of pure water.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 Solutions 8
Purification of seawater by reverse osmosis

For this purpose of suitable semipermeable membrane is required which can withstand high pressure conditions over a long period.
This method is used successfully in Florida since 1981 producing more than 10 million litres of pure water per day.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 Solutions

Question vi.
How molar mass of a solute is determined by osmotic pressure measurement?
Answer:
Consider V dm3 (litres) of a solution containing W2 mass of a solute of molar mass M2 at a temperature T.
Number of moles of solute, n2 = \(\frac{W_{2}}{M_{2}}\)
The osmotic pressure π is given by,
π = \(\frac{W_{2} R T}{M_{2} V}\)
∴ M2 = \(\frac{W_{2} R T}{\pi V}\)
By measuring osmotic pressure of a solution, the molar mass of a solute can be calculated.
Since osmotic pressure can be measured more precisely, it is widely used to measure molar masses of the substances.

Question vii.
Why vapour pressure of a solvent is lowered by dissolving a nonvolatile solute into it?
Answer:
Lowering of vapour pressure of a solution :
When a nonvolatile solute is added to a pure solvent, the surface area is covered by the solute molecule decreasing the rate of evaporation, hence its vapour pressure decreases. This decrease in vapour pressure is called lowering of vapour pressure.

If P0 is the vapour pressure of a pure solvent (liquid) and P is the vapour pressure of the solution, where P < P0, then, (P0 – P) is the lowering of the vapour pressure.

Question viii.
Using Raoult’s law, how will you show that ∆P = \(\boldsymbol{P}_{1}^{0}\)x2 ? Where x2 is the mole fraction of solute in the solution and \(\boldsymbol{P}_{1}^{0}\) vapour pressure of pure solvent.
Answer:
If x1 and x2 are the mole fractions of solvent and solute respectively, then
x1 + x2
By Raoult’s law,
P = x1 × P0
where P0 is the vapour pressure of a pure solvent and P is the vapour pressure of the solution at given temperature.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 Solutions 9

Question ix.
While considering boiling point elevation and freezing point depression a solution concentration is expressed in molality and not in molarity. Why?
Answer:

  • Boiling point elevation and freezing point depression involve temperature changes, (ΔTb and ΔTf).
  • Since molarity depends on temperature but molality is independent of temperature we use molality and not molarity in considering boiling point elevation and freezing point depression.

Question 4.
Derive the relationship between degree of dissociation of an electrolyte and van’t Hoff factor.
Answer:
Consider 1 dm3 of a solution containing m moles of an electrolyte AxBy. The electrolyte on dissociation gives number of Ay+ ions and y number of Bx- ions. Let α be the degree of dissociation.

At equilibrium,
AxBy ⇌ xAy+ + yBx-
For 1 mole of electrolyte : 1 – α, xα, yα and
For ‘m’ moles of an electrolyte : m(1 – α), mxα, myα are the number of particles.
Total number of moles at equilibrium, will be,
Total moles = m(1 – α) + mxα + myα
= m[(1 – α) + xα + yα]
= m[1 – xα + yα – α]
= m[1 + α(x + y – 1)]
The van’t Hoff factor i will be,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 Solutions 10
If total number of ions from one mole of electrolyte is denoted by n, then (x + y) = n
∴ i = 1 + α(n – 1)
∴ α(n – 1) = i – 1
∴ α = \(\frac{i-1}{n-1}\) ……..(1)
This is a relation between van’t Hoff factor i and degree of dissociation of an electrolyte.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 Solutions

Question 5.
What is effect of temperature on solubility of solids in water? Give examples.
Answer:
The solubility of a solid solute depends upon temperature.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 Solutions 11
Variation of solubilities of some ionic solids with temperature

  • Generally rise in temperature increases the solubility. This is due to expansion of holes or empty spaces in the liquid solvent. Generally 10 °C rise in temperature, increases the solubility of solids two fold.
  • Dissolution process may be endothermic or exothermic.
  • The solubility of the substances like NaBr, NaCl, KCl, etc. changes slightly with the increase in temperature.
  • The solubility of the salts like NaNO3, KNO3, KBr, etc. increases appreciably with the increase in temperature.
  • The solubility of Na2SO4 first increases and after 30 °C decreases with the increase in temperature.

This variation in solubility with temperature can be used to separate the salts from the mixture by fractional crystallisation.

Question 6.
Obtain the relationship between freezing point depression of a solution containing nonvolatile nonelectrolyte and its molar mass.
Answer:
The freezing point depression, ΔTf of a solution is directly proportional to molality (m) of the solution.
∴ ΔTf ∝ m
∴ ΔTf = Kf m
where Kf is a molal depression constant.
The molality of a solution is given by,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 Solutions 12
If W1 grams of a solvent contain W2 grams of a solute of the molar mass M2, then the molality m of the solution is given by,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 Solutions 13
If the weights are expressed in kg then,
ΔTf = Kf × \(\frac{W_{2}}{W_{1} M_{2}}\)
The unit of Kf is K kg mol-1
Hence, from the measurement of the depression in the freezing point of the solution, the molar mass of the substance can be determined.

Question 7.
Explain with diagram the boiling point elevation in terms of vapour pressure lowering.
Answer:
(1) The boiling point of a liquid is the temperature at which the vapour pressure of the liquid becomes equal to the external pressure, generally 1 atm (101.3 × 103 Nm-2).

(2) When a liquid is heated, its vapour pressure rises till it becomes equal to the external pressure.
If the liquid has a low vapour pressure, it has a higher boiling point.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 Solutions 14
Vapour pressure curve showing elevation in boiling point

(3) When a nonvolatile solute is added to a solvent, its vapour pressure decreases, hence the boiling point increases.
This is explained by graphical representation of the vapour pressure and the boiling point of the pure solvent and the solution.

If T0 and T are the boiling points of a pure solvent and a solution, then the elevation in the boiling point is given by,
ΔTb = T – T0
The curve AB, represents the variation in the vapour pressure of a pure solvent with temperature while curve CD represents the variation in the vapour pressure of the solution.

(4) This elevation in the boiling point is proportional to the lowering of the vapour pressure, i.e., P0 – P, where P0 and P are the vapour pressures of the pure solvent and the solution.
[ΔTb ∝ (P0 – P) or ΔTb ∝ ΔP]

Question 8.
Fish generally needs O2 concentration in water at least 3.8 mg/L for survival. What partial pressure of O2 above the water is needed for the survival of fish? Given the solubility of O2 in water at 0 °C and 1 atm partial pressure is 2.2 × 10-3 mol/L (0.054 atm)
Answer:
Given : Required concentration of O2
= 3.8 mg/L
= \(\frac{3.8 \times 10^{-3}}{32} \mathrm{~mol} \mathrm{~L}^{-1}\)
Solubility of O2 = 2.2 × 10-3 mol L-1
P = 1 atm
Partial pressure of O2 needed = Po2 = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 Solutions 15
Pressure needed = Po2 = 0.05397 atm.

Question 9.
The vapour pressure of water at 20 °C is 17 mm Hg. What is the vapour pressure of solution containing 2.8 g urea in 50 g of water? (16.17 mm Hg)
Answer:
Given : Vapour pressure of pure solvent (water) = P0
= 17 mm Hg
Weight of solvent = W1 = 50 g
Weight of solute (urea) = 2.8 g
Molecular weight of a solvent = M1 = 18
Molecular weight of a solute (urea) = M2
= 60 g mol-1
\(\frac{P_{0}-P}{P_{0}}=\frac{W_{2} \times M_{1}}{W_{1} \times M_{2}}\)
∴ \(\frac{17-P}{17}=\frac{2.8 \times 18}{50 \times 60}\) = 0.0168
∴ 17 – P = 17 × 0.0168
17 – P = 0.2856
∴ P= 17 – 0.2856
= 16.7144 mm Hg
Vapour pressure of solution = 16.7144 mm Hg

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 Solutions

Question 10.
A 5% aqueous solution (by mass) of cane sugar (molar mass 342 g/mol) has freezing point of 271K. Calculate the freezing point of 5% aqueous glucose solution.
Answer:
Given : W2 = 5 g cane sugar; W1 = 100 – 5 = 95 g
M2 = 342 g mol-1; Tf1 = 271 K;
ΔTf1 = 273 – 271 = 2 K; Tf = ?
W2 = 5 g glucose, W’1 = 100 – 5 = 95 g,
M’2 = 180 g mol-1, ΔTf2 = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 Solutions 16
= 12.996 K kg mol-1
≅ 13 K kg mol-1
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 Solutions 17
∴ Freezing point of solution = Tf
= 273 – 3.801 = 269.2 K
Freezing point of solution = 269.2 K.

Question 11.
A solution of citric acid C6H8O7 in 50 g of acetic acid has a boiling point elevation of 1.76 K. If Kb for acetic acid is 3.07 K kg mol-1, what is the molality of solution?
Answer:
Given : W1 = 50 g acetic acid
ΔTb = 1.76 K
Kb = 3.07 K kg mol-1
m = ?
ΔTb = Kb × m
∴ m = \(\frac{\Delta T_{\mathrm{b}}}{K_{\mathrm{b}}}\)
= \(\frac{1.76}{3.07}\)
= 0.5733 m
Molality of solution = 0.5733 m

Question 12.
An aqueous solution of a certain organic compound has a density of 1.063 gmL-1, an osmotic pressure of 12.16 atm at 25°C and a freezing point of -1.03°C. What is the molar mass of the compound? (334 g/mol)

Question 13.
A mixture of benzene and toluene contains 30% by mass of toluene. At 30°C, vapour pressure of pure toluene is 36.7 mm Hg and that of pure benzene is 118.2 mm Hg. Assuming that the two liquids form ideal solutions, calculate the total pressure and partial pressure of each constituent above the solution at 30°C.
Answer:
Given : 30% by mass of toluene (T) and 70% by mass of benzene (B).
WT = 30 g; WB = 70g
\(P_{\mathrm{T}}^{0}\) = 36.7 mm Hg; \(P_{\mathrm{B}}^{0}\) = 118.2 mm Hg
MT = 92 g mol-1; MB = 78 g mol-1
PT = ?, PB = ?, Psoln = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 Solutions 18
Total number of moles = nTotal = nT + nB
= 0.326 + 0.8974
= 1.2234 mol

Mole fractions :
xT = \(\frac{n_{\mathrm{T}}}{n_{\text {Total }}}=\frac{0.326}{1.2234}\) = 0.2665
xB = 1 – 0.2665 = 0.7335
Psoln = xT + \(P_{\mathrm{T}}^{0}\) + xB × \(P_{\mathrm{B}}^{0}\)
= 0.2665 × 36.7 + 0.7335 × 118.2
= 9.780 + 86.7
= 96.48 mm Hg

Partial pressures :
PT = xT × Psoln
= 0.2665 × 96.48
= 25.71 mm Hg
PB = xB × Psoln
= 0.7335 × 96.48
= 70.77 mm Hg
Total pressure Psoln = 96.48 mm Hg
Partial pressures : PToluene = 25.71 mm Hg
PBenzene = 70.77 mm Hg

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 Solutions

Question 14.
At 25 °C a 0.1 molal solution of CH3COOH is 1.35% dissociated in an aqueous solution. Calculate freezing point and osmotic pressure of the solution assuming molality and molarity to be identical.
Answer:
Given : T = 273 + 25 = 298 K
C = 0.1 m ≅ 0.1 M; Kf = 1.86 K kg mol-1
Per cent dissociation = 1.35
Freezing point = tf = ?
π = ?
α = \(\frac{1.35}{100}\) = 0.0135
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 Solutions 19
i = 1 – α + α + α = 1 + α = 1 + 0.0135 = 1.0135
(i) ΔTf = i × Kf × m
= 1.0135 × 1.86 × 0.1
= 0.1885 °C
∴ Freezing point of solution = 0 – 0.1885
= – 0.1885 °C

(ii) n = iCRT
= 1.035 × 0.1 × 0.08206 × 298
= 2.53 atm

(i) Freezing point of solution = – 0.1885 °C
(ii) Osmotic pressure = π = 2.53 atm

Question 15.
A 0.15 m aqueous solution of KCl freezes at -0.510 °C. Calculate i and osmotic pressure at 0 °C. Assume volume of solution equal to that of water.
Answer:
Given : c = 0.15 m KCl ≅ 0.15 M KCl
ΔTf = 0 – Tf = 0 – (-0.510) = 0.510 °C
T = 273 K; Kf = 1.86 K kg mol-1
i = ?; π = ?
ΔTf = i × Kf × m
∴ i = \(\frac{\Delta T_{\mathrm{f}}}{K_{\mathrm{f}} \times m}\)
= \(\frac{0.510}{1.86 \times 0.15}\)
= 1.828
π = iCRT
= 1.828 × 0.15 × 0.08206 × 273
= 6.143 atm
i = 1.828, Osmotic pressure = π = 6.143 atm

12th Chemistry Digest Chapter 2 Solutions Intext Questions and Answers

Can you tell ? (Textbook Page No. 29)

Question 1.
Why naphthalene dissolves in benzene but not in water ?
Answer:
Since naphthalene is a covalent nonpolar substance, it is soluble in a nonpolar solvent like benzene but insoluble in polar solvent like water.

Question 2.
Anhydrous sodium sulphate dissolves in water with the evolution of heat. What is the effect of temperature on its solubility ?
Answer:
Since the dissolution of anhydrous sodium sulphate in water is an exothermic process due to evolution of heat, according to Le Chatelier’s principle its solubility decreases with the increase in temperature.

(Textbook Page No. 42)

Question 1.
If 1.25 m sucrose solution has ΔTf of 2.32 °C, what will be the expected value of ΔTf for 1.25 m CaCl2 solution?
Answer:
Sucrose being nonelectrolyte, it has i = 1 but for CaCl2,
(CaCl2 → Ca2+ + 2Cl) the value of i = 3.
Hence
ΔTf = i × 2.32
= 3 × 2.32
= 6.92 °C
∴ ΔTf = 6.92 °C.

(Textbook Page No. 44)

Question 1.
Which of the following solutions will have maximum boiling point elevation and which have minimum freezing point depression assuming the complete dissociation? (a) 0.1m KCl (b) 0.05 m NaCl (c) 1 m AlPO4 (d) 0.1 m MgSO4.
Solution :
Boiling point elevation and freezing point depression are colligative properties that depend on number of particles in solution. The solution having more number of particles will have large boiling point elevation and that having less number of particles would show minimum freezing point depression.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 Solutions 20
AlPO4 solution contains highest moles and hence highest number particles and in turn, the maximum ΔTb. NaCl solution has minimum moles and particles, it has minimum ΔTf.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 Solutions

Question 2.
Arrange the following solutions in order of increasing osmotic pressure. Assume complete ionization. (a) 0.5 m Li2SO4 (b) 0.5 m KCl (c) 0.5 m Al2(SO4)3 (d) 0.1 m BaCl2.
Answer:
Consider 1 dm3 of each solution.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 Solutions 21
Osmotic pressure being a colligative property, it depends on number of particles in the solution.
Therefore, increasing order of osmotic pressure is,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 Solutions 22

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Secretarial Practice Solutions Chapter 12 Stock Exchange

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board Class 12 Secretarial Practice Solutions Chapter 12 Stock Exchange Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board Class 12 Secretarial Practice Solutions Chapter 12 Stock Exchange

1A. Select the correct answer from the options given below and rewrite the statements.

Question 1.
A stock exchange is where stock brokers and traders can buy and sell ______________
(a) Gold
(b) Securities
(c) Goods
Answer:
(b) Securities

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Secretarial Practice Solutions Chapter 12 Stock Exchange

Question 2.
The ______________ is the first Stock Exchange to be recognized by the Indian Government under the Securities Contracts (Regulation) Act.
(a) BSE
(b) NSE
(c) OTCEI
Answer:
(a) BSE

Question 3.
______________ is a dealer in Stock Exchange who carries on trading of securities in his own name.
(a) Jobber
(b) Broker
(c) Bull
Answer:
(a) Jobber

Question 4.
A ______________ who expects fall in price of securities.
(a) bull
(b) bear
(c) Jobber
Answer:
(b) bear

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Secretarial Practice Solutions Chapter 12 Stock Exchange

Question 5.
The practice of buying and selling within the same trading day before the close of the market on that day is called ______________
(а) insider trading
(b) day trading
(c) auction
Answer:
(b) day trading

1B. Match the pairs.

Question 1.

Group ‘A’ Group ‘B’
(a) SEBI (1) Expects the price of shares to rise in the future.
(b) Day Trading (2) Expects the price of shares to fall in the future.
(c) Bull (3) Buying and selling of securities during the same trading day.
(d) Bear (4) To protect the interest of investors in the securities market.
(e) BSE (5) Buying and selling of securities to particular investors.
(6) One of the oldest stock exchanges in India.
(7) To protect the interest of companies in the securities market.
(8) Buying and selling of securities within a week.
(9) Newest Stock Exchange in India.
(10) One who invests in new issues of securities.

Answer:

Group ‘A’ Group ‘B’
(a) SEBI (4) To protect the interest of investors in the securities market.
(b) Day Trading (3) Buying and selling of securities during the same trading day.
(c) Bull (1) Expects the price of shares to rise in the future.
(d) Bear (2) Expects the price of shares to fall in the future.
(e) BSE (6) One of the oldest stock exchanges in India.

1C. Write a word or a term or a phrase that can substitute each of the following statements.

Question 1.
A specific place where the trading of securities is arranged in an organized method.
Answer:
Stock Exchange

Question 2.
The first Stock Exchange to be recognized by the Indian Government under the Securities Contracts Regulation Act.
Answer:
BSE

Question 3.
A dealer in the Stock Exchange who carries on the trading of securities in his own name.
Answer:
Jobber

Question 4.
A speculator who expects the price of shares rises in the future.
Answer:
Bull

1D. State whether the following statements are True or False.

Question 1.
A Stock Exchange is a reliable barometer to measure the economic condition of a country.
Answer:
True

Question 2.
Bombay Stock Exchange is the oldest Stock Exchange in India.
Answer:
True

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Secretarial Practice Solutions Chapter 12 Stock Exchange

Question 3.
A broker is a dealer in the Stock Exchange who carries on the trading securities in his own name.
Answer:
False

Question 4.
A Bear is a speculator who expects the prices of shares to rise in the future.
Answer:
False

1E. Complete the sentences.

Question 1.
The oldest Stock Exchange in India is the ______________
Answer:
BSE

Question 2.
A speculator who expects fall in prices of share ______________
Answer:
Bear

Question 3.
A person who buys or sells shares on behalf of his clients is called as ______________
Answer:
broker

Question 4.
The largest and most modern stock exchange in India is the ______________
Answer:
National Stock Exchange

1F. Select the correct option from the bracket.

Question 1.

Group ‘A’ Group ‘B’
(a) Regulator of Capital Market (1) …………………..
(b) …………………… (2) Nifty
(c) Jobber (3) …………………..
(d) ………………….. (4) Oldest Stock Exchange in the world

(London Stock Exchange, Index of NSE, SEBI, Trades in securities in his own name)
Answer:

Group ‘A’ Group ‘B’
(a) Regulator of Capital Market (1) SEBI
(b) Index of NSE (2) Nifty
(c) Jobber (3) Trades securities in his own name
(d) London Stock Exchange (4) Oldest Stock Exchange in the world

1G. Answer in one sentence.

Question 1.
What is Stock Exchange?
Answer:
A Stock Exchange is a place or a platform where investors-individuals, institutions, or organizations meet to purchase or sell securities.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Secretarial Practice Solutions Chapter 12 Stock Exchange

Question 2.
Who is a Broker?
Answer:
He is a licensed member of a stock exchange who transacts business on the behalf of his clients, being an agent between investors and jobbers.

Question 3.
Who is Jobber?
Answer:
A Jobber is a professional speculator in the stock exchange who carries on the trading securities in his name.

Question 4.
Who is a Bull?
Answer:
Bull (Tejiwala) is an optimistic speculator who expects the price of a share to rise in the future and buys with the hope of selling at a high price to earn profit.

Question 5.
Who is Bear?
Answer:
A bear is a speculator who expects the prices of shares to fall in the future and sells his securities at the prevailing prices to avoid loss.

Question 6.
Who is Lame Duck?
Answer:
A lame-duck is a bear broker whose expectations have gone wrong and makes a loss in his dealings.

Question 7.
What is a trading ring?
Answer:
The trading of shares that takes place during trading hours on the floor of the stock exchange is called the Trade Ring.

Question 8.
What is Sensex?
Answer:
Sensex is the index of the BSE which represents the increase or decrease in prices of stocks of a selected group of companies.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Secretarial Practice Solutions Chapter 12 Stock Exchange

Question 9.
What is Rally?
Answer:
If the Sensex or Nifty moves in an upward direction over a period of 14 to 20 trading sessions, it is called as a rally.

Question 10.
What is Crash?
Answer:
If the Sensex or Nifty moves in a downward direction, it is called a crash.

1H. Correct the underlined word/s and rewrite the following sentences.

Question 1.
One of the functions of SEBI is to protect the interest of issuers of securities in the securities market.
Answer:
One of the functions of SEBI is to protect the interest of investors in securities in the securities market.

Question 2.
A Broker cannot directly deal with investors.
Answer:
A Jobber cannot directly deal with investors.

Question 3.
A Bear expects prices of shares to rise in the future.
Answer:
A Bull expects prices of shares to rise in the future.

Question 4.
A Bull buys new issues of securities from the primary market.
Answer:
A stag buys new issues of securities from the primary market.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Secretarial Practice Solutions Chapter 12 Stock Exchange

Question 5.
A stock market is an important constituent of the money market.
Answer:
A stock market is an important constituent of the capital market.

2. Explain the following terms/concepts.

Question 1.
Stock Exchange
Answer:
Stock Exchange is a specific place where various types of securities are purchased and sold. The term securities include equity shares, preference shares, debentures, government securities, and bonds, etc. including units of mutual funds. They act as intermediaries between investors and borrowers, to provide safety and stability to the investors, stock exchanges in India are regulated by SEBI.

Question 2.
Broker
Answer:
He is a member of the stock exchange and is licensed by the stock exchange to buy or sell shares on his client’s behalf. He is an agent between the investors and Jobber and earns his income in the form of commission or brokerage.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Secretarial Practice Solutions Chapter 12 Stock Exchange

Question 3.
Jobber
Answer:
A Jobber is a professional speculator in the stock exchange who carries on the trading securities in his own name. He buys securities as an owner and sells them at a higher price, and cannot deal with investors directly.

Question 4.
Bull
Answer:
A Bull is a speculator who is optimistic, expects the price of a share to rise in the future, and buys with the hope of selling them at higher prices to earn profit. A bull’s action leads to higher prices for securities as there is an excess purchase over sales.

Question 5.
Bear
Answer:
Bear (Mandiwala) is a pessimistic speculator who expects a fall in the price of a security, so he sells his securities at prevailing prices to avoid loss as he anticipates further fall in prices. His action leads to lowering prices as there is an excess of sales over the purchase.

Question 6.
Contract Note
Answer:
It is a note given by a broker to his client in a specific form, validating the transaction. Its copy comes immediately to both after the transaction within 24 hours.

3. Study the following case/situation and express your opinion.

1. Mr. Y is a practicing Company Secretary offering advisory services to companies, institutions, etc. on corporate laws including the Companies Act. He has received few queries from his clients, please assist Mr. Y in answering them.

Question (a).
BDI bank wants to offer DP services. Whom should they approach for registering as DP?
Answer:
If BDI bank wants to offer DP services, they should approach the concerned Depository for registering themselves.

Question (b).
KM Financial wants to offer Debenture Trustee services. Where should they apply for getting registered?
Answer:
If KM Financial wants to offer Debenture Trustee services then they should be registered with SEBI to act as Debenture Trustee.

Question (c).
TT Ltd. Co. wants to issue an IPO. Should it get itself registered with SEBI?
Answer:
The entire IPO process is regulated by SEBI, TT Ltd. Co should register with The U. S. Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) which ensures that the company has made disclosures in detail thus TT Ltd will get the green signal to issue IPO.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Secretarial Practice Solutions Chapter 12 Stock Exchange

2. Mr. P has recently got his B.Sc. degree. He has enrolled in a course in the securities market. As a new student of this subject, he has few queries as follows:

Question (a).
Does a company need to be listed on a stock exchange’s ability to sell its securities through the stock exchange?
Answer:
Yes, a company needs to be listed on Stock Exchanges to sell its securities through the Stock Exchange.

Question (b).
What is the term used for referring to a stock exchange’s ability to reflect the economic conditions of a country?
Answer:
A Stock Exchange is the “Economic Barometer” and acts as an economic mirror that reflects the economic conditions of a country, eg. Boom, recession period.

Question (c).
Which term refers to the functions of the stock exchange as a provider of a ready market for sale and purchase of security?
Answer:
The “Liquidity” function is the main function of the Stock Exchange as it provides a ready market for the sale and purchase of securities.

4. Distinguish between the following.

Question 1.
Jobber and Broker
Answer:

Points Jobber Broker
1. Meaning A Jobber is one who buys and sells securities in his own name. A broker is an agent who deals in buying and selling securities on behalf of his client.
2. Nature of Trading A jobber carries out trading activities only with the broker. A broker carries out trading activities with the jobber on behalf of his investors.
3. Restrictions on Dealings A jobber is prohibited to directly buy or sell securities in the stock exchange. Also, he cannot directly deal with the investors. A broker acts as a link between the jobber and the investors. He trades i.e. buys and sells securities on behalf of his investors.
4. Agent A jobber is a special mercantile agent. A broker is a general mercantile agent.
5. Form of Consideration A jobber gets consideration in the form of profit. The positive difference between sale and purchase of securities. A broker gets consideration in the form of commission or brokerage. The rate/amount of brokerage is fixed by stock exchanges.
6. Amount of Consideration The amount of Consideration payable to Jobber is determined by the competition of jobbers. The rate or amount of brokerage of a broker is fixed as per stock exchange provisions.

5. Answer in brief.

Question 1.
State the functions of SEBI.
Answer:
The various functions of SEBI are

  • To protect the interest of investors in the securities stock market.
  • To promote the development of securities markets.
  • To regulate the business in stock exchanges and any other securities market.
  • To register and regulate the working of stockbrokers, sub-brokers, share transfer agents, bankers to an issue, trustee of trust deeds, registrars to an issue, merchants bankers, underwriters, and such other intermediaries who may be associated with the securities market.
  • To register and regulate the working of the Depositories, Depository Participants, Custodians of securities, foreign institutional investors, credit rating agencies.
  • To register and regulate the working of venture capital funds and collective investment schemes including mutual funds.
    • To promote and regulate self-regulatory organizations.
    • To prohibit fraudulent and unfair trade practices relating to securities markets.
  • To promote investors’ education and training of intermediaries of the securities market.
  • To prohibit insider trading in securities.
  • To conduct research and carry out publications.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Secretarial Practice Solutions Chapter 12 Stock Exchange

Question 2.
State any four features of the Stock Exchange.
OR
What are the features of the Stock Exchange?
Answer:
According to the Securities Contracts (Regulation) Act 1956, the term stock exchange is defined as, “An association, organization or body of individuals, whether incorporated or not, established for the purpose of assisting, regulating and controlling of business in buying, selling and dealing in securities.”

Husband and Dockerary have defined stock exchange as “Stock exchanges are the privately organized market which is used to facilitate trading in securities.”

The important features of a stock exchange are as follows:
(i) Market for Securities:
The stock exchange is a place where all types of corporate securities, as well as securities of government and semi-government bodies, are traded.

(ii) Second Hand Securities:
Securities traded in the Stock exchange are those securities that are already issued by the companies. In other words, second-hand securities are bought and sold among investors in a stock exchange.

(iii) Listed Securities:
Only securities that are listed with the stock exchange can be traded on a stock exchange. Listing of securities helps in protecting the interest of investors as companies have to strictly comply with the rules laid down by the stock exchange.

(iv) Organised and Regulated Market:
All Listed Companies have to comply with the guidelines of SEBI. Companies will also have to function as per the rules and regulations laid down by the Stock exchange.

(v) Specific Location:
The stock exchange is a specific physical place where securities are traded. It is a marketplace where brokers and intermediaries meet to conduct dealings in securities. Today, all trading is done electronically on a stock exchange.

(vi) Trading only through Members:
Securities in a Stock exchange can be traded only by the members of the exchange on their own behalf or through authorized brokers.

6. Justify the following statements.

Question 1.
The Securities and Exchange Board of India SEBI is the regulator for the securities market in India.
Answer:

  • The Securities and Exchange Board of India was set up on 12th April 1988. The main purpose of setting up SEBI was to develop and regulate stock exchanges in India.
  • The objectives of SEBI are to protect the interest of the investors and regulate the securities market in India.
  • To bring professionalism in the working of intermediaries in the capital markets, i.e., brokers, mutual funds, stock exchanges, Demat- depositories, etc. is also a feature of SEBI.
  • The role of SEBI also includes creating a good financial climate, so that companies can raise long-term funds through the issue of securities – shares and debentures.
  • The main function of SEBI is to register and regulate the working of stockbrokers, sub-brokers, share transfer agents, bankers to an issue, trustee of trust deeds, registrars to an issue, merchant bankers, underwriters, and such other intermediaries who may be associated with securities market.
  • Thus, it is rightly said that SEBI is the regulator of the securities market in India.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Secretarial Practice Solutions Chapter 12 Stock Exchange

Question 2.
Stock exchanges work for the growth of the Indian economy.
Answer:

  • The stock exchange is a specific place where the trading of securities is arranged in an organized method.
  • The stock exchanges help in the process of rapid economic development by speeding up the process of capital formation as well as resource mobilization in India.
  • It helps in raising medium-term capital as well as long-term capital for the development and expansion of the companies in the Indian economy.
  • New industries and commercial enterprises can easily acquire capital funds for economic growth.
  • It reflects a healthy financial and investment conducive atmosphere in the economy. It stimulates investment in the productive sector which accelerates the process of economic development of the nation.
  • Thus, it is rightly said that the stock exchanges work for the growth of the Indian economy.

7. Answer the following questions.

Question 1.
Explain the functions of the Stock Exchange.
Answer:
Definition Of Stock Exchange: According to the Securities Contracts (Regulation) Act of 1956, the term ‘stock exchange’ is defined as “An association, organization or body of individuals, whether incorporated or not established for the purpose of assisting, regulating and controlling of business in buying, selling and dealing in securities.”

Husband and Dockerary have defined stock exchange as: “Stock exchanges are privately organized markets which are used to facilitate trading in securities.”

Stock Exchange performs various important functions discussed as follows:
(i) Mobilisation of Savings:
Stock markets are organized and regulated markets that protect the interests of the investors. It obtains surplus funds (savings) from individual households private and public sector units etc. and channelizes them in the proper direction. It thus provides a ready market for buying and selling securities.

(ii) Capital Formation:
Investors in securities are attracted due to good returns on investments and capital appreciation. The stock exchanges encourage investors to invest in the primary and secondary stock markets for investing in stock markets, investors need to save money. Savings lead to investment in shares and other securities. Such investments lead to capital formation.

(iii) Pricing of Securities:
The price of the securities are sold in the stock markets is based on demand and supply forces listed securities get prestige and reputation. When the prices of the shares go up constantly, their security value increases. The valuation of securities is useful to investors, the government, and creditors. The investors thus can gauge their investment worth and the creditors too can estimate the creditworthiness of a company.

(iv) Economic Barometer:
A stock exchange is a reliable barometer to measure the economic condition of a country. They encourage investors to invest and help companies to generate long-term funds thus promoting industrial development. The rise or fall in the share prices indicates the boom or recession cycle of the economy. The stock exchange is the pulse of the economy and the mirror that reflects the country’s economic status.

(v) Protecting Interest of Investors:
In the stock markets, only the listed securities are traded. The stock exchanges protect the interests of the investors through the strict enforcement of their rules and regulations. The securities Control (Regulation) Act 1956, provides rules for the functioning, licensing, and controlling speculations of stock exchanges. The SEBI also plays an important role in monitoring stock exchanges thus protect the interests of the investors by regulating intermediaries, monitoring speculation, and making the investors aware of their rights through IEPF, etc.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Secretarial Practice Solutions Chapter 12 Stock Exchange

(vi) Liquidity:
The stock exchange facilitates liquidity by providing a ready market for the sale and purchase of securities. It provides marketability along with liquidity to investments in corporate enterprises. Because of stock exchange investors can convert a long-term investment into short-term and medium-term as it provides a two-way outlet by transforming money into an investment and vice versa without much delay.

(vii) Better Allocation of Capital:
The stock exchange regulates and controls the flow of investment from unproductive to productive, uneconomic to economic, unprofitable to profitable enterprises. Thus, savings of the people are channelized into industry yielding good returns, and under utilization of capital is avoided.

(viii) Contributes to Economic Growth:
The stock exchange help in the process of rapid economic development by speeding up the process of capital formation as well as resource mobilization. It helps in raising medium as well as long-term capital for the development and expansion of the companies. The resource of the economy flows from one company to another. This leads to capital formation as well as economic growth.

(ix) Providing Scope for Speculation:
Stock Exchanges’ like any other market provides a mechanism for evaluating the prices of securities through the basic law of demand and supply. Stock Exchange prices help to check the real worth of the securities in the market and thus permit healthy speculation of securities.

(x) Promotes the Habit of Savings and Investment: The stock market offers attractive opportunities for investment in various securities by obtaining funds from surplus units such as households, individuals, public sector units, central government, etc, and channelizing these funds for productive purposes.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 English Yuvakbharati Solutions Chapter 2.8 Small Towns and Rivers

Balbharti Yuvakbharati English 12th Digest Chapter 2.8 Small Towns and Rivers Notes, Textbook Exercise Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board Class 12 English Yuvakbharati Solutions Chapter 2.8 Small Towns and Rivers

12th English Digest Chapter 2.8 Small Towns and Rivers Textbook Questions and Answers

Question (i)
Most of the civilizations have flourished on the banks of the rivers. Discuss the reasons in the class.
Points:
(a) Availability of water
(b) Fertile soil for agriculture
(c) Fishing ground
(d) Transport

Maharashtra Board Class 12 English Yuvakbharati Solutions Chapter 2.8 Small Towns and Rivers

Question (ii)
Write down the names of the famous cities that are situated on the banks of the rivers given below.
Answer:

River City
Ganga Varanasi
Yamuna Mathura
Godavari Rajahmundry
Varada Sagara
Krishna Vijayawada
Tapi Surat

Question (iii)
Write down the names of the rivers on the banks of which following cities have prospered:
Answer:

City River
London Thames
Cairo Nile
New York Hudson
Paris Siene

Question (iv)
Divide your class into groups and discuss the changes that might have taken place when the cities grow on the banks of the rivers.
Points: Dwellings are built – Population grows – Fishing flourishes – Outsiders come to settle – Trading takes place – Prosperity increases – Increased population, trade, traffic and fishing begin to harm the river system – River system shows damage – River starts to decay

Maharashtra Board Class 12 English Yuvakbharati Solutions Chapter 2.8 Small Towns and Rivers

Question (v)
Share your views in the class on the topic ‘Conservation of Rivers and Development of the Cities.’
(Students may list their own points of views.)

(A1)

Question 1.
State the importance of Nature in the lives of the people from the North-eastern part of India as expressed in the poem with reference to:
(a) Flowers
(b) River
(c) Bamboo
(d) East
Answer:
(a) Flowers – Tuberoses are woven into wreaths to be placed on the body of a departed as a mark of love and respect.
Sole: Most of the textual ‘Wh’ questions are converted to Activity Format.
(b) River: The people believe the river has a soul. They respect their rivers and even revere it as divine as its waters are immortal.
(c) Bamboo: The poet says ‘in the cool bamboo’. The colour is a cool green. The place where the bamboo grows is also cool.
(d) East: The direction of sunrise is very important for the people of Arunachal Pradesh. They ensure the dead are placed pointing west so that their soul directly enters the golden house of the sun. They believe that finally souls must attain the sun’s abode in the east.

(A2)

Question (i)
The poet has described her small town in Arunachal Pradesh. Pick out from the extract, the lines that describe the poet’s town.
Answer:
1. ‘My hometown lies calmly amidst the trees’,
2. ‘it is always the same In summer and winter With the dust flying Or the wind howling down the gorge’

Maharashtra Board Class 12 English Yuvakbharati Solutions Chapter 2.8 Small Towns and Rivers

Question (ii)
Make a list of natural elements mentioned in the extract.
Answer:
trees, winter, summer, wind, tuberoses, life, land, river, fish, stars

Question (iii)
‘The river has a soul.’ Elaborate the concept in your words as the poet has explained in the extract.
Answer:
When the poet says ‘The river has a soul’ she personifies the river. The river flows with great force – ‘like a torrent of grief. The river flowing with great force can be like a person pouring out grief in a storm of emotion. The river also seems to be holding its breath, maybe because it is choking with filth. There are no fishes. It is not clear and sparkling. So the poet says -‘I think it holds its breath seeking a land of fish and stars’.

Question (iv)
The poet is convinced with the thought of immortality of water. Pick out the relevant lines from the extract.
Answer:
‘The river has a soul’.

(v) The poet has used some unconventional expressions. Illustrate them in your words.

Question (a)
‘Torrent of grief.
Answer:
The poet describes the river flowing in summer with great speed. Just like someone becomes emotional in great sadness, the force of the water seems to be like the outpouring of sorrow of the river.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 English Yuvakbharati Solutions Chapter 2.8 Small Towns and Rivers

Question (vi)
The poet has connected the need to preserve Nature with the belief of particular community and her childhood memories. Write down the measures you would take to convince the people regarding the need to conserve the Nature.
Answer:
We have to make people at large realize that we are a part of the nature not apart from the nature. Saving nature is to save ourselves, To bring about this realization I can address my steps to two sections. The first would be the children. Saving water would be the first thing to teach children. Story-telling, poems, songs, games, cartoons and can easily bring the conservation ideas to young minds. I would take my ideas to schools, parks, malls and try to spread this to the young ones.

The other section is of course the adult public across economic and social levels. The well- off people must not be careless if they can afford to pay bills they can waste resources.

I will do everything possible. I will use social media to spread various messages/ mottos.

(A3)

Question (i)
Write down the expressions related to ‘the seasons’ from the extract.
Answer:
1. Summer or winter
2. ‘in the summer’

Question (ii)
Match column ‘A’ with column ‘B’.

A B
1. cool
2. happy
3. dreadful
4. dry
(a) silence
(b) earth
(c) bamboo
(d) pictures

Answer:

  1. cool-bamboo
  2. happy – pictures
  3. dreadful – silence
  4. dry-earth

Maharashtra Board Class 12 English Yuvakbharati Solutions Chapter 2.8 Small Towns and Rivers

(A4)

Question (i)
Read the expression ‘a sad wreath of tuberoses’.
‘Is the wreath sad?’ Explain the figure of speech.
Answer:
The figure of speech is transferred epithet. The sad mourners have placed the wreath of tuberoses on the dead. The emotion of sadness has been transferred to the flowers for effect.

Question (ii)
List and explain the metaphorical expressions from the extract.
Answer:
1. ‘torrent of grief’. The river sweeps along with great speed as if it is pouring out sorrow.
2. ‘Wind howling down the gorge’. The wind blowing through the narrow gorges creates a sound exactly like howling.
3. ‘The river has a soul’. The river is spoken of as a living being, a human.
4. ‘It holds its breath’. The river may be choking with debris and filth.

Question (iii)
‘The river has a soul.’
‘Life and death.’
These are the two expressions that are repeated in the poem; but both of them indicate different figures of speech. Find out and discuss.
Answer:
(a) ‘Life and death’
In the first usage it is used as antithesis, to emphasise the beginning and end.
In the second instance it is irony to indicate that neither life nor death is permanent. Ironically the rituals are permanent.
(b) ‘The river has a soul’
In the first instance it is used to personify the river. Several human-like qualities are attributed to the river,
= it cuts through the land
= it is cascading in grief
= it holds its breath
= it seeks a land

Maharashtra Board Class 12 English Yuvakbharati Solutions Chapter 2.8 Small Towns and Rivers

Question (iv)
Find out the beauty of the free verse reflected in this poem.
Answer:
“Small Towns and Rivers’ is written in free- verse. Since there are irregular lengths of lines and no rhyme, the reading of the poem is almost like a story-telling. Each stanza has a different number of lines and there is no order for mixing up the short and long lines.

The poem is not confined by an obvious rhythm so we feel there is a kind of freedom.We are free to imagine the widespread setting of the North-eastern terrain of mountains and rivers, mists, golden sunlight and the town by the river.

(A5)

Question (i)
Prepare the arguments for group discussion on the topic
‘A balanced progress never harms the Nature’.
For:

  • Growth should be planned to take place in stages
  • Planning vital for the growth
  • Sustainability must be ensured
  • Pros and cons of the damage to environment must be weighed
  • Short-term gains in progress must not harm long-term eco-factors

Against:

  • Growth must not be halted for issues of environment
  • Costs will go up due to delays
  • Delays in progress will slow down economy and employment
  • Slowdown in economy will cause public to protest
  • Sacrifices have to be made – one can’t have the cake and eat it too.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 English Yuvakbharati Solutions Chapter 2.8 Small Towns and Rivers

Question (ii)
Compose 4 to 6 lines on ‘Gift of the Seasons’.
Answer:
Gift of the Seasons
Each season brings a sweetly wrapt gift;
We can gift her back : no water pollution in
the season of the Sun.
No air pollution when
The rains come down.
And no degradation the rest of the year!

Question (iii)
Write an appreciation of the poem ‘Small Towns and Rivers’. Use the points given below:

  • About the poem/poet/title
  • Theme
  • Poetic devices, language, style
  • Special features – tone and type
  • Values, message
  • Your opinion about the poem

Answer:
The poem ‘Small Towns and Rivers’ written by Mamang Dai is a beautiful word-picture. It is also a lament of the poet about her beautiful native land of Arunachal Pradesh.

This theme shows in the way she begins the poem that small towns remind her of death. It is shocking. She implies the town is unchanging in all weathers, but development comes along and changes everything. There is irony in that the cycle of life and death shows that life is not permanent, but the rituals are permanent.

She uses metaphor that the rivers are not only alive like us humans, but actually immortal. She personifies the river by way the river ‘holds its breath’ because it is choking. It is flowing in search of a place where it will flow clean and clear. The poet uses metaphor of the water-cycle to illustrate the river has a soul and its waters are immortal.

The poet builds a climax with ‘shrine of happy’ childhood memories. This becomes growing up -‘grow with anxiety’. Then she speaks of how the dead are placed pointing west so the soul can ascend directly into the sun’s golden home in the east. This tells us about the traditions of her region.

The poem is in free verse and seems to be in easy language, but we can understand the full depth of meaning only after reading it more than once. The poem is a lament about the destruction of nature for development. We all will feel the sorrow of the poet when we read about how nature’s beauty is damaged for man’s greed called ‘progress’.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 English Yuvakbharati Solutions Chapter 2.8 Small Towns and Rivers

Question (iv)
Write a dialogue between two friends on ‘Importance of the rivers’
Answer:
Priya: Jai, it goes without saying that fresh, clean water is essential for humans and nature to survive. Rivers are precious sources of fresh drinking water for people across the world. And when rivers are so badly polluted by industry or by poor water management practices, it can be a case of life-or-death. This unfortunately happens across the world.

Jai: Yes Priya. Freshwater habitats account for some of the richest biodiversity in the world, and rivers are a vital, vibrant ecosystem for many species. Only those who live by the river know about this wealth of nature. Those who live far away and damaging the system with the poisons are not aware.

Priya: People depend on rivers for their way of life and their livelihoods. From fishing to agriculture, the way our waterways are managed has a direct impact on people’s lives. There are millions of people who follow their ancestors’ way of living and earning a livelihood. But modern technology has wrecked the very source of these.

Jai: Rivers are absolutely vital: for fresh drinking water, for people’s livelihoods and for nature. Unfortunately, they’re still threatened. We must commit to recovering freshwater biodiversity, restoring natural river flows and cleaning up polluted water for people and nature to thrive.
Priya: Yes Jai. I agree. It is the crying need of the day.

(A6)

Question (i)
Collect information about rivers in Maharashtra.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 English Yuvakbharati Solutions Chapter 2.8 Small Towns and Rivers

Question (ii)
Further reading:
‘The River Poems’ – Mamang Dai
‘The World Is Too Much With Us’ – William Wordsworth

Yuvakbharati English 12th Digest Chapter 2.8 Small Towns and Rivers Additional Important Questions and Answers

Read the extract and complete the activities given below:

Global Understanding:

Question 1.
Describe the river in the 3rd stanza.
Answer:
The river flows with great force -‘like a torrent’-. The river has life and soul. It breathes. But it seems as if the river is holding its breath. It seems to be in search of fishes which will live in it and stars which will be reflected in its waters.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 English Yuvakbharati Solutions Chapter 2.8 Small Towns and Rivers

Question 2.
What is meant by immortality?
Answer:
Immortality means the ability to live forever, without death.

Question 3.
Give reasons-The dead are placed pointing to the west.
Answer:
The people of Arunachal Pradesh believe that it will be possible for the soul of the departed person enter ‘the house of the sun’. They hope the soul will be able to ‘walk into the golden east’. So they place the dead (with feet) pointing to the west.

Question 4.
The poet has described her small town in Arunachal Pradesh. Pick out from the extract the lines that describe the poet’s town.
Answer:

  1. The town has ‘A shrine of happy pictures’ to mark the days of childhood.
  2. Small towns grow with anxiety for the future.
  3. Like her town, ‘small towns’ are ‘by the river’.
  4. Make a list of natural elements mentioned in the extract.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 English Yuvakbharati Solutions Chapter 2.8 Small Towns and Rivers

Question 5.
Make a list of natural elements mentioned in the extract.
Answer:
River, Earth, Mountaintops, Sun, Sunlight, Bamboo

Question 6.
The poet is convinced with the thought of immortality of water. Pick out the relevant lines from the extract.
Answer:
1. The river has a soul.
2. from the first drop of rain to dry earth
3. mist on the mountaintops
4. the immortality of water.

Interpretation/Inference/Analysis:

Question 1.
The land of fish and stars.
Answer:
The poet says she thinks the river is holding its breath. One has to hold one’s breath when he/she is unable to breathe or does not want to breathe. The river may be choking with garbage and is not able to breathe. The river may be stinking and may not be able to breathe.

As the river is so filthy there are no fish. It is dirty; the water is not sparkling in the day and cannot reflect the stars at night. So the river is in search of a land where there it can flow clean, it will have fish and where its clear water will sparkle in the sun and glitter with stars at night.

Question 2.
The river has a soul.’ Elaborate the concept in your words as the poet has explained in the extract.
Answer:
The poet states the river has a soul. The soul is deathless. The water that flows in the river came from the drops of rain. The water evaporated, rose as mist to the mountaintops. Then it formed clouds and poured down as rain to the dry earth and flowed again. Thus the river goes on, immortal, deathless.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 English Yuvakbharati Solutions Chapter 2.8 Small Towns and Rivers

Question 3.
The poet has used some unconventional expressions. Illustrate them in your words. Illustrate them in your words. Shrine of happy pictures
Answer:
There is a shrine probably in the town which has pictures inside. The pictures may be those of the happy moments experienced by the people in the town. Those memories are so sacred that it is a shrine to them. They protect and guard it because they have only sad and grim things happening at present.

Personal Response:

Question 1.
Rivers are our lifeline. They are an extremely important part of the eco-system and even considered sacred. Many major rivers and smaller ones have been misused and almost destroyed. Write down how we can restore our rivers to their original state.
Answer:
The condition of rivers worldwide is horrific. Everything from industrial chemical-waste to garbage is being thrown into rivers. Melted snow or the rainwater from springs come down from hills and mountains as sweet water for our survival. Polluting this is a crime against humanity.

Strict laws should be made and enforced to stop industrial activity near rivers. Wastes from industry, city, town or village must not reach the river. Only channels of rainwater must be allowed to reach the river. Awareness should be created for maintaining cleanliness along the banks.

In the olden days lakes, water bodies were considered precious and were guarded, Houses had wells. But people have lost the respect for water sources. Rivers are treated as sewage channels. Fines and punishments must be imposed and security put in for safeguarding our beautiful rivers.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 English Yuvakbharati Solutions Chapter 2.8 Small Towns and Rivers

Poetic Creativity:

Question 1.
Compose 4 to 6 lines on ‘River’.
Answer:
The River is our Mother

Like a mother the river soothes us.
When dying of thirst she revives us.
When tired and dirty she cleans us.
When growing our grain she waters the green.
Why! Oh why can’t we keep her clean!

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 12th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 12th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds

Question 1.
What are double salts?
Answer:
Double salts are crystalline molecular or addition compounds containing more than one salt in simple molecular proportions soluble in water and in solution they ionise and exhibit all the properties of the constituent ions.

For example, K2SO4+ A12(SO4)324H2O
\(\mathrm{K}_{2} \mathrm{SO}_{4} \cdot \mathrm{Al}_{2}\left(\mathrm{SO}_{4}\right)_{3} \cdot 24 \mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{(\mathrm{aq})} \longrightarrow 2 \mathrm{~K}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+}+2 \mathrm{Al}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{3+}+4 \mathrm{SO}_{4(\mathrm{aq})}^{2-}+24 \mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{0}\)

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds Important Questions

Question 2.
Define coordination compound.
Answer:
Coordination compound : It consists of a central metal ion or atom surrounded by atoms, molecules or anions called ligands by coordinate bonds, e.g. cisplatin Pt(NH3)2Cl2, [Cu(NH3)4]SO4.

Question 3.
Define Lewis bases and Lewis acids with respect to a coordination compound.
Answer:

  • Lewis bases : In a coordination compound the ligands being electron pair donors they are Lewis bases.
  • Lewis acids : The central metal atom or ion being electron acceptor behaves as a Lewis acid.
  • For example, in the coordination compound, [Cu(NH3)4]2+, NH3 is a Lewis base and Cu2+ is a Lewis acid.

Question 4.
Define coordination sphere. Give example.
Answer:
Coordination sphere : A coordination entity consisting of a central metal atom or ion and the coordinating groups like neutral molecules or anions (ligands) written inside a square bracket is together called coordination sphere. This is a discrete structural unit. The ionisable groups (generally ions) called counter ions are written outside the bracket.

For example, in the coordination compound K4[Fe(CN)6], the coordination sphere is [Fe(CN)6]4- while K+ represents counter ion.

Question 5.
Define and explain charge number of a complexion.
Answer:
Charge number of a complexion : The net charge carried by a complexion or a coordination entity is called its charge number.

Explanation :
(i) Charge number is equal to the algebraic sum of the charges carried by central metal atom or ion and all the ligands attached to it.
(ii) E.g. consider anionic complex, [Fe(CN)6]4-.
Charge number of [Fe(CN)6]4- = Charge on Fe2+ ions + 6 x charge on CN = ( + 2) + 6( -1) = – 4 Hence charge number of [Fe(CN)6]4- is – 4.

Question 6.
Explain the oxidation state of a metal in a complex.
Answer:

  • The oxidation state of a metal atom or ion in the complex is the apparent charge carried by it in the complex.
  • It depends upon the atomic number and electronic configuration of the metal atom or ion.
  • The coordination number, the formula and geometry of a complex depend upon the oxidation state of the metal
    atom or ion.

Question 7.
What is the charge on a monodentate ligand X in the complex, [NiX4]2-?
Answer:
The charge number of the complex ion is – 2. Nickel being divalent, its oxidation state is + 2. If the charge on monodentate ligand X is y, then Charge number = charge on Ni2+ charge on 6X – 2 = + 2 + 4 xy
∴ y = – 1
Hence the charge on ligand X is – 1.

Question 8.
Calculate the oxidation state of a metal in the following complexes :
(a) [Fe(NH3)6](NO3)3
(b) Ni(CO)5.
Answer:
(a) [Fe(NH3)6](NO3)3 ⇌ [Fe(NH3)6]3+ + 3NO3

NH3 is a neutral ligand, and the charge number of complex ion is + 3.
If the oxidation state of Fe is x then,
+ 3 = x + 6(0)
∴ x = + 3
∴ The oxidation state of Fe is +3.

(b) Ni(CO)5 is a neutral complex and CO is a neutral ligand. If the oxidation state of Ni is x, then zero = x + 5 x (zero)
∴ x = zero.
The oxidation state of Ni is zero.

Question 9.
Define and explain the term coordination number (C.N.) of a metal in the complex.
Answer:
Coordination number or legancy (C.N.) : The number of (monodentate) ligands which are directly bonded by coordinate bonds to central metal atom or ion in a coordination compound is called coordination number (C.N.) of the metal atom or ion.

Explanation :

  • The coordination number (C.N.) is a characteristic property of the metal and its electronic configuration.
  • C.N. takes the values from 2 to 10, of which 4 and 6 are very common.
  • The light transition metals show C.N. 4 and 6 while the heavier transition metals show C.N. 8.
  • The geometry and shape of a complex compound depends upon C.N. of the metal.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds Important Questions

Question 10.
Mention primary valence, secondary valence and coordination number in the following complexes :
(a) [Cu(NH3)JCI2
(b) [Co(NH3)3CI3]
(C) K4[Fe(CN)6]
(d) [CoF6]3
(e) [Pt(NH3)2Cl2]
(f) [Pt(NH3)2(Py)3CI2]
(g) Cr(CO)6
(h) [Ni(CN)4]2-
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 2

Question 11.
Classify the following complexes as homoleptic and heteroleptic complex :
(a) [Cu(NH3)4]SO4;
(b) [Cu(en)2(H2O)CI]2+
(c) [Fe(H2O)5(NCS)]2+
(d) Tetraaminezinc(II) nitrate.

Question 12.
Summarise the rules of IUPAC nomenclature of coordination compounds.
Answer:
Following rules are followed for naming coordination compounds recommended by IUPAC :

  1. In case of a complexion or a neutral molecule, name the ligand first and then the metal.
  2. The names of anionic ligands are obtained by changing the ending -ide to -o and -ate to -ato.
  3. The name of a complex is one single word. There must not be any space between different ligand names as well as between ligand name and the name of the metal.
  4. After the name of the metal, write its oxidation state in Roman number which appears in parentheses without any space between metal name and parentheses.
  5. If complex has more than one ligand of the same type, the number is indicated with prefixes, di-, tri-, tetra-, penta-, hexa- and so on.
  6. For the complex having more than one type of ligands, they are written in an alphabetical order. Suppose two ligands with prefixes are tetraaqua and dichloro. While naming in alphabetical order, tetraaqua is written first and then dichloro.
  7. If the ligand itself contains numerical prefix in its name, then display number by prefixes bis for 2, tris for 3, tetrakis for 4 and so forth. Put the ligand name in parentheses. For example, (ethylenediamine)3 or (en)3 would appear as tris (ethylenediamine) or tris(ethane-l, 2-diamine).
  8. The metal in cationic or neutral complex is specified by its usual name while in the anionic complex the name of metal ends with ‘ate’.

Question 13.
State effective atomic number (EAN).
OR
State and explain effective atomic number (EAN). How is it calculated?
Answer:
Effective atomic number (EAN) : It is the total number of electrons present around the central metal atom or ion and calculated as the sum of electrons of metal atom or ion and the number of electrons donated by ligands.

It is calculated by the formula : EAN = Z – X + Y where.
Z = Atomic number of metal atom
X = Number of electrons lost by a metal atom forming a metal ion
Y = Total number of electrons donated by all ligands in the complex.

Generally the value of EAN is equal to the atomic number of the nearest inert element.

Explanation : Consider a complex ion [Co(NH3)6]3+
Oxidation state of cobalt is + 3 hence X = 3.
There are six ligands, hence Y = 2 x 6 = 12
Atomic number of cobalt. Z = 27
∴ EAN = Z – X + Y = 27 – 3 + 12 = 36.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds Important Questions

Question 14.
Find effective atomic number (EAN) in the following complexes :
(1) [Ni(CO)4]
(2) [Fe(CN)6]4-
(3) [Co(NH3)6]3+
(4) [Zn(NH3)J2+
(5) [Pt(NH3)6]4+
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 4

Question 15.
What is effective atomic number (EAN) in the following complexes ?
(1) [Fe(CN)6]3-
(2) [CU(NH3)4]2+
(3) [Pt(NH3)4]2+
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 5

Question 16.
Calculate EAN in the following complexes :
(1) [Cr(H2O)2(NH3)2(en)]CI3;
(2) [Ni(en)2]SO4;
(3) Na3[Cr(C2O4)3].
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 6

Question 17.
Define in coordination compounds :
(1) Isomerism
(2) Isomers.
Answer:

  1. Isomerism : It is the phenomenon in coordination compounds having same molecular formula but different physical and chemical properties due to different arrangements of the ligands around the central metal atom or ion in the space.
  2. Isomers : The isomers are the coordination compounds having same molecular formula but different physical and chemical properties due to the difference in arrangements of the ligands in the space.

Question 18.
Mention the types of isomerisms in coordination compounds.
Answer:
There are two principal types of isomerisms in coordination compounds as follows :
(A) Stereoisomerism
(B) Structural isomerism (OR Constitutional isomerism)

(A) Stereoisomerism is further classified as :

  • Geometrical isomerism
  • Optical isomerism

(B) Structural isomerism is further classified as :

  • Ionisation isomerism
  • Linkage isomerism
  • Coordination isomerism
  • Solvate (or hydrate) isomerism

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds Important Questions

Question 19.
Why does stereoisomerism arise in the coordination compounds?
Answer:
In the coordination compounds (complexes) the ligands are linked to the central metal atom or ion by coordinate bonds which are directional in nature and hence give rise to the phenomenon of stereoisomerism.

In this isomerism, the different stereoisomers have different arrangements of ligands (atoms, molecules or ions) in space around the central metal atom or ion. Hence they have different physical and chemical properties and give rise to the phenomenon of stereoisomerism.

Question 20.
Define, in coordination compounds : (1) Stereoisomerism (2) Stereoisomers.
Answer:
(1) Stereoisomerism The phenomenon of isomerism in the coordination compounds arising due to different spatial positions of the ligands in the space around the central metal atom or ion is called stereoisomerism.

(2) Stereoisomers : The coordination compounds having same molecular formula but different stereoisomerism due to different spatial arrangements of the ligand groups in the space around the central metal atom or ion are called stereoisomers.

Question 21.
Define :
(1) Geometrical isomerism and
(2) Geometrical isomers.
Answer:
(1) Geometrical isomerism : The phenomenon of isomerism in the heteroleptic coordination compounds with the same molecular formula but different spatial arrangement of the ligands in the space around the central metal atom or ion is called geometrical isomerism.

(2) Geometrical isomers : The heteroleptic coordination compounds having same molecular formula but different geometrical isomerism due to different spatial arrangements of the ligands in the space around the central metal atom or ion are called geometrical isomers.

Question 22.
Define cis and trails isomers in the coordination compounds.
Answer:
(1) Cis-isomer : A heteroleptic coordination compound in which two similar ligands are arranged adjacent to each other is called cis-isomer. For example,

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 11

Gis-Diamminedichloroplatinum(II)

(2) Trans-isomer : A heteroleptic coordination compound in which two similar ligands are arranged diagonally opposite to each other is called trans-isomer. For example,

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 12

Trans-Diamminedichloroplatinum(II)

Question 23.
Write structures for geometrical isomers of Diamminebromochloroplatinum(II).
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 7

Question 24.
Explain the geometrical isomerism of the octahedral complex of the type [MA4B2] with a suitable example.
Answer:

  • Consider an octahedral complex of a metal M with coordination number six and monodentate ligands a and b having formula [MA4B2],
  • CA-isomer is obtained when both the B ligands occupy adjacent (1,2) positions.
  • Trans-isomer is obtained when the ligands B occupy the opposite (1,6) positions.
  • For example, consider a complex [CO(NH3)4CI2]+. The structures of cis and trans isomers are
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 8

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds Important Questions

Question 25.
Explain the geometrical isomerism of the octahedral complex of the type [M(AA)2B2] with a suitable example.
Answer:

  • Consider an octahedral complex of metal M with coordination number six and a bidentate ligand AA and monodentate ligand B having molecular formula [M(AA)2B2] .
  • Bidentate ligand AA has two identical coordinating atoms.
  • Cis- isomer is obtained when two bidentate AA ligands as well as two ‘B’ ligands are at adjacent positions.
  • Trans-isomer is obtained when two AA ligands and two B ligands are at opposite positions.
  • For example, consider a complex [Co(en)2CI2]+.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 10

Question 26.
Explain the geometrical isomerism of the octahedral complex of the type [MA4BC] with suitable example.
Answer:

  • Consider an octahedral complex of metal M with coordination number six and monodentate ligands A, B andC.
  • Cis-isomer is obtained when both the ligands B and C occupy adjacent (1,2) positions.
  • Trans-isomer is obtained when the ligands B and C occupy opposite positions.
  • For example, consider a complex [Pt(NH3)4BrCI] of the type [MA4BC],
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 13

Question 27.
Define : (1) Optical isomerism (2) Optical isomers.
Answer:
(1) Optical isomerism : The phenomenon of isomerism in which different coordination compounds having same molecular formula have different optical activity is called optical isomerism.

(2) Optical isomers : Different coordination compounds having same molecular formula but different optical activity
are called optical isomers.

Question 28.
Explain : (1) Plane polarised light (2) Optical activity.
Answer:
(1) Plane polarised light : A monochromatic light having vibrations only in one plane is called a plane polarised light. This light is obtained by passing monochromatic light through NICOL prism.

(2) Optical activity : A phenomenon of rotating a plane of a plane polarised light by an optically active substance is
called optical activity. This substance is said to be optically active.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds Important Questions

Question 29.
Explain : (1) Dextrorotatory substance (2) Laevorotatory substance. (1 mark each)
Answer:

  1. Dextrorotatory substance : An optically active substance which rotates the plane of a plane polarised light to right hand side is called dextrorotatory or d isomer denoted by d.
  2. Laevorotatory substance : An optically, active substance which rotates the plane of a plane polarised light to the left hand side is called laevorotatory or l isomer and denoted by l.

Question 30.
What are the conditions for the optical isomerism in coordination compounds?
Answer:

  • Optical isomerism is exhibited by those coordination compounds which possess chirality.
  • There should not be the presence of element of symmetry which makes the complex optically inactive.
  • The mirror images of the complex molecule or ion must be non-superimposable with the molecule or ion. B

Question 31.
What are enantiomers?
Answer:
Enantiomers : The two forms of the optical active complex molecule which are mirror images of each other are called enantiomers.

There are two forms of enantiomers, d form and l form.

Question 32.
Draw diagrams for the optical isomers of a complex, [Co(en)3]3+.
Answer:
The complex [Co(en)3]3+ has two optical isomers.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 14

Question 33.
Explain the optical isomerism in the octahedral complex with two symmetrical bidentate chelating ligands.
Answer:
The octahedral complexes of the type [M(AA)2Q2]”±, in which two symmetrical bidentate chelating ligands like AA and two monodentate ligands like a are coordinated to the central metal atom or ion exhibit optical isomerism and two optical isomers d and l can be resolved. For example, [Pt Cl2(en)2]2.

The cis-form is unsymmetrical and optically active while the trans-form is symmetrical and hence optically inactive. The optical isomers of cis-form (d and ) of this complex along with trans-form are shown below,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 15

Question 34.
When are optical isomers called chiral?
Answer:
When the mirror images of optical isomers of the complex are nonsuperimposable they are said to be chiral. For example, [Co(en)2(NH3)2]3+.

Question 35.
Define and explain ionisation isomerism.
Answer:
Ionisation isomerism : The phenomenon of isomerism in the metal complexes in which there is an exchange of ions between coordination (or inner) sphere and outer sphere is known as ionisation isomerism.

Explanation :

  • Ionisation isomers have same molecular formula but different arrangement of ions in the inner sphere and outer sphere in the complex,
  • Hence on ionisation, these ionisation isomers produce different ions in the solution. This ionisation isomerism is also called ion-ion exchange isomerism.

Examples:
(A) [CO(NH3)4CI2]Br and (B) [Co(NH3)4CIBr] Cl

Ionisation :
(A) [CO(NH3)4CI2] Br ⇌ [CO(NH3)4CI2]+ + Br-
(B) [Co(NH3)4CIBr]Cl ⇌ [CO(NH3)4ClBr]+ + CP
In the isomers (A) and (B), there is an exchange of ions namely Br and CI.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds Important Questions

Question 36.
Define : (1) Linkage isomerism (2) Linkage isomers.
OR
What is linkage isomerism ? Explain with an example.
Answer:
(1) Linkage isomerism : The phenomenon of isomerism in which the coordination compounds have same metal atom or ion and same ligand but bonded through different donor atoms or linkages is known as linkage isomerism.

(2) Linkage isomers : The coordination compounds having same metal atom or ion and ligand but bonded through different donor atoms or linkages are called linkage isomers.
For example : Nitro complex [CO(NH3)5NO2]CI2 = (Yellow) and nitrito complex [CO(NH3)5ONO]CI2 (Red)

Question 37.
Explain linkage isomers with NO2 group as a ligand.
Answer:
(1) Nitro group (NO2) is an ambidentate ligand. NO2 group may link to central metal atom, through N or O.
(2) The two linkage isomers are, [CI: → Ag ← : NO2] and [CI: → Ag ← O-NO]
Choloronitroargentate(I) ion and Chloronitritoargentate(I) ion

Question 38.
Write linkage isomers of a complex having constituents Co3+, 5NH3 and NO2.
Answer:
(i) NO2 is an ambidentate ligand which can be linked through N or O.
(ii) The linkage isomers are as follows :
(a) [CO(NH3)5(NO2)]2+ Pentaamminenitrocobalt(III) ion
(b) [CO(NH3)5(ONO)]2+ Pentaamminenitritocobalt(III) ion

Question 39.
Define: (1) Coordination isomerism (2) Coordination isomers.
Answer:
(1) Coordination isomerism : The phenomenon of isomerism in the ionic coordination compounds having the same molecular formula but different complex ions involving the interchange of ligands between cationic and anionic spheres of different metal. ions is called coordination isomerism.

(2) Coordination isomers : The ionic coordination compounds having same molecular formula but different complexions duc to interchange of ligands between cationic and anionic spheres of different metal ions are called coordination isomers.

For example,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 27

Question 40.
Give three examples of coordination isomers. (I mark each)
Answer:

  • [Cu(NH3)4] [PICI4] and I Pt(NH3)4] [ICuCl44]
  • [Cr(NH3)6] [Cr(CN)6] and [Cr(NH3)4(CN)2] [Cr(NH3)2(CN)4]
  • [Cr(NH3)6] [Cr(SCN)6] and [Cr(NH3)4(SCN)2] [Cr(SCN)4(NH3)2]

Question 41.
Define Solvate or Hydrate isomerism.
Answer:
Solvate ate or Hydrate isomerism : The phenomenon of isomerism in the coordination compounds arising due to the exchange of solvent or H2O molecules inside the coordination sphere and outer sphere of the complex is known as solvate or hydrate isomerism.

Question 42.
Define solvate or hydrate isomers.
OR
What are hydrate isomers? Explain with examples.
Answer:
Solvate or Hydrate isomers : The coordination compounds having the same molecular formula but differ in the number of solvent or H2O molecules inside the coordination sphere and outer sphere of the complexes are called solvate or hydrate isomers.

For example : [Cr(H2O)6] CI3; [Cr(H2O)5CI]CI2 H2O; and [Cr(H2O)4CI2] CI 2H2O.

Question 43.
A coordination compound has the formula COCI3 6H2O. Write the hydrate isomers of the complex.
Answer:
The possible hydrate isomers of the coordination compounds having molecular formula COCI3 6H2O are as follows :
(1) [CO(H2O)6]CI3;
(2) [CO(H2O)5CI]CI2 H2O
(3) [CO(H2O)4CI2] Cl – 2H2O
(4) [Co(H2O)3 CI3] 3H2O.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds Important Questions

Question 44.
Explain the steps involved in describing the bonding in coordination compounds using valence bond theory.
Answer:

  • Vacant d-orbitais of metal ion form coordination bonds with ligands.
  • s, p orbitais along with vacant d-orbitais of metal ion take part in hybridisation.
  • The number of vacant hybrid orbitais formed is equal to number of hybridising orbitais which is equal to the number of ligand donor atoms or coordination number of the metal.
  • The metal-ligand coordination bonds are formed by the overlap between the vacant hybrid orbitais of metal and the filled orbitais of the ligands.
  • The hybrid orbitais used by the metal ion point in the direction of the ligands.
  • When inner (n – 1)d orbitais of metal ion are used in the hybridisation then the complex is called (a) inner orbital complex while when outer nd orbitais are used, complexes are called (b) outer orbital complexes. .

Question 45.
Explain the steps involved ¡n the metal-ligand bonding.
Answer:

  • Find the oxidation state of central metal ion in the complex.
  • Write the valence shell electronic configuration of metal ion.
  • From the formula of the complex determine the number of ligands and find the number of metal ion orbitais required for bonding.
  • Find the orbitais of metal ion available for hybridisation and the type of hybridisation involved.
  • Represent the electronic configuration of metal ion after hybridisation.
  • Exhibit filling of hybrid orbitais after complex formation.
  • Determine the nunther of unpaired electrons and predict magnetic property of the complex.
  • Find whether the complex is low spin or high spin (applicable for octahedral complexes with d4 or d8 electronic configuration.)

Question 46.
What are the salient features of valence bond theory (VBT)?
Answer:
The salient features of valence bond theory (VBT) are as follows :

  1. According to this theory, a central metal atom or ion present in a complex provides a definite number of vacant orbitals (s, p, d and) to accommodate the electrons from the ligands for the formation coordinate bonds with the metal ion atom.
  2. The number of vacant orbitals provided by the central metal atom or ion is the same as the coordination number of the metal. For example : Cu2+ provides 4 vacant orbitals in the complex. [Cu(NH3)4]2+.
  3. The vacant orbitals of metal atom or ion undergo hybridisation forming the same number of hybridised orbitals, since the bonding with the hybrid orbitals is stronger.
  4. Each ligand has one or more orbitals containing one or more lone pairs of electrons.
  5. The shape or geometry of the complex depends upon the type of hybridisation of the metal atom.
  6. When inner orbitals namely (n – 1) d orbitals in transition metal atom or ion hybridise, the complex is called inner complex and when outer orbitals i.e., nd orbitals hybridise then the complex is called outer complex.
  7. When the central metal atom or ion in the complex contains one or more unpaired electrons the complex is
    paramagnetic while if all the electrons are paired, the complex is diamagnetic.

Question 47.
What is the spin pairing process in the coordination compound?
Answer:
When the ligands approach the metal atom or ion for the formation of a complex, they influence the valence electrons of metal atom or ion. Accordingly the ligands are classified as (A) strong ligands and (B) weak ligands.

(A) Strong ligands :

  • They cause the pairing of unpaired electrons present in the metal atom or ion.
  • Spin pairing process :
    • The process of pairing of unpaired electrons in metal atom or ion due to the presence of ligands in the complex is called spin pairing process.
    • This spin pairing process decreases the number of unpaired electrons and hence decreases the paramagnetic character of the complex.
    • The strong ligands also promote the outer ns electrons to the vacant inner (n – 1)d orbitals.

(B) Weak ligands : The weak ligands have no effect on the electrons in the valence shell of a metal atom or ion.
Strong ligands : CO, CN, ethylenediammine (en), NH3, EDTA, etc.
Weak ligands : CI, I, OH, etc.

[Note : If a complex has n number of unpaired electrons then the magnetic moment, μ is given by ‘spin only’ formula μ = n(n + 2) B.M. where B.M. (Bohr Magneton) is the unit of magnetic moment. Hence from the magnitude of p, the number of unpaired electrons in the complex and its structure can be evaluated.]

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds Important Questions

Question 48.
Explain the structure of octahedral complex, [CO(NH3)6]3+ on the basis of valence bond theory.
Answer:
(1) Hexaamminecobalt(III) ion, [CO(NH3)6]3+ is a cationic complex, the oxidation state of cobalt is + 3 and the coordination number is 6.

(2) Electronic configuration : 27CO [Ar]18 3d7 4s2
Electronic configuration : Co3+ [Ar]18 3d6 4s° 4p°

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 32

(3) Since NH3 is a strong ligand, due to spin pairing effect, all the four unpaired electrons in 3d orbital are paired giving two vacant 3d orbitals.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 33

(4) Since the coordination number is Co3+ ion gets six vacant orbitais by hybridisation of two 3d vacant orbitais, One 4s and three 4p orbitais forming six d2sp3 hybrid orbitais giving octahedral geometly. It is an inner complex.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 34

(5) 6 lone pairs of electrons from 6NH3 ligands are accommodated in the six vacant d2sp3 hybrid orbitals. Thus six hybrid orbitals of Co3+ overlap with filled orbitals of NH3 forming 6 coordinate bonds giving octahedral geometry to the complex.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 35

Since the complex has all electrons paired, it is diamagnetic.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 36

Question 49.
Explain the geometry of [CoF6]3- on the basis of valence bond theory.
Answer:
(1) Hexafluorocobaltate(III) ion, [CoF]3- is an anionic complex, the oxidation state of cobalt is +3 and the coordination number is 6.
(2) Electronic configuration : 27Co [Ar]18 3d7 4s2 4p° 4d°
Electronic configuration : Co3+ [Ar]18 3d6 4s° 4p° 4d°

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 37

(3) Since F is a weak ligand, there is no spin pairing effect and Co3+ possesses 4 unpaired electrons.
(4) Since the coordination number is 6, the Co3+ ion gets six vacant orbitals by hybridisation of one 45 orbital, three 4p orbitals and two 4d orbitals forming six sp3d2 hybrid orbitals giving octahedral geometry.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 38
(5) 6 lone pairs of electrons from 6F ligands are accommodated in the six vacant sp3d2 hybrid orbitals. Thus six hybrid orbitals of Co3+ overlap with filled orbitals of F forming 6 coordinate bonds giving octahedral geometry to the complex. It is an outer complex.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 39

As the complex has 4 unpaired electrons it is paramagnetic.
Magnetic movement μ is, Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 29

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 40

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds Important Questions

Question 50.
Explain the structure of tetrachloronickelate(II) [NiCI]2- on the basis of valence bond theory.
Answer:
(1) Tetrachloronickelate(II) ion is an anionic complex, oxidation state of Ni is +2 and the coordination number is 4.
(2) Electronic configuration : 28Ni [Ar]18 3d8 4s2 4p°
Electronic configuration : Ni2+ [Ar]18 3d8 4s° 4p°

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 41

(3) Since the coordination number is 4, it gets 4 vacant hybrid orbitals by sp3 -hybridisation of one 4s and three 4p orbitals giving tetrahedral geometry to the complex.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 42
(4) As Cl is a weak ligand, 2 unpaired electrons in Ni2+ remain undisturbed.
(5) 4 lone pairs of electrons from 40 ligands are accommodated in the vacant four sp3 hybrid orbitals. Thus four sp3 hybrid orbitals of Ni2+ overlap with filled orbitals of Clforming 4 coordination bonds, giving tetrahedral geometry to the complex.
Since the complex has 2 unpaired electrons, it is paramagnetic.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 43
Magnetic moment \(\mu \text { is, } \mu=\sqrt{n(n+2)}=\sqrt{2(2+2)}=2.83 \text { B.M. }\)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 44

Question 51.
Explain the structure of [Ni(CN)4]2- on the basis of valence bond theory.
Answer:
(1) Tetracyanonickelate (II) ion, INi(CN)2]2- is an anionic complex, oxidation state of Ni is + 2 and the coordination number is 4.
(2) Electronic configuration : 22Ni [Ar]18 3d8 4s2 4p°
Electronic configuration: Ni2+ [Ai]18 3d8 4s° 4p°

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 45
(3) Since CN is a sa-ong ligand, one of the unpaired electrons in 3d orbital is promoted giving two paired electrons and one vacant 3d orbital.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 46
(4) Since the coordination number is 4, Ni2+ gets 4 vacant hybrid orbitais by hybridisation of one 3d, one 4s and two 4p orbitais forming four dsp2 hybrid orbitaIs. This has square planar geometry.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 47
(5) 4 lone pairs from 4CN ligands are accommodated in the vacant four dsp2 hybrid orbitais. Thus four dps2 hybrid orbitais of Ni2+ overlap with filled orbitais of CN forming 4 coordinate bonds giving square planar geometry to the complex. It is an inner complex.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 48
Since the complex ion has all electrons paired, it is diamagnetic.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 49
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 50

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds Important Questions

Question 52.
What are the limitations of valence bond theory?
Answer:
In case of the coordination compounds, the valence bond theory has the following limitations :
(1) It cannot explain the spectral properties (colours) of the complex compounds.
(2) Even if the magnetic moments can be calculated from the number of unpaired electrons, it cannot explain the magnetic moment arising due to orbital motion of electrons.
(3) It cannot explain why the metal ions with the same oxidation state give inner complexes and outer complexes with different ligands.
(4) In every complex, it cannot explain magnetic properties based on geometry of the complex.
(5) Quantitative interpretations of thermodynamic and kinetic stabilities of the coordination compounds cannot be accounted.
(6) The complexes with weak field ligands and strong field ligands cannot be distinguished.
(7) It cannot predict the tetrahedral and square planar geometry of complexes with coordination number 4.
(8) The order of reactivity of inner complexes of d3, d4, d5 and d6 metal ions cannot be explained.
(9) It cannot explain the rates and mechanisms of reactions of the coordination compounds.

Question 53.
What are the assumptions of Crystal Field Theory (CFT)?
Answer:
Bethe and van Vleck developed Crystal Field Theory (CFT) to explain various properties of coordination compounds. The salient features of CFT are as follows :

  1. In a complex, the central metal atom or ion is surrounded by various ligands which are either negatively charged ions (F, CI, CN, etc.) or neutral molecules (H2O, NH3, en, etc.) and the most electronegative atom in them points towards central metal ion.
  2. The ligands are treated as point charges involving purely electrostatic attraction between them and metal ion.
    • The central metal ion has five, (n – 1)d degenerate orbitals namely dxy, dyz, dzx, d(x2 – y2) and dz2.
    • When the ligands approach the metal ion, due to repulsive forces, the degeneracy of <i-orbitals is destroyed and they split into two groups of different energy, t2g and eg orbitals. This effect is called crystal field splitting which depends upon the geometry of the complex.
    • The T-orbitals lying in the direction of ligands are affected to a greater extent while those lying in between the ligands are affected to a less extent.
    • Due to repulsion, the orbitals along the axes of ligands acquire higher energy while those lying in between the ligands acquire less energy.
    • Hence repulsion by ligands give two sets of split up orbitals of metal ion with different energies.
    • The energy difference between two sets of d-orbitais after splitting by ligands is called crystal field splitting energy (CFSE) and represented by Δ0 or by arbitrary term 10Dq. The value of Δ or 10Dq depends upon the geometry of the complex.
      Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 53
  3. The electrons of metal ion occupy the split d-orbitais according to Hund’s rule. aufbau principle and those orbitais with minimum repulsion and the farthest away from the ligands.
  4. CFI’ does not account for overlapping of orbitais of central metal ion and ligands, hence does not consider covalent nature of the complex.
  5. From the crystal field stability energy, the stability of the complexes can he known.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 54

Question 54.
What is crystal field splitting?
Answer:
The splitting of five degenerate d-orbitals of the transition metal ion into different sets of orbitals (to2g and eg) having different energies in the presence of ligands in the complex is called crystal field splitting.

Question 55.
What is crystal field stabilisation energy?
Answer:
Crystal field stabilisation energy (CFSE) It is the change in energy achieved by preferential filling up of the orbitals by electrons in the complex of metal atom or ion.

CFSE is expressed as a negative .quantity i.e., CFSE < 0. Higher the negative value more is the stability of the complex. m

Question 56.
Explain the factors affecting Crystal Field Splitting parameter (Δ0).
Answer:
Crystal Field Splitting parameter (Δ0) depends on. (a) Strength of the ligands and (b) Oxidation state of the metal.

(a) Strength of the ligands : Since strong field ligands like CN, en, etc. approach closer to the central metal ion, it results in a large crystal field splitting and hence Δ0 has higher values.
(b) Oxidation state of the metal A metal ion with the higher positive charge draws the ligands closer to it which results in large separation of t2g and eg set of orbitals. The complexes involving metal ions with low oxidation state have low values of Δ0. For example [Fe(NH3)6]3+ has higher Δ0 than [Fe(NH3)6]2+. H

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds Important Questions

Question 57.
Explain the octahedral geometry of complexes using crystal field theory.
Answer:
(1) In an octahedral complex [MX6]n+, the metal atom or ion is placed at the centre of regular octahedron while six ligands occupy the positions at six vertices of the octahedron.

(2) Among five degenerate d-orbitals. two orbitals namely dx2 – y2 and dz2 are axial and have maximum electron density along the axes, while remaining three c-orbitals namely dxy, dyz and dyz are planar and have maximum electron density in the planes and in-between the axes.

(3) Hence, when the ligands approach a metal ion, the orbitals dx2 – y2 and dz2 experience greater repulsion and the orbitals dzy, dyz and dzx experience less repulsion.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 55

(4) Therefore the energy of dx2 – y2 and dz2 increases while the energy of dxy, dyz and dzx decreases and five d-orbital lose degeneracy and split into two point groups. The orbitals dxy, dyz and dyz form t2g group of lower energy while dx2 – y2 and dz2 form e group of higher energy.

Thus t2g has three degenerate orbitals while eg has two degenerate orbitals.

(5) Experimental calculations show that the energy of t2g orbitals is lowered by 0.4Δ0 or 4Dq and energy of eg. orbital is increased by 0.6 Δ0 or 6Dq Thus energy difference between t2g and eg orbitals is Δ0 or 10Dg which is crystal field splitting energy.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 56

(6) CFSF increases with the increasing strength of ligands and oxidation stale of central metal ion.

Question 58.
Explain the tetrahedral geometry of complexes using crystal field theory.
Answer:
(1) In the tetrahedral complex, [MX4], the metal atom or ion is placed at the centre of the regular tetrahedron and the four ligands, are placed at four corners of the tetrahedron.

(2) The ligands approach the central metal atom or ion in-between the three coordinates x, y and The orbitals dxy, dyz and d are pointed towards ligands and experience greater repulsion while the axial orbitals dx2y2 and dz2 lie in-between metal-ligand bond axes and experience comparatively less experience.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 57
Fig. 9.12 (a) and (b) : Tetrahedral geometry hasing central metal atoll) (M) at the centre and four ligands (L) al the four corners

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds Important Questions

(3) Therefore energy of dxy, dyz and ddzx orbitals is increased while that of dx2y2 and dz2 is lowered. Hence 5d-orbitals lose their degeneracy and split into two point groups, namely f2? of higher energy (dxy, dyz and dzx) and eg of lower energy (dx2 – y2 and dz2).

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 58

(4) The experimental calculations show that the energy of t2g orbitals is increased by 0.4 Δ0 or 4Dq and energy of eg is lowered by 0.6 Δ0 or 6Dg. Thus energy difference between t2g and eg orbitals is Δ0 or 10Dg which is crystal field splitting energy (CFSE).

(5) This explains that the entry of each electron in eg orbitals, stabilises the complex by 0.6 Δ0 or 6Dq While the entry of each electron in t2g orbitals destabilises the tetrahedral complex by 0.4 Δ0 or 4Dg.

(6) In case of strong field ligands, the electrons prefer to pair up in eg orbitals giving low spin (LS) complexes while in case of weak held ligands, the electrons prefer to enter higher energy t2g orbitals giving more unpaired electrons and hence form high spin (HS) complexes.

Table 9.4 : Properties of complexes

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 59

Question 59.
Give valence bond description for the bonding in the complex [VCI4]. Draw box diagrams for free metal ion. Which hybrid prbitals are used by the metal? State the number of unpaired electrons.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 64
Since CI is a weak ligand, there is no pairing of electrons.
Number of unpaired electrons = 2
Type of hybridisation = sp3

Geometry of complex ion = Tetrahedral
The complex ion is paramagnetic.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds Important Questions

Question 60.
Write a note on colour in coordination compounds.
Answer:

  • A large number of coordination compounds show wide range of colours due to d – d transition of electron and this can be explained by crystal field theory (CFT).
  • The complex absorbs the light in one visible region (400 nm to 700 nm) and transmits the light in different visible region giving complementary colour.
  • Consider an octahedral purple coloured complex of [Ti(H2O)6]3+ which absorbs green light and transmits purple colour. Similarly [Cu(H2O)6]2+ absorbs the light in the red region of radiation spectrum and transmits in the blue region, hence the complex appears blue.
  • The absorption of light arises due to d-d transition of electron from lower energy level (t2g) to higher energy level (eg) in octahedral complex.
  • The energy required for transition depends upon crystal field splitting energy Δ0. If Δ0 = ΔE, then the energy of an absorbed photon (hv) is \(\Delta E=h v=\frac{h c}{\lambda}\) where λ, v and c are wavelength, frequency and velocity of the absorbed light.
  • Higher the magnitude of Δ0 or ΔE, higher is the frequency or lower is the wavelength of the absorbed radiation.
  • Since Δ0 depends upon nature of metal atom or ion, its oxidation state, nature of ligands and the geometry of the complex, different coordination compounds have different colours.

Question 61.
Explain the purple colour of the complex, [Ti(H2O)6]3+ with the help of crystal field theory.
Answer:
(1) [Ti(H2O)6]3+ is an octahedral complex, oxidation state of titanium is +3 (Ti3+) and the coordination number is 6.

(2) Electronic configuration = 22Ti [Ar]18 3d2 4s2
Electronic configuration = Ti3+ + [Ar]18 3d1
OR
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 66
(3) According to crystal field theory, 3d orbitals undergo crystal field splitting giving higher energy eg, two orbitals and lower energy t2g, three orbitals.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 67
(4) The crystal field splitting energy (CFSE), Δ0 is found to be 3.99 x 10-19 J/ion from the spectrochemical studies.

(5) The absorption of radiation of wavelength λ or frequency v results in the transition of one unpaired electron from Photon energy t2g orbital to eg orbital.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 68
(6) The wavelength of the absorbed radiation will be.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 69
(7) Hence the complex [Ti(H2O)6]3+ absorbs the green radiation of wavelength 498 nm in the visible region and transmits the complementary purple light. Therefore the complex is purple coloured.

Question 62.
An octahedral complex absorbs the radiation of wavelength 620 nm. Find the crystal field splitting energy.
Answer:
Crystal field splitting energy Δ0 is given by,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 70

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds Important Questions

Question 63.
What are the applications of coordination compounds ?
Answer:
(1) In biology : Several biologically important natural compounds are metal complexes which play an important role in number of processes occurring in plants and animals.

For example, chlorophyll in plants is a complex of Mg2+ ions, haemoglobin in blood is a complex of iron, vitamin B12 is a complex of cobalt.

(2) In medicine : The complexes are used on a large scale in medicine. Many medicines in the complex form are more stable, more effective and can be assimilated easily.

For example, platinum complex [Pt(NH3)2CI2] known as cisplatin is effectively used in cancer treatment. EDTA is used to treat poisoning by heavy metals like lead.

(3) To estimate hardness of water :

  • The hardness of water is due to the presence Mg2+ and Ca2+ ion in water.
  • The strong field ligand EDTA forms stable complexes with Mg2+ and Ca2+. Hence these ions can be removed by adding EDTA to hard water.

Similarly these ions can be selectively estimated due to the difference in their stability constants.

(4) Electroplating : This involves deposition of a metal on the other metal. For smooth plating, it is necessary to supply continuously the metal ions in small amounts.

For this purpose, a solution of a coordination compound is used which dissociates to a very less extent. For example, for uniform and thin plating of silver and gold, the complexes K[Ag(CN)2] and K[Au(CN)2] are used.

Multiple Choice Questions

Select and write the most appropriate answer from the given alternatives for each subquestion :

Question 1.
The coordination number of cobalt in the complex [Co(en)2Br2]CI2 is
(a) 4
(b) 5
(c) 6
(d) 7
Answer:
(c) 6

Question 2.
EDTA combines with cations to form
(a) chelates
(b) polymers
(c) clathrates
(d) non-stoichiometric compounds
Answer:
(a) chelates

Question 3.
Which one of the following compounds can exhibit coordination isomerism?
(a) [Co(en)2CI2]Br
(b) [CO(NH3)6] [Cr(CN)6]
(c) [Co(en)3]CI3
(d) [CO(NH3)5NO2]CI2
Answer:
(b) [CO(NH3)6] [Cr(CN)6]

Question 4.
Which of the following compounds can exhibit linkage isomerism?
(a) [Co(en)3]CI3
(b) [Co(en)2CI2]CI
(c) [Co(en)2NO2Br]CI
(d) [Co(NH3)5CI]Br2
Answer:
(c) [Co(en)2NO2Br]CI

Question 5.
Oxidation number of cobalt in K[COCI4] is
(a) +1
(b) -1
(c) +3
(d) -3
Answer:
(b) -1

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds Important Questions

Question 6.
The correct structure of [Cr(H2O)6]3+ is ……………………
(a) octahedral
(b) tetrahedral
(c) square pyramidal
(d) trigonal bipyramidal
Answer:
(b) tetrahedral

Question 7.
Amongst the following ions which one has the highest paramagnetism?
(a) [Cr(H2O)6]3+
(b) [Fe(H2O)6]2+
(c) [CU(H2O)6]2+
(d) [Zn(H2O)6]2+
Answer:
(b) [Fe(H2O)6]2+

Question 8.
The geometry of [Ni(CN)4]3- and [NiCI4]-2 are
(a) both tetrahedral
(b) both square planar
(c) tetrahedral and square planar respectively
(d) square planar and tetrahedral respectively
Answer:
(d) square planar and tetrahedral respectively

Question 9.
The complex cis-[Pt(NH3)2CI2] is used in treatment of cancer under the name.
(a) Aspirin
(b) Eqanil
(c) cisplatin
(d) transplatin
Answer:
(c) cisplatin

Question 10.
[CO(NH3)6]3+ is an orbital complex and is in nature.
(a) inner, paramagnetic
(b) inner, dimagnetic
(c) outer, paramagnetic
(d) outer, dimagnetic
Answer:
(b) inner, dimagnetic

Question 11.
The IUPAC name of [Ni(Co)4] is
(a) tetra carbonyl nickel (O)
(b) tetra carbonyl nickel (II)
(c) tetra carbonyl nickelate (O)
(d) tetra carbonyl nickelate (II)
Answer:
(a) tetra carbonyl nickel (O)

Question 12.
The number of ions produced by the complex [CO(NH3)4CI2] Cl is
(a) 1
(b) 2
(c) 3
(d) 4
Answer:
(b) 2

Question 13.
The dimagnetic species is
(a) [Ni(CN)4]2-
(b) [NiCl4]2-
(c) [CoCI4]2-
(d) [CoF6]2-
Answer:
(a) [Ni(CN)4]2-

Question 14.
Which one of the following is an inner orbital complex as well as diamagnetic in behaviour (Atomic no. Zn = 30, Cr = 24, Co = 27, Ni = 28)
(a) [Zn(NH3)6]2+
(b) [Cr(NH3)6]3+
(c) [CO(NH3)6]3+
(d) [Ni(NH3)6]2+
Answer:
(c) [CO(NH3)6]3+

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds Important Questions

Question 15.
Among [Ni(Co)J, [Ni(CN)4]2A [NiClJ2- Species, the hybridisation states at the Nickel atom are respectively
(a) sp3, dsp2, sp3
(b) sp3, dsp2, dsp2
(c) dsp2, sp3, sp3
(d) sp3, sp3, dsp2
Answer:
(a) sp3, dsp2, sp3

Question 16.
The strongest ligand in the following is
(a) CN
(b) Br
(c) HO
(d) F
Answer:
(a) CN

Question 17.
Magnetic moment of (NH4)2 (MnBr4) is BM
(a) 5.91
(b) 4.91
(c) 3.91
(d) 2.91
Answer:
(a) 5.91

Question 18.
The complex which violates EAN rule is
(a) Fe(CO)5
(b) [Fe(CN)6]3-
(c) Ni(CO)4
(d) [Zn(NH3)4]CI2
Answer:
(b) [Fe(CN)6]3-

Question 19.
EDTA is a ligand of the type
(a) bidentate
(b) tridentate
(c) tetradentate
(d) hexadentate
Answer:
(d) hexadentate

Question 20.
The cationic complex among the following is
(a) K3[Fe(CN)6]
(b) Ni(CO)4
(c) K2HgI4
(d) [CO(NH3)6]CI2
Answer:
(d) [CO(NH3)6]CI2

Question 21.
If Z is the atomic number of a metal, X is number of electrons lost forming metal ion and Y is the number of electrons from the ligands then EAN is
(a) Z + X + Y
(b) X – Z + Y
(c) Z – X + Y
(d) X + Z – Y
Answer:
(c) Z – X + Y

Question 22.
Octahedral complex has hybridisation,
(a) dsp2
(b) d3sp3
(c) dsp3
(d) d2sp3
Answer:
(d) d2sp3

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds Important Questions

Question 23.
Inner complex has hybridisation,
(a) d2sp3
(b) sp3d2
(c) sp3d
(d) sp3d3
Answer:
(a) d2sp3

Question 24.
The number of unpaired electrons in [CO(NH3)6]3+ is
(a) 0
(b) 1
(c) 2
(d) 4
Answer:
(a) 0

Question 25.
The number of unpaired electrons in [NiClJ2- and [Ni(CN)4]2_ are respectively,
(a) 2, 2
(b) 2, 0
(c) 0, 0
(d) 1, 2
Answer:
(b) 2, 0

Question 26.
Among the following complexes, the highest magnitude of crystal field stabilisation energy will be for [Co(H2O)6]3+, [CO(CN)6]3-, [Co(NH3)6]3+, [CoF6]3-
(a) [Co(H2O)6]3+
(b) [CO(CN)6]3-
(c) [Co(NH3)6]3+
(d) [CoF6]3-
Answer:
(b) [CO(CN)6]3-

Question 27.
The number of unpaired electrons in a low spin octahedral complex ion of d1 is
(a) 0
(b) 1
(c) 2
(d) 3
Answer:
(b) 1

Question 28.
The number of unpaired electrons in a high spin octahedral complex ion of d7 is
(a) 0
(b) 1
(c) 2
(d) 3
Answer:
(d) 3

Question 29.
Ligand used in the estimation of hardness of water is
(a) EDTA
(b) DBG
(c) chloride
(d) bromo
Answer:
(a) EDTA

Question 30.
Which of the following complexes will give a white precipitate on treatment with a solution of barium nitrate?
(a) [Cr(NH3)4SO4] CI
(b) [CO(NH3)4CI2] NO2
(c) [Cr(NH3)4CI2] SO4
(d) [CrCI3(H2O)4]CI
Answer:
(c) [Cr(NH3)4CI2] SO4

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds Important Questions

Question 31.
What is effective atomic number of Fe (z = 26) in [Fe(CN)6]4-?
(a) 12
(b) 30
(c) 26
(d) 36
Answer:
(d) 36

Question 32.
Cisplatin compound is used in the treatment of
(a) malaria
(b) cancer
(c) AIDS
(d) yellow fever
Answer:
(b) cancer

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 12th Chemistry Textbook Solutions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds

1. Choose the most correct option.

Question i.
The oxidation state of cobalt ion in the complex [Co(NH3)5Br]SO4 is ……………………….
a. + 2
b. + 3
c. + 1
d. + 4
Answer:
(b) + 3

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds

Question ii.
IUPAC name of the complex [Pt(en)2(SCN)2]2+ is ………………………
a. bis (ethylenediamine dithiocyanatoplatinum (IV) ion
b. bis (ethylenediamine) dithiocyantoplatinate (IV) ion
c. dicyanatobis (ethylenediamine) platinate IV ion
d. bis (ethylenediammine)dithiocynato platinate (IV) ion
Answer:
(a) bis(ethylenediamine dithiocyanatoplatinum (IV) ion

Question iii.
Formula for the compound sodium hexacynoferrate (III) is
a. [NaFe(CN)6]
b. Na2[Fe(CN)6]
c. Na[Fe(CN)6]
d. Na3[Fe(CN)6]
Answer:
(d) Na3[Fe(CN)6]

Question iv.
Which of the following complexes exist as cis and trans isomers?
1. [Cr(NH2)2Cl4]
2. [Co(NH3)5Br]2⊕
3. [PtCl2Br2]2⊕ (square planar)
4. [FeCl2(NCS)2]2⊕ (tetrahedral)
a. 1 and 3
b. 2 and 3
c. 1 and 3
d. 4 only
Answer:
(a) 1 and 3

Question v.
Which of the following complexes are chiral?
1. [Co(en)2Cl2]
2. [Pt(en)Cl2]
3. [Cr(C2O4)3]3⊕
4. [Co(NH3)4CI2]
a. 1 and 3
b. 2 and 3
c. 1 and 4
d. 2 and 4
Answer:
(a) 1 and 3

Question vi.
On the basis of CFT predict the number of unpaired electrons in [CrF6]3.
a. 1
b. 2
c. 3
d. 4
Answer:
(c) 3

Question vii.
When an excess of AgNO3 is added to the complex one mole of AgCl is precipitated. The formula of the complex is ……………..
a. [CoCl2(NH3)4]Cl
b. [CoCl(NH3)4] Cl2
c. [CoCl3(NH3)3]
d. [Co(NH3)4]Cl3
Answer:
(a) [COCI3(NH3)4]CI

Question viii.
The sum of coordination number and oxidation number of M in [M(en)2C2O4]Cl is
a. 6
b. 7
c. 9
d. 8
Answer:
(c) 9

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds

2. Answer the following in one or two sentences.

Question i.
Write the formula for tetraammineplatinum (II) chloride.
Answer:
Formula of tetraamineplatinum(II) chloride : [Pt(NH3)4]CI2

Table 9.1 : IUPAC names of anionic and neutral ligands
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 3
Table 9.2: IUPAC names of anionic complexes

Metal Name
A1
Cr
Cu
Co
Au(Gold)
Fe
Pb
Mn
Mo
Ni
Zn
Ag
Sn
Aluminate
Chromate
Cuprate
Cobaltate
Aurate
Ferrate
Plumbate
Manganate
Molybdate
Nickelate
Zincate
Argentate
Stannate

Table 9.3 : IUPAC names of some complexes

Complex IUPAC name
(i) Anionic complexes :
(a) [Ni(CN)J2-
(b) [Co(C204)3]3-
(c) [Fe(CN)6]4-
Tetracyanonickelate(II) ion Trioxalatocobaltate(III) ion
Hexacyanoferrate(II) ion
(ii) Compounds containing complex anions and metal cations :
(a) Na3[Co(N02)6]
(b) K3[A1(C204)3]
(c) Na3[AIF6]
Sodium hexanitrocobaltate(III)
Potassium trioxalatoaluminate(III)
Sodium hexafluoroaluminate(III)
(iii) Cationic complexes :
(a) [Cu(NH3)4]2+
(b) [Fe(H20)5(NCS)]2+
(c) [Pt(en)2(SCN)2]2+
Tetraamminecopper(II) ion
Pentaaquai sothiocyanatoiron(III) ionBis(ethylenediamine)dithiocyanatoplatinum(IV)
(iv) Compounds containing complex cation and anion :
(a) [PtBr2(NH3)4]Br2
(b) [Co(NH3)5C03]CI
(c) [Co(H20)(NH3)5]I3
Tetraamminedibromoplatinum(IV) bromide, Pentaamminecarbonatocobalt(III) chloride, Pentaammineaquacobalt(III) iodide
(v) Neutral complexes :
(a) Co(N02)3(NH3)3
(b) Fe(CO)5
(c) Rh(NH3) 3(SCN) 3
Triamminetrinitrocobalt(III) Pentacarbonyliron(0) Triamminetrithiocyanatorhodium(III)

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds

Question ii.
Predict whether the [Cr(en)2(H2O)2]3+ complex is chiral. Write structure of its enantiomer.
Answer:
(i) Complex is chiral.
(ii) The following are its enantiomers
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 19

Question iv.
Name the Lewis acids and bases in the complex [PtCl2(NH3)2].
Answer:
Lewis acid : Pt2+
Lewis bases : Cl and NF3

Question v.
What is the shape of a complex in which the coordination number of central metal ion is 4?
Answer:
A complex with the coordination number of central metal ion equal to 4 may be tetrahedral or square planar.

Question vi.
Is the complex [CoF6] cationic or anionic if the oxidation state of cobalt ion is +3?
Answer:
In the complex, Co carries + 3 charge while 6F carry – 6 charge. Hence the net charge on the complex is – 3.
Therefore it is an anionic complex.

Question vii.
Consider the complexes [Cu(NH3)4][PtCl4] and [Pt(NH3)4] [CuCl4]. What type of isomerism these two complexes exhibit?
Answer:
Since in these two given complexes, there is an exchange of ligands between cationic and anionic constituents, they exhibit coordination isomerism.

Question viii.
Mention two applications of coordination compounds.
Answer:
(1) In biology : Several biologically important natural compounds are metal complexes which play an important role in number of processes occurring in plants and animals.

For example, chlorophyll in plants is a complex of Mg2+ ions, haemoglobin in blood is a complex of iron, vitamin B12 is a complex of cobalt.

(2) In medicine : The complexes are used on a large scale in medicine. Many medicines in the complex form are more stable, more effective and can be assimilated easily.

For example, platinum complex [Pt(NH3)2CI2] known as cisplatin is effectively used in cancer treatment. EDTA is used to treat poisoning by heavy metals like lead.

(3) To estimate hardness of water :

  • The hardness of water is due to the presence Mg2+ and Ca2+ ion in water.
  • The strong field ligand EDTA forms stable complexes with Mg2+ and Ca2+. Hence these ions can be removed by adding EDTA to hard water.

Similarly these ions can be selectively estimated due to the difference in their stability constants.

(4) Electroplating : This involves deposition of a metal on the other metal. For smooth plating, it is necessary to supply continuously the metal ions in small amounts.
For this purpose, a solution of a coordination compound is used which dissociates to a very less extent. For example, for uniform and thin plating of silver and gold, the complexes K[Ag(CN)2] and K[Au(CN)2] are used.

3. Answer in brief.

Question i.
What are bidentate ligands? Give one example.
Answer:
Bidentate ligand : This ligand has two donor atoms in the molecule or ion. For example, ethylenediamine, H2N – (CH2)2 – NH2.

Question ii.
What is the coordination number and oxidation state of metal ion in the complex [Pt(NH3)Cl5]2?
Answer:
Coordination number = 6
Oxidation state of Pt = +4.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds

Question iii.
What is the difference between a double salt and a complex? Give an example.
Answer:

Double salt Coordination compound (complex)
(1) Double salts exist only in the solid state and dissociate into their constituent ions in the aqueous solutions. (1) Coordination compounds exist in the solid-state as well as in the aqueous or non-aqueous solutions.
(2) Double salts lose their identity in the solution. (2) They do not lose their identity completely.
(3) The properties of double salts are same as those of their constituents. (3) The properties of coordination compounds are different from their constituents.
(4) Metal ions in the double salts show their normal valence. (4) Metal ions in the coordination compounds show two valences namely primary valence and second­ary valence satisfied by anions or neutral molecules called ligands.
(5) For example in K2SO4. K2SO4. A12(SO4)3. 24H2O. The ions K+, Al3 + and SO4 show their properties. (5) In K4[Fe(CN)6], ions K+ and [Fe(CN)6]4‘~ ions show their properties.

Question iv.
Classify the following complexes as homoleptic and heteroleptic
[Cu(NH3)4]SO4, [Cu(en)2(H2O)Cl]3⊕, [Fe(H2O)5(NCS)]2⊕, tetraammine zinc (II) nitrate.
Answer:
Homoleptic complex :
(a) [Cu(NH3)4]SO4
(d) Tetraaminezinc (II) nitrate : [Zn(NH3)4](NO3)2

Heteroleptic Complex :
(b) [Cu(en)2(H2O)CI]2+
(c) [Fe(H2O)5(NCS)]2+

Question v.
Write formulae of the following complexes
a. Potassium ammine-tri chloroplatinate (II)
b. Dicyanoaurate (I) ion
Answer:
(a) Potassium amminetrichloroplatinate(II) K[Pt(NH3)CI3]
(b) Dicyanoaurate (I) ion [AU(CN)2]

Question vi.
What are ionization isomers? Give an example.
Answer:
Ionisation isomers : The coordination compounds having same molecular composition but differ in the compositions of coordination (or inner) sphere and outer sphere and produce different ions on ionisation in the solution are called ionisation isomers. For example, Pentaamminesulphatocobalt (III) bromide [Co(NH3)5SO4] Br, Pentaamminebromocobalt(III) sulphate [Co(NH3)5Br] SO4.

Question vii.
What are the high-spin and low-spin complexes?
Answer:
(1) High spin complex (HS) :

  • The complex which has greater iwmher of unpaired electrons and hence a higher value of resultant spin and magnetic moment is called high spin (or spin free) or IlS complex.
  • It is formed with weak field ligands and the complexes have lower values for crystal field splitting energy (CFSE). Δ0
  • The paramagnetism of HS complex is larger.

(2) Low spin complex (LS) :

  • The complex which has the Icasi number of unpaired electrons or all electrons paired and hence the lowest
    (or no) resultant spin or magnetic moment is called low spin (or spin paired) or LS complex.
  • It is formed with strong tickl ligands and the complexes have higher values of crystal field splitting energy (Δ0).
  • Low spin complex is diamagnetic or has low paramagnetism.

Table 9.5 : d-orbitai diagrams fir high spin and low spin complexes
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 60

(Only the electronic configurations c4 to d1 render the high spin and low spin complexes)

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds

Question viii.
[CoCl4]2⊕ is a tetrahedral complex. Draw its box orbital diagram. State which orbitals participate in hybridization.
Answer:
27Co [Ar] 3d74s2
Oxidation state of Co = +2 Co2+ [Ar] 3d7 4s°
Since CI is a weak ligand, there is no pairing of electrons. Since C.N. is 4, there is sp3 hybridisation.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 30

Question ix.
What are strong field and weak field ligands? Give one example of each.
Answer:
The ligands are then classified as (a) strong field and (b) weak field ligands. Strong field ligands are those in which donor atoms are C,N or P. Thus CN, NC, CO, HN3, EDTA, en (ethylenediammine) are considered to be strong ligands. They cause larger splitting of d orbitals and pairing of electrons is favoured. These ligands tend to form low spin complexes. Weak field ligands are those in which donor atoms are halogens, oxygen or sulphur.

For example, F, CI, Br, I, SCN, C2O42-. In case of these ligands the A0 parameter is smaller compared to the energy required for the pairing of electrons, which is called as electron pairing energy. The ligands then can be arranged in order of their increasing field strength as
I < Br < CI < S2- < F < OH < C2O42- < H2O < NCS < EDTA < NH3 < en < CN < CO.

Question x.
With the help of a crystal field energy-level diagram explain why the complex [Cr(en)3]3⊕ is coloured?
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 31

Since (en) is a strong field ligand there is pairing of electrons. The electrons occupy the t2g orbitals of lower energy. It has one unpaired electron. Due to d-d transition, it is coloured.

4. Answer the following questions.

Question i.
Give valence bond description for the hybrid orbitals are used by the metal? State the number of unpaired electrons.
Answer:
Since CI is a weak ligand, there is no pairing of electrons.
Number of unpaired electrons = 2
Type of hybridisation = sp3

Geometry of complex ion = Tetrahedral
The complex ion is paramagnetic.

Question ii.
Draw a qualitatively energy-level diagram showing d-orbital splitting in the octahedral environment. Predict the number of unpaired electrons in the complex [Fe(CN)6]4⊕. Is the complex diamagnetic or paramagnetic? Is it coloured? Explain.
Answer:
(A) r-orbital splitting in the octahedral environment :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 65
(B) [Fe (CN)6]4- is an octahedral complex.
(C) Since CN is a strong ligand, there is pairing of electrons and the complex is diamagnetic.
(D) The complex exists as lemon yellow crystals.
(In the complex all electrons in t2g are paired and requires high radiation energy for excitation.)

Question iii.
Draw isomers in each of the following
a. [Pt(NH3)2ClNO2]
b. [Ru(NH3)4Cl2]
c. [Cr(en2)Br2]
Answer:
(a) [Pt(NH3)2CINO2]
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 20
(b) [RU(NH3)4CI2]
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 21
(c) [Cr(en2)Br2]+
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 22

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds

Question iv.
Draw geometric isomers and enantiomers of the following complexes.
a. [Pt(en)3]4⊕
b. [Pt(en)2ClBr]2⊕
Answer:
The complex [Pt(en)3]4+ has two optical isomers.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 23
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 24

Question v.
What are ligands? What are their types? Give one example of each type.
Answer:
Ligands : The neutral molecules or negatively charged anions (or rarely positive ions) which are bonded by coordinate bonds to the central metal atom or metal ion in a coordination compound are called ligands or donor groups. For example in [Cu(CN)4]2-, four CN ions are ligands coordinated to central metal ion Cu2+. Ligands can be classified on the basis of number of electron donor atoms in the ligand i.e. denticity.

(1) Monodentate or unidentate ligand : A ligand molecule or an ion which has only one donor atom with a lone pair of electrons forming only one coordinate bond with metal atom or ion in the complex is called monodentate or unidentate ligand. For example NH3, Cl, OH, H2O, etc.

(2) Polydentate or multidentate ligand : A ligand molecule or an ion which has two or more donor atoms with the lone pairs of electrons forming two or more coordinate bonds with the central metal atom or ion in the complex is called polydentate or multidentate ligand. For example, ethylene diamine, H2N – (CH2)2 – NH2.
According to the number of donor atoms they are classified as follows :

  • Bidentate ligand : This ligand has two donor atoms in the molecule or ion. For example, ethylenediamine, H2N – (CH2)2 – NH2.
  • Tridentate ligand : This ligand molecule has three donor atoms or three sites of attachment.
    E.g. Diethelene triamine, H2N – CH2 – CH2 – NH – CH2 – CH2 – NH2. This has three N donor atoms.
  • Tetradentate (or quadridentate) ligand : This ligand molecule has four donor atoms.
    Eg. Triethylene tetraamine which has four N donor atoms.
  • Hexdentate ligand : This ligand molecule has six donor atoms. E.g. Ethylenediamine tetracetato.

(3) Ambidentate ligand : A ligand molecule or an ion which has two or more donor atoms, however in the formation of a complex, only one donor atom is attached to the metal atom or an ion is called ambidentate ligand. For example, NO2 which has two donor atoms N and O forming a coordinate bond, M ← ONO (nitrito) or M ← NO2 (nitro).

(4) Bridging ligand : A monodentate ligand having more than one lone pairs of electrons, hence can attach to two or more metal atoms or ions and hence acts as a bridge between different metal atoms is called bridging ligand. For example : OH, F, SO4-2, etc.

Question vi.
What are cationic, anionic and neutral complexes? Give one example of each.
Answer:
(1) Cationic sphere complexes : A positively charged coordination sphere or a coordination compound having a positively charged coordination sphere is called cationic sphere complex.

For example : [Zn(NH3)4]2+ and [Co(NH3)5CI] SO4 are cationic complexes. The latter has coordination sphere [Co(NH3)5CI]2+, the anion SO42+ makes it electrically neutral.

(2) Anionic sphere complexes : A negatively charged coordination sphere or a coordination compound having negatively charged coordination sphere is called anionic sphere complex. For example, [Ni(CN)4]2+ and K3[Fe(CN)6] have anionic coordination sphere; [Fe(CN)6]3- and three K+ ions make the latter electrically neutral.

(3) Neutral sphere complexes : A neutral coordination complex does not possess cationic or anionic sphere.

[Pt(NH3)2CI2] or [Ni(CO)4] are neither cation nor anion but are neutral sphere complexes.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds

Question vii.
How stability of the coordination compounds can be explained in terms of equilibrium constants?
Answer:
Stability of the coordination compounds : The stability of coordination compounds can be explained on the basis of their stability constants. The stability of coordination compounds depends on metal-ligand interactions. In the complex, metal serves as electron-pair acceptor (Lewis acid) while the ligand as Lewis base (since it is electron
donor). The metal-ligand interaction can be realized as the Lewis acid-Lewis base interaction. Stronger the interaction greater is stability of the complex.

Consider the equilibrium for the metal-ligand interaction :
Ma+ + nLx- ⇌ [MLn]a+(-nx)
where a, x, [a + ( – nx)] denote the charge on the metal, ligand and the complex, respectively. Now, the equilibrium constant K is given by
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 28

Stability of the complex can be explained in terms of K. Higher the value of K larger is the thermodynamic stability of the complex hence K is called stability constant, and denoted by Kstah. The equilibria for the complex formation with the corresponding K values are given below.

Ag+ + 2CN ⇌ [Ag(CN)2] K = 5.5 x 1018
Cu2+ + 4CN ⇌ [CU(CN)4]2- K = 2.0 x 1027
Co3+ + 6NH3 ⇌ [CO(NH3)6]3+ K = 5.0 x 1033

From the above data, the stability of the complexes is [Co(NH3)6]3+ > [Cu(CN)4]2- > [Ag(CN)2].

Question viii.
Name the factors governing the equilibrium constants of the coordination compounds.
Answer:
The equilibrium constant of the complex depends on the following factors :

(a) Charge to size ratio of the metal ion : Higher the ratio greater is the stability. For the divalent metal ion complexes their stability shows the trend : Cu2+ > Ni2+ > Co2+ > Fe2+ > Mn2+ > Cd2+. The above stability order is called the Irving-William order. In the above list both Cu and Cd have the charge + 2, however, the ionic radius of Cu2 + is 69 pm and that of Cd2 + is 97 pm. The charge to size ratio of Cu2+ is greater than that of Cd2+. Therefore the Cu2+ forms stable complexes than Cd2+.

(b) Nature of the ligand : A second factor that governs stability of the complexes is related to how easily the ligand can donate its lone pair of electrons to the central metal ion that is, the basicity of the ligand. The ligands those are stronger bases tend to form more stable complexes.

Activity :
1. The reaction of chromium metal with H 2SO4 in the absence of air gives blue solution of chromium ion.
Cr(s) + 2H(aq) → Cr2⊕(aq) + H2(s)
Cr2⊕ forms octahedral complex with H2O ligands.
a. Write formula of the complex
b. Describe bonding in the complex using CFT and VBT.
Draw crystal field splitting and valence bond orbital diagrams.

2. Reaction of complex [Co(NH3)3(NO2)3 with HCl gives a complex [Co(NH3)3H2OCl2] in which two chloride ligands are trans to one another.
a. Draw possible stereoisomers of starting material
b. Assuming that NH3 groups remain in place, which of two starting isomers would give the observed product?

12th Chemistry Digest Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds Intext Questions and Answers

Use your brain power ……. (Textbook page 192)

Question 1.
Draw Lewis structures of the following ligands and identify the donor atom in them :
NH3, H2O.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 1

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds

Try this ………. (Textbook page 193)

Question 1.
Can you write ionisation of [Ni (NH3)6] CI2?
Answer:
[Ni (NH3)6] CI2 → [Ni(NH3)6]2+ + 2CI

Question 2.
Identify coordination sphere and counter ions.
Answer:
Coordination sphere : [Ni(NH3)6]2+
Counter ions : CI

Can you tell ? (Textbook page 193)

Question 1.
A complex is made of Co (III) and consists of four NH3 molecules and two CI ions as ligands. What is the charge number and formula of complexion?
Answer:
The complex ion has formula, [Co(NH3)4CI2]+.
The charge number is + 1.

Use vour brain power ……………… (Textbook page 193)

Question 1.
Coordination number used in coordination of compounds is somewhat different than that used in solid state. Explain.
Answer:

  • In a coordination compound the coordination number is the number of donor atoms of ligands directly attached to metal atom or ion.
  • In a solid state, the number of closest constituent atoms or ions in contact with a particular atom in the crystal lattice is called coordination number.
  • In a coordination compound, coordination number depends upon nature of metal atom or ion, and its electronic configuration.
  • In a solid state, the coordination number depends upon the crystalline structure of the unit cell.

Can you tell? ………………. (Textbook page 194)

Question 1.
What is the coordination number of
(a) Co in [CoCl2(en)2]+ = 6
(b) Ir in [Ir(C2O4)2Cl2]3+ and
(c) Pt in [Pt(NO2)2(NH3)2] ?
Answer:
(a) Coordination number of Co in [CoCl2(en)2]+ = 6
(b) Coordination number of Ir in [Ir(C2O4)2Cl2]3+ = 6
(c) Coordination number of Pt in [Pt(NO2)2(NH3)2] = 4

Use your brain power ……… (Textbook page 195)

Question 1.
Classify the complexes as homoleptic and heteroleptic:
(a) [Co (NH3)5CI]SO4,
(b) [CO(ONO)(NH3)5]CI2,
(c) [CoCl(NH3)(en)2]2+ and
(d) [Cu(C2O4)3]3-
Answer:
Homoleptic Complexes : (d) [Cu(C2O4)3]3-
Heteroleptic Complexes : (a) [CO(NH3)5CI]SO4
(b) [CO(ONO)(NH3)5]CI2,
(C) [CoCl(NH3)(en)2]2+

Use your brain power ……… (Textbook page 195)

Question 1.
Classify the complexes as cationic, anionic or Cr(H2O)2(C2O4)23-, PtCI2(en)2 and Cr(CO)6.
Answer:
Cationic complexes : [CO(NH3)6]CI2
Anionic complexes : Na4[Fe(CN)6], [Cr(H2O)2 (C2O4)2]3-
Neutral complexes : Cr(CO)6, Pt CI2(en)2

Try this ……. (Textbook page 197)

Question 1.
Write the representation of the following :
(i) Tricarbonatocobaltate(III) ion.
(ii) Sodium hexacyanoferrate(III).
(iii) Potassium hexacyafioferrate(II).
(iv) Aquachlorobis(ethylenediamine)cobalt(III).
(v) Tetraaquadichlorochromium(III) chloride.
(vi) Diamminedichloroplatinum(II).
Answer:
(i) [Co(C03)3]3-
(ii) Na3[Fe(CN)6]
(iii) K4[Fe(CN)6]
(iv) Co(en)2(H2O)(Cl)
(v) [Cr(H2O)4CI2]CI
(vi) Pt(NH3)2CI2

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds

Try this …… (Textbook page 196)

Question 1.
Find out the EAN of
(a) [Zn(NH3)4]2+
(b) [Fe(CN)6]4+
Answer:
(a) For the complex ion, [Zn(NH3)4]2+ :
Atomic number of Zn = Z = 30
Charge on metal ion = + 2
∴ Number of electrons lost by Zn atom = X = 2 Total number of electrons donated by 4NH23
ligands = Y = 2 x 4 = 8
EAN = Z – X + Y
= 30 – 2 + 8
= 36

(Note : This is atomic number of the nearest inert element 36Kr.)

(b) For the complex ion, [Fe(CN)J4- :
For Fe, Z = 26 (Atomic number)
X = 2 (Due to + 2 charge on Fe)
Y = 12 (Due to 6 CN ligands)
∴ EAN = Z – X + Y
= 26 – 2 + 12
= 36

Use your brain power …… (Textbook page 197)

Question 1.
Do the following complexes follow the EAN rule
(a) Cr(CO)4,
(b) Ni(CO)4,
(c) Mn(CO)5,
(d) Fe(CO)5?
Answer:
(a) Cr(CO)4 : EAN = Z – X + Y
(b) Ni(C0)4 : EAN = Z – X + Y
= 24 – 0 + 8
= 28 – 0 + 8
= 32
= 36
(c) Mn(CO)5 : EAN = Z – X + Y
= 25 – 0 + 10
= 35

(d) Fe(CO)5 : EAN = Z – X + Y
= 26 – 0 + 10
= 36

Conclusion :
(a) Cr(CO)4 and (c) Mn(CO)5 do not follow EAN Rule.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds

Try this ….. (Textbook page 199)

Question 1.
Draw structures of ci,c and trans isomers of [Fe(NH3)2(CN)4]
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 9

Remember ….. (Textbook page 199)

Our hands are non-superimposable mirror images. When you hold your left hand up to a mirror the image looks like right hand.

Try this ….. (Textbook page 199)

Question 1.
Draw enantiomers of [Cr(OX)2]3 where OX = C2O4 :
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 16

Question 2.
Draw (A) enantiomers and (B) cis and trans isomers of [Cr(H2O)2(OX)2] :
Answer:
(A) Enantiomers :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 17

(B) as and trans isomers :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 18

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds

Can you tell ? ….. (Textbook page 200)

Question 1.
Can you write IUPAC names of isomers (I) [Co(NH3)5SO4]Br and (II) [Co(NH3)5Br]SO4?
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 25

Question 2.
Write linkage isomers of [Fe(H2O)5SCN]+. Write their IUPAC names.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 26

Use your brain power …..(Textbook page 201)

Question 1.
The stability constant K of the [Ag(CN)2] is 5.5 x 10 while that for the corresponding [Ag(NH3)2]+ is 1.6 x 107. Explain why [Ag(CN)2]2- is more stable.
Answer:
Stability constant of [Ag(CN)2]2- is larger than that of [Ag(NH3)2]+ and hence [Ag(CN)2]2- is more stable. Also, CN is a stronger ligand than NH3.

Remember …… (Textbook Page 202)

Question 1.
Complete the missing entries.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 71
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 51

(Note : The missing entries are underlined.)

Table 9.3: Type of hybridisation and geometry of a complex
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 52

Try this ….. (Textbook page 204)

Question 1.
Based on the VBT predict structure and magnetic behaviour of the [Ni(NH3)6]
Answer:
28Ni [Ar] 3d8 4s2
Ni3+ [Ar] 3d7 4s°
Hybridisation : sp3d2
Geometry : Octahedral
Magnetic property : Paramagnetic

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds

Try this …… (Textbook page 202)

Question 1.
Give VBT description of bonding in each of following complexes. Predict their magnetic behaviour.
(a) [ZnCI4]2+
(b) [CO(H2O)6]2- (high spin)
(c) [Pt(CN)4]2- (square planar)
(d) [CoCI4]2- (tetrahedral)
(e) [Cr(NH3)6]3+

Try this ……. (Textbook page 206)

Question 1.
Sketch qualitatively crystal field d orbital energy level diagrams for each of the following complexes :
(a) [Ni(en)3]2+ (b) [Mn(CN)6]3- (c) [Fe(H2O)6]2+
Predict whether each of the complexes is diamagnetic or paramagnetic.
Answer:
(a) The complex ion, [Ni(en)3]2+ is octahedral.
28Ni [Ar] 3d8 4s2
Ni2+ [Ar] 3d8 4s°.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 61

Since en is a strong ligand there is pairing of electrons.
Number of unpaired electrons = n = 2 in t2g, orbitals
Magnetic moment = \(\mu=\sqrt{n(n+2)}\)
\(=\sqrt{2(2+2)}=2.83 \mathrm{~B} . \mathrm{M} .\)

The complex ion is paramagnetic.

(b) The complex ion [Mn(CN)6]3- is octahedral.
25Mn [Ar] 3d5 4s2
Mn3+ [Ar] 3d4 4s°

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 62

Since CN is a strong ligand there is pairing of electrons.
Number of unpaired electrons = n = 2 in t2g, orbitals
Magnetic moment = \(\mu=\sqrt{n(n+2)}\)
\(=\sqrt{2(2+2)}=2.83 \mathrm{~B} . \mathrm{M}\).

The complex ion is paramagnetic.

(c) The complex ion [Fe(H2O)6]2+ is octahedral.
26Fe [Ar] 3d6 4s2
Fe2+ [Ar] 3d6 45°

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 9 Coordination Compounds 63

Since H2O is a weak ligand, there is no pairing of electrons.
Number of unpaired electrons = n = 4 in t2g and eg orbitals.
Magnetic moment
\(\begin{aligned}
=\mu &=\sqrt{n(n+2)} \\
&=\sqrt{4(4+2)} \\
&=4.90 \mathrm{~B} . \mathrm{M} .
\end{aligned}\)
The complex ion is paramagnetic.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Secretarial Practice Solutions Chapter 10 Dividend and Interest

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board Class 12 Secretarial Practice Solutions Chapter 10 Dividend and Interest Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board Class 12 Secretarial Practice Solutions Chapter 10 Dividend and Interest

1A. Select the correct answer from the options given below and rewrite the statements.

Question 1.
Dividend is paid to ____________
(a) Shareholder
(b) Debenture holder
(c) Depositor
Answer:
(a) Shareholder

Question 2.
____________ is profit shared by company with a shareholder.
(a) Interest
(b) Rent
(c) Dividend
Answer:
(c) Dividend

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Secretarial Practice Solutions Chapter 10 Dividend and Interest

Question 3.
Dividend is recommended by ____________
(a) Managing Director
(b) Secretary
(c) Board of Directors
Answer:
(c) Board of Directors

Question 4.
Interim Dividend is declared by ____________
(a) Board of Directors
(b) Debenture holders
(c) Depositors
Answer:
(a) Board of Directors

Question 5.
Final Dividend is declared by ____________
(a) Board of Directors
(b) Shareholders
(c) Depositors
Answer:
(b) Shareholders

Question 6.
Dividend cannot be declared out of ____________
(a) Capital
(b) Profit
(c) Reserves
Answer:
(a) Capital

Question 7.
Dividend amount should be transferred in a separate Bank Account within ____________ days of its declaration.
(a) 5
(b) 15
(c) 50
Answer:
(a) 5

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Secretarial Practice Solutions Chapter 10 Dividend and Interest

Question 8.
Dividend should be paid within ____________ days of its declaration.
(a) 3
(b) 13
(c) 30
Answer:
(c) 30

Question 9.
____________ holders get dividend from residual profits.
(a) Equity share
(b) Preference share
(c) Debenture
Answer:
(a) Equity Share

Question 10.
Dividend is paid first to ____________ shareholders.
(a) Equity
(b) Preference
(c) Deferred
Answer:
(b) Preference

Question 11.
____________ warrant is a cheque containing dividend amount sent by company to the shareholders.
(a) Dividend
(b) Share
(c) Interest
Answer:
(a) Dividend

Question 12.
IEPF is created by ____________ where unpaid dividend is transferred by company.
(a) Central Government
(b) Company
(c) Shareholders
Answer:
(a) Central Government

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Secretarial Practice Solutions Chapter 10 Dividend and Interest

Question 13.
Payment of ____________ Dividend must be authorised by the Articles of Association.
(a) Interim
(b) Final
(c) Bonus
Answer:
(a) Interim

Question 14.
____________ is a return paid to creditors by the company.
(a) Dividend
(b) Interest
(c) Rent
Answer:
(b) Interest

Question 15.
____________ is not linked to profits of the company.
(a) Dividend
(b) Interest
(c) Bonus
Answer:
(b) Interest

1B. Match the pairs.

Question (I).

Group ‘A’ Group ‘B’
(a) Dividend (1) Equity Shareholders
(b) Interest (2) Appropriation of Profit
(c) Interim Dividend (3) Recommendation of Secretary
(d) Final Dividend (4) Registrar of Company
(e) Fluctuating Rate of Dividend (5) Obligatory to pay
(6) Decided and Declared by the Board of Directors
(7) Decided by Board and Declared by Members
(8) Decided by President of India
(9) Company not allowed to pay
(10) Declared by Government of India

Answer:

Group ‘A’ Group ‘B’
(a) Dividend (2) Appropriation of Profit
(b) Interest (5) Obligatory to pay
(c) Interim Dividend (6) Decided and Declared by the Board of Directors
(d) Final Dividend (7) Decided by Board and Declared by Members
(e) Fluctuating Rate of Dividend (1) Equity Shareholders

Question (II).

Group ‘A’ Group ‘B’
(a) Dividend (1) Inform stock exchange about dividend declaration
(b) Interest (2) Creditors
(c) IEPF (3) Registered Shareholders
(d) Unpaid Dividend Account (4) Balance of Unpaid Dividend Transferred
(e) Listed Company (5) Unregistered Company
(6) Non-listed company
(7) Unpaid/Unclaimed Dividend
(8) Balance of unpaid bonus transferred here
(9) Must inform the government about dividend declaration
(10) General Public

Answer:

Group ‘A’ Group ‘B’
(a) Dividend (3) Registered Shareholders
(b) Interest (2) Creditors
(c) IEPF (4) Balance of Unpaid Dividend Transferred
(d) Unpaid Dividend Account (7) Unpaid/Unclaimed Dividend
(e) Listed Company (1) Inform stock exchange about dividend declaration

1C. Write a word or term or a phrase that can substitute each of the following statements.

Question 1.
The return on investment is paid to the shareholders of the company.
Answer:
Dividend

Question 2.
The meeting where the final dividend is declared.
Answer:
AGM (Annual General Meeting)

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Secretarial Practice Solutions Chapter 10 Dividend and Interest

Question 3.
The company has to intimate the stock exchange about the declaration of dividends.
Answer:
Listed company

Question 4.
The shareholders get dividends at a fixed rate.
Answer:
Preference

Question 5.
The shareholders get dividends at a fluctuating rate.
Answer:
Equity

Question 6.
Request by the shareholder in the prescribed form for payment of dividend into shareholders bank amount.
Answer:
Dividend Mandate

Question 7.
The number of days within which payment of dividend be completed by the company after its declaration.
Answer:
30 days

Question 8.
Dividend declared between two AGMs.
Answer:
Interim Dividend

Question 9.
Dividend decided and declared by the Board.
Answer:
Interim Dividend

Question 10.
The return is paid to the creditors by the company.
Answer:
Interest

1D. State whether the following statements are True or False.

Question 1.
The dividend is paid to registered shareholders of the company.
Answer:
True

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Secretarial Practice Solutions Chapter 10 Dividend and Interest

Question 2.
The dividend is decided by the Board.
Answer:
True

Question 3.
The dividend is decided by the shareholders.
Answer:
False

Question 4.
Dividend once declared cannot be revoked.
Answer:
True

Question 5.
Dividend cannot be paid out of capital.
Answer:
True

Question 6.
Shareholders decide about the rate and amount of profit to be given as dividends.
Answer:
False

Question 7.
All categories of shareholders get a fixed-rate dividend.
Answer:
False

Question 8.
IEPF is the fund created by the company.
Answer:
False

Question 9.
Interest is a liability for the company.
Answer:
True

Question 10.
Interest is paid to shareholders of the company.
Answer:
False

1E. Find the odd one.

Question 1.
Final Dividend, Interim Dividend, Interest
Answer:
Interest

Question 2.
Out of Capital, Out of free reserve, Out of money given by the government
Answer:
Out of Capital

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Secretarial Practice Solutions Chapter 10 Dividend and Interest

Question 3.
Dividend Account, Dividend Mandate, Unpaid/ Unclaimed Dividend Account
Answer:
Dividend Mandate

Question 4.
Dividend warrant, Dividend Mandate, Cheque
Answer:
Dividend Mandate

1F. Complete the sentences.

Question 1.
Word dividend is derived from Latin term ____________
Answer:
Dividendum

Question 2.
Dividend is paid to ____________
Answer:
registered shareholders

Question 3.
Dividend can be declared only on recommendation of ____________
Answer:
Board of Directors

Question 4.
Dividend must be paid in ____________
Answer:
cash

Question 5.
The meeting at which final dividend is approved is ____________
Answer:
Annual General Meeting

Question 6.
Dividend cannot be paid out of ____________
Answer:
capital

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Secretarial Practice Solutions Chapter 10 Dividend and Interest

Question 7.
Interim dividend is decided and declared by ____________
Answer:
Board of Directors

Question 8.
Predecided and a fixed rate of dividend is paid to ____________
Answer:
preference shareholder

Question 9.
Payment of dividend must be completed within ____________
Answer:
30 days

Question 10.
Payment of Interim Dividend needs to be authorized by ____________
Answer:
Articles of Association

Question 11.
The obligatory payment made by company to its creditors is called as ____________
Answer:
Interest

1G. Select the correct option from the bracket.

Question 1.

Group ‘A’ Group ‘B’
(a) Dividendum (1) ………………..
(b) Interest (2) ………………..
(c) ………………… (3) Final Dividend
(d) ……………….. (4) Interim Dividend
(e) Government Fund (5) …………………

(Latin term, Creditors, At AGM, At Board Meeting, IEPF)
Answer:

Group ‘A’ Group ‘B’
(a) Dividendum (1) At Board Meeting
(b) Interest (2) Latin term
(c) IEPF (3) Final Dividend
(d) At AGM (4) Interim Dividend
(e) Government Fund (5) Creditors

Question 2.

Group ‘A’ Group ‘B’
(a) Preference Shares (1)  ……………………
(b) Equity Shares (2) ……………………..
(c) Deposit holders (3) ……………………..
(d) ……………………. (4) Payment of Dividend
(e) ……………………. (5) Dividend Declared but not paid/claimed

(Fixed rate Dividend, Dividend at a Fluctuating Rate, Interest, within 30 days, Unclaimed/Unpaid Dividend)
Answer:

Group ‘A’ Group ‘B’
(a) Preference Shares (1) Unclaimed/Unpaid Dividend
(b) Equity Shares (2) Within 30 days
(c) Deposit holders (3) Interest
(d) Fixed rate of Dividend (4) Payment of Dividend
(e) Dividend at a Fluctuating Rate (5) Dividend Declared but not paid/claimed

1H. Answer in one sentence.

Question 1.
What is Dividend?
Answer:
The dividend is a share in distributable profits of the company to which the shareholder in entitled when formally declared by the company.

Question 2.
Who has the right to recommend dividends?
Answer:
The Board of directors has the right to recommend.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Secretarial Practice Solutions Chapter 10 Dividend and Interest

Question 3.
What is a Final Dividend?
Answer:
The final dividend is that dividend that is declared and paid after the close of the financial year.

Question 4.
What is an Interim Dividend?
Answer:
The interim dividend is that dividend that is declared and paid between two AGMs of an accounting year.

Question 5.
Who declares Interim Dividend?
Answer:
The Board of directors declares Interim dividends.

Question 6.
Which shares get dividends at a fixed rate?
Answer:
Preference shares get dividends at a fixed rate.

Question 7.
Which shares get dividends at a fluctuating rate?
Answer:
Equity shares get dividends at a fluctuating rate.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Secretarial Practice Solutions Chapter 10 Dividend and Interest

Question 8.
At which meeting Interim Dividend is decided and declared?
Answer:
Interim Dividend is decided and declared in Board Meeting.

Question 9.
What is Interest?
Answer:
Interest is the price paid for the productive services rendered by capital

Question 10.
State the time within which unpaid dividends be transferred to the unpaid dividend account.
Answer:
The unpaid dividend should be transferred within 7 days of the end of 30 days within which payment has to be made.

1I. Correct the underlined word and rewrite the following sentences.

Question 1.
The dividend is paid to creditors.
Answer:
The dividend is paid to shareholders.

Question 2.
Interest is paid to shareholders.
Answer:
Interest is paid to creditors.

Question 3.
The final Dividend is paid between two AGM.
Answer:
Interim Dividend is paid between two AGM.

Question 4.
Special Resolution must be passed to declare the Final Dividend.
Answer:
An ordinary resolution must be passed to declare the Final Dividend.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Secretarial Practice Solutions Chapter 10 Dividend and Interest

Question 5.
The dividend must be paid within 60 days of its declaration.
Answer:
The dividend must be paid within 30 days of its declaration.

Question 6.
The Dividend to be paid should be transferred to Dividend A/c within 30 days of its declaration.
Answer:
The Dividend to be paid should be transferred to Dividend A/c within 5 days of its declaration

Question 7.
The dividend is an obligation to be paid by a company every year.
Answer:
Interest is an obligation to be paid by a company every year.

Question 8.
Preference shareholders are given the last priority in the payment of dividends.
Answer:
Equity shareholders are given the last priority in the payment of dividends.

Question 9.
Preference shareholders get dividends from residual profits.
Answer:
Equity shareholders get dividends from residual profits.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Secretarial Practice Solutions Chapter 10 Dividend and Interest

Question 10.
Dividend is payable every year irrespective of profits made by the company.
Answer:
Interest is payable every year irrespective of profits made by the company.

1J. Arrange in proper order.

Question 1.
(a) Recommendation of Dividend.
(b) Checking sufficiency of profits
(c) Board Meeting
Answer:
(a) Checking sufficiency of profits
(b) Board Meeting
(c) Recommendation of Dividend

Question 2.
(a) Transfer to Dividend Account
(b) Transfer to IEPF
(c) Transfer to Unpaid Dividend Account
Answer:
(a) Transfer to Dividend Account
(b) Transfer to Unpaid Dividend Account
(c) Transfer to IEPF

Question 3.
(a) Closure of Register of Members.
(b) Intimate Stock Exchange of Board Meeting.
(c) Intimate Stock Exchange of declaration of dividend.
Answer:
(a) Intimate Stock Exchange of Board Meeting
(b) Intimate Stock Exchange of declaration of dividend
(c) Closure of Register of Members

Question 4.
(a) Decision on Rate of Dividend
(b) Transfer of IEPF
(c) Payment of Dividend
Answer:
(a) Decision on Rate of Dividend
(b) Payment of Dividend
(c) Transfer to IEPF

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Secretarial Practice Solutions Chapter 10 Dividend and Interest

Question 5.
(a) Payment of Interim Dividend
(b) Board meeting deciding and declaring Interim Dividend
(c) Authorization of Articles of Association
Answer:
(a) Authorization of Articles of Association
(b) Board meeting deciding and declaring Interim Dividend
(c) Payment of Interim Dividend

2. Explain the following terms/concepts.

Question 1.
Profit
Answer:
Profit is the financial gain from business activity minus expenses. Profit is the income remaining after deducting total costs from total revenue. It is also called financial gain. Profit is the difference between revenues and expenses for a given period. It is the tool for measuring the success of the business. Without profit, the company cannot survive in the market.

Question 2.
Dividend
Answer:
The term dividend is derived from the Latin word ‘Dividendum’ which means that which is to be divided. A dividend is the portion of the company’s earnings distributed to the shareholders decided and managed by the company’s board of directors. The dividend is a share in distributable profits of the company Shareholder is entitled to receive the dividend when it is formally declared by the company

Question 3.
Interest
Answer:
Interest is the cost of borrowing money typically expressed as an annual percentage of a loan. The money people earn on their savings is called Interest. Interest is paid to the lender by the borrower, in case of a loan or from the financial institution to the depositor, in the case of a savings account. In financial terms, it is a payment made for using the money of another i.e. borrower takes money from the lender. Interest is the cost of renting the money for the borrower and it is the income from lending money for the lender.

Question 4.
Final Dividend
Answer:
The final dividend is declared and paid after the financial year is closed. The final dividend is decided and recommended by the Board of Directors. The final dividend is approved by the shareholder in the AGM. The declaration of the final dividend does not require authorization of Articles of Association. The rate of the final dividend is always higher than the Interim dividend. It is declared from sources like the current year’s profits, money provided by Government for dividends, etc.

Question 5.
Interim Dividend
Answer:
The interim dividend is the dividend that is declared and paid in the middle of an accounting year i.e. before the finalization of accounts for the year. Dividend declared by the Board of Directors between two Annual General Meetings is called Interim Dividend. The interim dividend is paid in the middle of the accounting year.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Secretarial Practice Solutions Chapter 10 Dividend and Interest

Question 6.
Unpaid Dividend
Answer:
Dividend declared by the company but neither paid to nor claimed by a shareholder within 30 days of its declaration is termed as Unpaid and Unclaimed Dividend.

Question 7.
Unpaid Dividend Account
Answer:
A dividend declared by the company but neither paid to nor claimed by a shareholder is called an Unpaid/Unclaimed Dividend. This unpaid/unclaimed dividend should be transferred to the Unpaid/Unclaimed Account within 30 days of its declaration. This ‘Unpaid Dividend Account’ is opened in a scheduled Bank by the company.

Question 8.
Dividend Mandate
Answer:
The dividend is paid by different modes of payment like cash, cheque, or warrant or by electronic mode. It can also be paid by using the Dividend Mandate. If the shareholder wishes to get dividend credited directly in the Bank Account he is required to send a request in a prescribed form which is called ‘Dividend Mandate’. The dividend Mandate authorizes the company to pay dividends directly to shareholders’ bankers.

Question 9.
IEPF
Answer:
IEPF means Investors Education and Protection Fund. Any amount in the Unpaid Dividend Account of a company that is unpaid/ unclaimed for a period of 7 (seven years) from the date of such a transfer shall be, transferred to ‘Investors Education and Protection Fund’. The claimant can claim his dividend by filling the prescribed form and submitting the necessary documents. The claimant needs to follow the procedure.

Question 10.
Rate of Dividend
Answer:
The return that a shareholder receives on his investment from the company is called a dividend. The dividend is always declared by the company on the face value of a share irrespective of its market value. The rate of dividend is expressed as a percentage of the face value of a share per annum.

3. Study the following case/situation and express your opinion.

1. LMN Co Limited decides to declare a dividend for the financial year 2018-19 in which it has earned profits less than their expectations.

Question (a).
Is Board right in recommending a dividend of Rs. 5/- per share out of free reserves?
Answer:
Yes, Board is right in recommending a dividend of Rs. 5/- per share out of free reserves, as dividends can be paid out of free reserves.

Question (b).
Can Board declare the dividend though it is not approved by AGM?
Answer:
No Board cannot declare the divided if it is not approved by AGM as dividends should be approved by shareholders by passing an ordinary resolution in AGM.

Question (c).
Can the Board give dividends in the form of gifts?
Answer:
No Board cannot give dividends in the form of gifts. It must be paid in cash, not in kind.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Secretarial Practice Solutions Chapter 10 Dividend and Interest

2. ABC Co. Ltd. decides to pay Interim Dividend.

Question (a).
Can it be paid out of free reserves?
Answer:
No. the Interim Dividend cannot be paid out of free reserves.

Question (b).
Is the Board right in declaring the same at the Board Meeting?
Answer:
Yes. Board is right in declaring the same at the Board meeting as it has the power to declare an Interim Dividend.

Question (c).
Can the company distribute the same within 30 days of its declaration?
Answer:
Yes, after the declaration, the Interim dividend should be paid within 30 days of its declaration.

3. RAJ Company limited decides to pay Interim Dividend.

Question (a).
Is the Board justified to decide Interim Dividend of Rs. 5/per share even though profits to date are insufficient?
Answer:
The interim dividend is paid out of profits between two annual general meetings. It cannot be paid out of any reserves. So it is not justified.

Question (b).
Can the Board declare it out of Free Reserves?
Answer:
No Board cannot declare an Interim dividend out of free reserves.

Question (c).
Can the Board declare it out of Capital?
Answer:
No Board cannot declare out of capital.

4. DIAMOND Co. Ltd. is considering declaring an Interim Dividend.

Question (a).
In how many days of the declaration it should transfer the funds to Dividend Account?
Answer:
The interim dividend must be transferred to the Dividend Account within 5 days of its declaration.

Question (b).
In how many days it must pay it to shareholders?
Answer:
The interim dividend should be paid within 30 days of its declaration to shareholders.

Question (c).
In how many days of the declaration it must transfer the funds to the Unpaid Dividend A/c?
Answer:
Unpaid/unclaimed Interim dividend should be transferred to ‘Unpaid Dividend Account’ within 7 days of the expiry of 30 days of declaration i.e. 37 days of its declaration.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Secretarial Practice Solutions Chapter 10 Dividend and Interest

5. The Board of Directors of STAR Co. Ltd. which is a listed company recommends a dividend of Rs. 15/- per share to be paid in cash.

Question (a).
Is it justified to pay the dividend firstly to its Preference Shareholders and then after to Equity Shareholders?
Answer:
Yes, because preference shares are entitled to the dividend before it is paid to the equity shareholder. Equity shareholders get dividends from residual profits i.e. after paying to preference shareholders.

Question (b).
Is the AGM required to approve the same?
Answer:
Yes for declaration of final divided Approval of AGM is a must.

Question (c).
Can the company pay dividends in cash?
Answer:
Yes, the company pay a dividend in cash and not in kind.

6. GOLD Co. Ltd. declares a dividend of Rs. 10/- per share for F.Y. 2018-19.

Question (a).
Is the company under default, if the dividend was not paid within 30 days of its declaration?
Answer:
Yes, the company is to default as the time limit within which the company must pay dividends after the declaration is 30 days.

Question (b).
Is the company right in transferring the unpaid dividend to its Debenture Reserve Account?
Answer:
No, the company has to transfer the total amount of dividend which remains unpaid/unclaimed to the ‘Unpaid Dividend Account.

Question (c).
Does the company have to transfer the amount of unpaid dividend to IEPF after 30 days?
Answer:
No, any amount in the unpaid dividend account of a company that remains unpaid/unclaimed for a period of 7 years from the date of such a transfer, should be transferred to (IEPF), ‘Investors Education and Protection Fund’.

4. Distinguish between the following:

Question 1.
Final Dividend and Interim Dividend
Answer:

Points Interim Dividend Final Dividend
1. Meaning Interim Dividend is the dividend that is declared between two Annual General Meetings of a company. The final Dividend is the dividend that is declared at the Annual General Meeting of a company.
2. When declared? It is declared between two Annual General Meetings. It is declared after the completion of the financial year of the company.
3. Who declares? The interim dividend is declared by the Board of Directors by passing a resolution. The final dividend is decided and recommended by the Board of Directors. It is declared by the shareholders.
4. Authorization Authorization of Articles is necessary for the declaration of interim dividends. Authorization of Articles is not necessary for the declaration of the final dividend.
5. Rate of Dividend The rate of the Interim dividend is lower than the final dividend. The rate of the final dividend is always higher than the Interim dividend.
6. Source It is declared out of profits of the current accounting year. It is declared from different sources like the current year’s profits, free reserves, capital profits, money provided by Government for dividends, etc.
7. Accounting Aspect It is declared before the preparation of the final accounts of the company. It is declared only after the accounts of the year are prepared and finalized.

Question 2.
Dividend and Interest
Answer:

Points Dividend Interest
1. Meaning The dividend is the return payable to the shareholders of the company for their investment in the share capital. It is the return payable to the creditors of the company. For e.g. Debenture holder, Deposit holders.
2. Intervals Dividends need not be paid on regular basis and they can vary according to the company’s profits. Interest has to be paid at regular intervals at a fixed rate.
3. Given to whom It is paid to the member i.e. the owners of the company. It is paid to the creditor of the company.
4. Expense Dividends are not the expense as they are based on the profit made. If no profit, they are not paid for that period. Interest is the expense to the company.
5. Rate of Dividend The rate of the Interim dividend is lower than the final dividend. The rate of the final dividend is always higher than the Interim dividend.
6. Obligation It has to be paid only when the company made profits. It is not linked to the Profits of the company. It is an obligation for the company.
7. When payable It is payable when a company earns sufficient profit. It is payable every year irrespective of the profits of the company.
8. Rate It is paid at a fluctuating rate to the equity shareholders. The rate of Interest is Fixed and pre-determined at the time of issue of the security.

5. Answer in brief.

Question 1.
State any four points to be kept in mind by a listed company with respect to dividends.
Answer:
When a company lists its shares on Stock Exchange, additional listing agreements are to be followed which are as follows:

  • Stock exchange should be informed if the securities are listed 2 days prior to the Board meeting in which recommendation of final dividend is to be considered.
  • Stock Exchange should be informed immediately regarding the declaration of dividend as soon as the Board meeting gets over.
  • Notice of closing book should be informed at least 7 (seven) working days before the closure to the stock exchange.
  • Transfer Register and Register of Members should be closed.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Secretarial Practice Solutions Chapter 10 Dividend and Interest

Question 2.
Discuss any four features of dividend.
Answer:

  • It is the portion of profits of the company paid to its shareholders.
  • It is payable out of profits of the company.
  • It is an unconditional payment made by the company.
  • If the company has issued equity shares with differential rights as to dividend, the terms of issue of such shares will govern the rights of shareholders about receiving the dividend.

Question 3.
Explain the features of interest.
Answer:
Interest is the cost of borrowing money typically expressed as an annual percentage of a loan. The money people earn on their savings is called Interest. Interest is paid to the lender by the borrower in case of a loan or from the financial institution to the depositor in the case of a savings account. In financial terms, it is a payment made for using the money of another i.e. borrower takes money from the lender. Interest is the cost of renting the money for the borrower and it is the income from lending money for the lender.
Features:

  • Interest is the price paid for the productive services rendered by capital.
  • Interest has a direct relation with risk. The higher the risk, the higher is the interest.
  • The rate of interest is expressed as the annual percentage of the principal.
  • The rate of interest is determined by various factors like money supply, fiscal policy, the volume of borrowings, rate of inflation, etc.
  • Interest is a charge against the profit of the Company. Even if, the company makes no profit, interest should be paid.
  • The rate of interest is fixed and pre-determined.

6. Justify the following statements.

Question 1.
The dividend is paid out of the profits of the company.
Answer:

  • The dividend is the portion of profits of the company paid to its shareholders.
  • It is payable out of profits of the company.
  • Dividend can be paid out of capital profits on fulfilling these conditions.
  • Capital Profits are realized in cash.
  • Articles of Association of the company permit such a distribution.
  • It remains as profits after revaluation of all assets and liabilities.
  • Thus, it is rightly justified that dividend is paid out of profits of the company.

Question 2.
Interim dividends cannot be paid out of free reserves.
Answer:

  • Dividend declared by the Board of Directors between two Annual General Meetings is called Interim Dividend.
  • The interim dividend shall not be declared out of free reserves.
  • In the event of a loss or inadequacy of profits during a financial year, no interim dividend shall be declared.
  • The declaration of an interim dividend does not create a debt against a company.
  • The board of directors can cancel an interim dividend after declaring it.
  • Thus, it is rightly justified that Interim dividends cannot be paid out of reserves.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Secretarial Practice Solutions Chapter 10 Dividend and Interest

Question 3.
Annual General Meeting (AGM) is crucial for Final Dividend.
OR
The final Dividend is declared only after the accounts are prepared and finalized.
Answer:

  • The final dividend is that dividend that is declared and paid after the closing of the financial year.
  • It is decided and recommended by the Board of Directors.
  • The rate of final dividend is declared by the shareholders in the AGM.
  • It is declared only after the account of the year is prepared and finalized.
  • Thus, it is rightly said that AGM is crucial for the Final Dividend. OR Final Dividend is declared only after the accounts are prepared and finalized.
  • The final dividend is declared from different sources, and its declaration does not need the authorization of articles.
  • Thus, it is rightly said that AGM is crucial for the Final Dividend. OR Final Dividend is declared only after the accounts are prepared and finalized.

Question 4.
Listed Company has to follow additional guidelines on dividend matters.
Answer:

  • Notify stock exchange where company’s securities are listed at least 2 (two) days in advance of the date of the meeting of the Board at which recommendation of final dividend is to be considered.
  • Intimate Stock Exchange immediately about the declaration of the dividend after the Board Meeting.
  • Give notice of Book closure to the stock exchange at least 7(seven) working days before the closure.
  • Close the Register of members and the Transfer Register.
  • It must use an electronic mode of payment such as Electronic Clearing Services (ECS) or National Electronic Fund Transfer (NEFT); as approved by the Reserve Bank of India (RBI)
  • The listed company has to express the dividend on a per-share basis only.

Question 5.
Equity shareholders get the last priority in receiving dividends.
Answer:

  • The dividend is the portion of profits of the company paid to its shareholders.
  • The dividend is payable only to the registered shareholders of the company.
  • Preference shareholders are entitled to the dividend before it is paid to the equity shareholders.
  • The equity shares do not enjoy a preference for dividends.
  • They do not have priority for the payment of capital at the time of liquidation.
  • Equity shareholders will get dividends from residual profit i.e. after paying to preference shareholders and arrears of dividend on cumulative preference shares.
  • The equity shares get the last priority in dividends and thus are the residual claimants.
  • Thus, it is rightly said that the equity shareholders get the last priority in receiving dividends.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Secretarial Practice Solutions Chapter 10 Dividend and Interest

Question 6.
Unpaid dividends cannot be used by the company.
Answer:

  • The dividend declared by the company but has not been paid to or claimed by a shareholder within 30 days of its declaration is termed as an unpaid dividend.
  • The total amount of dividend which remains unpaid should be transferred to ‘Unpaid Dividend Account’.
  • Any amount in the Unpaid Dividend Account of a Company that remains unpaid/unclaimed for a period of 7 years will be transferred to ‘Investors Education and Protection Fund’.
  • The company cannot use unpaid dividends. The only claimant of money can claim for it by following certain procedures.
  • Thus, it is rightly said that unpaid dividends cannot be used by the company.

Question 7.
Interest is a liability/obligation of the company.
OR
Interest is paid to the creditor of the company.
Answer:

  • Interest is a payment made for using another money So it is the cost of renting the money for the borrower and it is the income from lending money for the lender.
  • The company has to pay interest, if it has borrowed money from creditors like Debenture holders, Depositors, Bondholders, etc.
  • Interest is the liability of the company as it is a payment made for using money from the lender.
  • Interest is a charge against the profit of the company.
  • Even if, the company makes no profit, it has to pay interest to borrowers.
  • Thus, it is rightly said that interest is a liability/ obligation for the company.

Question 8.
Approval of members is not needed for Interim Dividends.
Answer:

  • Dividend declared by the Board of Directors between two Annual General Meetings is called Interim Dividend.
  • It is paid in the middle of the accounting year.
  • It is declared out of profits of the current account year.
  • It is declared before the preparation of final accounts of the company.
  • The Board of Directors has the power to declare Interim Dividend.
  • Articles of Association’ of the Company must authorize the Board of Directors to declare an interim dividend.
  • The Board Meeting has to pass a resolution for declaring the Interim dividend.
  • Thus, it is rightly said that approval of members is not needed for Interim dividends.

7. Answer the following questions.

Question 1.
Define Dividend and explain its features.
Answer:
The term dividend is derived from the Latin word ‘Dividendum’ which means that which is to be divided. A dividend is the portion of the company’s earnings distributed to the shareholders decided and managed by the company’s board of directors.
The dividend is a share of distributable profits of the company. A shareholder is entitled to receive the dividend when it is formally declared by the company.
Definitions:

  • The Institute of Chartered Accountants of India has defined Dividend “as a distribution to shareholders out of profits or reserves available for this purpose”.
  • The Supreme Court has defined it as “In case of going – concern, it means the portion of profits of a company, which is allotted to the holders of shares in a company”.

Features of Dividend:

  • It is the portion of profits of the company paid to its shareholders.
  • It is payable out of profits of the company.
  • It is an unconditional payment made by the company.
  • The company pays dividends to the equity shareholders and preference shareholders only.
  • If the company has issued equity shares with differential rights as to dividend, the terms of issue of such shares will govern the rights of shareholders about receiving the dividend.
  • A dividend cannot be declared out of capital.
  • Recommendation of the Board of Directors is necessary for the declaration of dividends.
  • The dividend is recommended and approved by the Board of Directors by passing a resolution at the Annual General Meeting.
  • The previous year’s dividend cannot be declared if that particular year’s Annual Account has been approved in the AGM.
  • Dividend once approved and declared by shareholders, creates a debt. It cannot be revoked.
  • The dividend includes the interim dividend.
  • The dividend must be paid in cash, cheque or transferred through ECS or NEFT and not in kind.
  • The dividend is to be paid on the paid-up value of shares.
  • Dividend cannot be paid on calls paid in advance.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Secretarial Practice Solutions Chapter 10 Dividend and Interest

Question 2.
What is Interest? Explain its features.
Answer:
Interest is the cost of borrowing money typically expressed as an annual percentage of a loan. The money people earn on their savings is called Interest. Interest is paid to the lender by the borrower in case of a loan or from the financial institution to the depositor in the case of a savings account. In financial terms, it is a payment made for using the money of another i.e. borrower takes money from the lender. Interest is the cost of renting the money for the borrower and it is the income from lending money for the lender.
Features:

  • Interest is the price paid for the productive services rendered by capital.
  • Interest has a direct relation with risk. The higher the risk, the higher is the interest.
  • The rate of interest is expressed as an annual percentage of the principal.
  • The rate of Interest is determined by various factors like money supply, fiscal policy, the volume of borrowings, rate of inflation, etc.
  • Interest is a charge against the profit of the Company. Even if the company makes no profit, interest should be paid.
  • The rate of interest is fixed and pre-determined.

Question 3.
Discuss legal provisions for declaration of dividend.
Answer:
The term dividend is derived from the Latin word ‘Dividendum’ which means that which is to be divided.
A dividend means the profit of a company that is not retained in Legal Provisions for declaration of Dividend.
(i) Board Meeting:

  • The Board of Directors has the power and authority to declare the dividend.
  • The board meeting is called to pass a resolution to discuss the following points.
  • Rate of Dividend and amount of Dividend to be paid.
  • Book closure date for dividend.
  • Date of Annual General Meeting.
  • Bank with which a separate account should be opened to remit the dividend amount.

(ii) Shareholders’ Approval:

  • The dividend is approved by shareholders by passing an Ordinary Resolution at the Annual General Meeting.
  • Shareholders can declare a lower rate of dividend than what is recommended by the Board but not higher than that.
  • Once the dividend is declared at the General Meeting, it cannot be canceled. Hence, the company cannot declare dividends for the second time in that year.

(iii) Separate Bank Account:
The company must deposit the dividend amount in a separate bank account i.e. “Dividend Account” opened in a scheduled bank. The dividend must be transferred to this account within 5 days of its declaration.

(iv) Prohibition to pay Dividend:

  • A company cannot declare any dividend on equity shares if the company has failed to repay the deposit or any interest on the deposit.
  • If the company is found guilty at the time of Payment of Interest to debenture holders, Redemption of Debentures and Preference Shares, Payment of Interest to a financial institution, etc. in that case no dividend can be declared.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Secretarial Practice Solutions Chapter 10 Dividend and Interest

Question 4.
Explain Interim Dividend.
Answer:

  • The interim dividend is the dividend that is declared and paid in the middle of an accounting year i.e. before the finalization of accounts for the year. Dividend declared by the Board of Directors between two Annual General Meetings is called Interim Dividend.
  • The interim dividend is paid in the middle of the accounting year.
  • The interim dividend is declared by the Board of directors during any financial year out of surplus in the profit and loss account and out of profits of the financial year.

Features of Interim Dividend:

  • The Board of Directors has the power to declare an interim dividend.
  • Interim Dividend is only payment on account of the whole dividend for the year.
  • The company should provide depreciation for the entire year and not for a part of the year before declaring an interim dividend.
  • Interim dividends cannot be paid out of any reserves.
  • The Board of directors can declare interim dividend only when it is mentioned in the Articles of Association of the Company.
  • A resolution has to be passed in the Board Meeting for declaring the Interim Dividend.
  • A separate Bank account should be maintained in a scheduled bank to credit the interim dividend within 5 (five) days of its declaration.
  • Interim Dividend should be paid within 30 days of its declaration.
  • Unpaid/Unclaimed dividend should be transferred to ‘Unpaid Dividend Account’ within 7 days of the expiry of 30 days of declaration i.e. 37 days of its declaration.
  • Any amount remaining Unpaid/Unclaimed in the ‘Unpaid Dividend Account’ for 7 (seven) years should be transferred to IEPF.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Secretarial Practice Solutions Chapter 9 Depository System

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board Class 12 Secretarial Practice Solutions Chapter 9 Depository System Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board Class 12 Secretarial Practice Solutions Chapter 9 Depository System

1A. Select the correct answer from the options given below and rewrite the statements.

Question 1.
In physical mode, securities are held in ____________ form.
(a) Paper
(b) Dematerialization
(c) Electronic
Answer:
(a) Paper

Question 2.
Risk of losing certificates exist in ____________ mode.
(a) Physical
(b) Dematerialization
(c) Digital
Answer:
(a) Physical

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Secretarial Practice Solutions Chapter 9 Depository System

Question 3.
In Depository system, securities are held in ____________ form.
(a) Scrip based
(b) Electronic
(c) Physical
Answer:
(b) Electronic

Question 4.
____________ is the institute which facilitates electronic holding of securities.
(a) Depository Participant
(b) Issuer
(c) Depository
Answer:
(c) Depository

Question 5.
There is no payment of ____________ when securities are demated.
(a) Octroi
(b) Wealth Tax
(c) Stamp Duty
Answer:
(c) Stamp Duty

Question 6.
Depository Act was passed in ____________
(a) 1919
(b) 1996
(c) 1999
Answer:
(b) 1996

Question 7.
India has a ____________ depository system.
(a) Sole
(b) Multi
(c) Single
Answer:
(b) Multi

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Secretarial Practice Solutions Chapter 9 Depository System

Question 8.
____________ is a constituent of depository system.
(a) Government
(b) Issuer
(c) Trust
Answer:
(b) Issuer

Question 9.
____________ is the oldest depository in India.
(a) Dow Jones
(b) NSDL
(c) CDSL
Answer:
(b) NSDL

Question 10.
Demat account is opened by ____________
(a) Beneficial owner
(b) CDSL
(c) SEBI
Answer:
(a) Beneficial owner

Question 11.
Demated shares are ____________
(a) Non-transferable
(b) Fungible
(c) Bearer
Answer:
(b) Fungible

Question 12.
____________ is a unique code given to a security.
(a) IBM
(b) BBM
(c) ISIN
Answer:
(c) ISIN

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Secretarial Practice Solutions Chapter 9 Depository System

Question 13.
In India ISIN for corporate securities is allotted by ____________
(a) NSDL
(b) Central Government
(c) State Government
Answer:
(a) NSDL

Question 14.
____________ has to apply for ISIN.
(a) Company
(b) Depository Participant
(c) Depositors
Answer:
(a) Company

Question 15.
____________ has to pay charges to maintain Demat Account.
(a) Investor
(b) Issuer
(c) Depositor
Answer:
(a) Investor

Question 16.
NSDL is promoted by ____________
(a) NSE
(b) BSE
(c) FTSE
Answer:
(a) NSE

Question 17.
CDSL is promoted by ____________
(a) NSE
(b) BSE
(c) FTSE
Answer:
(b) BSE

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Secretarial Practice Solutions Chapter 9 Depository System

1B. Match the pairs.

Question 1.

Group ‘A’ Group ‘B’
(a) Bad delivery (1) 1956
(b) Depository Act (2) A 12 digits number code
(c) ISIN (3) Connects Government and Bank
(d) Depository Participant (4) Second Depository in India
(e) CDSL (5) The issuer company
(f) Depository (6) Problem faced in physical mode
(g) Beneficial owner (7) A 10 digits number/code
(8) Connect depository and investor
(9) First depository in the world
(10) Custodian of securities in electronic form
(11) Problem faced in electronic mode
(12) 1996
(13) Government organization
(14) The investor

Answer:

Group ‘A’ Group ‘B’
(a) Bad delivery (6) Problem faced in physical mode
(b) Depository Act (12) 1996
(c) ISIN (2) A 12 digits number code
(d) Depository Participant (8) Connect depository and investor
(e) CDSL (4) Second Depository in India
(f) Depository (10) Custodian of securities in electronic form
(g) Beneficial owner (14) The investor

1C. Write a word or a term or a phrase that can substitute each of the following statements.

Question 1.
This mode of holding securities may result in loss and theft of certificates.
Answer:
Physical mode of securities

Question 2.
The organization holds the securities in electronic mode.
Answer:
Depository

Question 3.
This system eliminates storing of certificates.
Answer:
Depository system

Question 4.
This system allows faster and easier transfer of securities.
Answer:
Depository system

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Secretarial Practice Solutions Chapter 9 Depository System

Question 5.
The oldest Depository of India.
Answer:
NSDL (National Security Depository limited)

Question 6.
The country where the Depository system started for the first time.
Answer:
Germany

Question 7.
The registered owner of securities.
Answer:
Beneficial Owner

Question 8.
The agent of the Depository.
Answer:
Depository Participant

Question 9.
This process converts securities into an electronic form from a physical form.
Answer:
Dematerialization

Question 10.
This process converts securities into physical form from electronic form.
Answer:
Rematerialization

Question 11.
This means securities are without distinctive identity numbers.
Answer:
Fungibility

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Secretarial Practice Solutions Chapter 9 Depository System

Question 12.
This is the unique code for security given in the Depository system.
Answer:
International Securities Identification Number

1D. State whether the following statements are true or false.

Question 1.
The physical mode of holding Securities is risky.
Answer:
True

Question 2.
Allotment of Securities takes a longer time when in physical mode.
Answer:
True

Question 3.
Transfer of Securities is easier in electronic mode.
Answer:
True

Question 4.
Bad delivery is likely in the Depository system.
Answer:
False

Question 5.
The depository system began in the USA for the first time in the world.
Answer:
False

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Secretarial Practice Solutions Chapter 9 Depository System

Question 6.
India has a multi-depository system.
Answer:
True

Question 7.
The depository system is very similar to the banking system.
Answer:
True

Question 8.
DP is a constituent of the Depository system.
Answer:
True

Question 9.
DP is an Agent of the Depository.
Answer:
True

Question 10.
A bank can work as a DP.
Answer:
True

Question 11.
DRF is required for conversion from physical to electronic.
Answer:
True

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Secretarial Practice Solutions Chapter 9 Depository System

Question 12.
ISIN is a unique code given to the specific Securities.
Answer:
True

1E. Find the odd one.

Question 1.
Elimination of storage of certificates, theft of certificates, torn certificates
Answer:
Elimination of storage of certificates

Question 2.
NSDL, CDSL, NBFC
Answer:
NBFC

Question 3.
Depository, DP, RBI
Answer:
RBI

Question 4.
DP, BO, State Government
Answer:
State government

Question 5.
Issuer, BO, Central Government
Answer:
Central government

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Secretarial Practice Solutions Chapter 9 Depository System

Question 6.
DRF, RRF, PPF
Answer:
PPF

1F. Complete the sentences.

Question 1.
Central location for keeping Securities in demated form is ____________
Answer:
Depository

Question 2.
Freezing of debit/credit of Securities is possible in ____________
Answer:
Dematerialized Securities

Question 3.
First Depository of the world started in the year ____________
Answer:
1947

Question 4.
The Indian Depository Act was passed in the year ____________
Answer:
1996

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Secretarial Practice Solutions Chapter 9 Depository System

Question 5.
Link between Depository and investor is ____________
Answer:
Depository participant

Question 6.
Account of Securities of the investor is maintained by ____________
Answer:
Depository Participant

Question 7.
The process which converts physical Securities in electronic form is ____________
Answer:
Dematerialization

Question 8.
The process which converts digital Securities in physical form is ____________
Answer:
Rematerialization

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Secretarial Practice Solutions Chapter 9 Depository System

Question 9.
The issuer company must register with ____________
Answer:
Depository

Question 10.
The unique code identifying a security is ____________
Answer:
(ISIN) International Securities Identification Number

Question 11.
The first Depository of India is ____________
Answer:
NSDL (National Security Depository Limited)

1G. Select the correct option from the bracket.

Question (I).

Group ‘A’ Group ‘B’
(a) Dematerialization (1) ………………..
(b) …………………….. (2) DP
(c) First Depository of world (3) …………………
(d) CDSL (4) ………………..

(1999, Agent of Depository, Germany, Physical to electronic)
Answer:

Group ‘A’ Group ‘B’
(a) Dematerialization (1) Physical to Electronic
(b) Agent of Depository (2) DP
(c) First Depository of world (3) Germany
(d) CDSL (4) 1999

Question (II).

Group ‘A’ Group ‘B’
(a) First Depository in India (1) …………………………
(b) …………………….. (2) Rematerialisation
(c) Fungibility (3) …………………………
(d) …………………… (4) ISIN

(12 digital code, NSDL, Electronic to physical, No distinctive number)
Answer:

Group ‘A’ Group ‘B’
(a) First Depository in India (1) NSDL
(b) Electronic to Physical (2) Rematerialisation
(c) Fungibility (3) No distinctive number
(d) 12 digital code (4) ISIN

1H. Answer in one sentence.

Question 1.
What is the Depository system?
Answer:
A depository system is a system where Securities are held in electronic form.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Secretarial Practice Solutions Chapter 9 Depository System

Question 2.
Give examples of actions termed as corporate action.
Answer:
Payment of dividend, issue of Bonus Shares, offering of right Shares, Early Redemption of Debentures, Mergers and Acquisitions, etc.

Question 3.
When was Depository Act passed in India?
Answer:
Depository Act was passed in India in the year 1996.

Question 4.
What is a DP?
Answer:
DP means Depository participant, who is an agent of Depository.

Question 5.
What is Dematerialisation?
Answer:
Dematerialization is the process of converting physical Securities into electronic.

Question 6.
What is Rematerialization?
Answer:
Rematerialization is the process of converting electronic Securities into physical.

Question 7.
What is ISIN?
Answer:
ISIN is the unique code given to the specific Securities of the company. ISIN refers to ‘International Securities Identification Number’.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Secretarial Practice Solutions Chapter 9 Depository System

Question 8.
Name the Depositories in India?
Answer:

  • National Security Depository Limited (NSDL)
  • Central Depository Services Limited (CDSL)

1I. Correct the underlined words and rewrite the following sentences.

Question 1.
The electronic mode of holding Securities is risky.
Answer:
The physical mode of holding Securities is risky.

Question 2.
Allotment and Transfer of Securities are time-consuming in electronic mode.
Answer:
Allotment and Transfer of Securities are time-consuming in physical mode.

Question 3.
Banking system leads to a script less capital market.
Answer:
Depository system leads to a scriptless capital market.

Question 4.
Storage of certificates is not required in the physical mode of holding.
Answer:
Storage of certificates is not required in the electronic mode of holding.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Secretarial Practice Solutions Chapter 9 Depository System

Question 5.
India has a single Depository system.
Answer:
India has a multi Depository system.

Question 6.
Depository participant in India has to register under the Partnership Act.
Answer:
Depository participant in India has to register under the Depository Act.

Question 7.
Demat accounts are opened and maintained by the Depository.
Answer:
Demat accounts are opened and maintained by the Depository Participant.

Question 8.
Securities are fungible in physical mode.
Answer:
Securities are fungible in electronic mode.

Question 9.
ISIN is a code given to a company.
Answer:
ISIN is a code given to the security of a company.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Secretarial Practice Solutions Chapter 9 Depository System

Question 10.
ISIN of Indian government Securities is issued by NSDL.
Answer:
ISIN of Indian government Securities is issued by RBI.

1J. Arrange in proper order.

Question 1.
(a) Gets statement of Account
(b) Open Demat Account
(c) Submit DRF
Answer:
(a) Submit DRF
(b) Open Demat Account
(c) Gets statement of Account

Question 2.
(a) Investor (BO) submits an application for Securities to the issuer company
(b) Depository intimates the DP about crediting Bo’s Account
(c) Issuer company gives details of allotment to Depository.
Answer:
(a) Investor (BO) submits an application for Securities to the issuer company
(b) Issuer company gives details of allotment to Depository
(c) Issuer company gives details of allotment to Depository

2. Explain the following terms/concepts.

Question 1.
Depository System
Answer:

  • In the Depository system, securities are held in electronic form.
  • The transfer and settlement of securities are done electronically.
  • The Depository System maintains accounts of the shareholder, enables transfer, collects dividends, bonus shares, etc. on behalf of the shareholder.
  • This system is also called a scriptless trading system.
  • It keeps the securities safe. It offers scope for paperless trading by using state-of-art technology.

Question 2.
Dematerialization
Answer:

  • Dematerialization is a process whereby a client can get physical certificates converted into electronic mode.
  • For this client has to surrender the certificates along with the Demat Request Form (DRF) to the DP.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Secretarial Practice Solutions Chapter 9 Depository System

Question 3.
Rematerialization

  • Rematerialization is the process whereby a client can get his electronic holdings of securities converted into physical certificates.
  • For this client has to give a written request in the form of Remat Request Form (RRF) to the DP.

Question 4.
Fungibility
Answer:

  • Fungibility means the state of being interchangeable. Securities issued by the same company of the same class have the same value no matter who owns them.
  • The securities held in electronic form are fungible which means they don’t have distinctive numbers.

Question 5.
ISIN
Answer:

  • ISIN is a standard numbering system that is accepted globally.
  • ISIN consists of a 12 (twelve) digit alpha-numeric code which is divided into 3 (Three) parts.
  • The company has to apply for ISIN for its securities with documents like a prospectus.

3. Study the following case/situation and express your opinion.

1. Mr. Z holds 100 shares of peculiar Co. Ltd. In physical mode and wishes to convert the same in electronic mode:

Question (a).
Mr. Z holds a savings bank account with CFDH Bank Ltd. Can he deposit his shares in this account for Demat?
Answer:
No. He can’t, as it is a savings bank account.

Question (b).
What type of account is needed for the same?
Answer:
For holding electronic securities, he needs to open a Demat A/c with the Depository Participant (DP).

Question (c).
Is it the RBI that will be the custodian of shares of Mr. Z after demating?
Answer:
No. RBI won’t be the custodian. After demating concerned ‘Depository’ (NSDL/CDSL) will be the custodian of the shares of Mr. Z.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Secretarial Practice Solutions Chapter 9 Depository System

2. Mr. R holds 100 shares of Peculiar Co. Ltd. In Demat mode.

Question (a).
He wants to transfer one share each to his wife, daughter, and son. Can he do so?
Answer:
Yes, Mr. R can do so, as under dematerialized securities market lot is of one share.

Question (b).
Does he need to submit DRF or DIS if he wants to transfer his shares?
Answer:
He needs to submit DIS (Delivery Instruction Slip) if he wants to transfer his shares.

Question (c).
Can he nominate his wife in his Demat account?
Answer:
Yes. Mr. R can nominate his wife for the Demat account.

3. Mrs. Z wishes to open a Demat account in her name.

Question (a).
Can she open the account going to the Mumbai office of NSDL?
Answer:
No, Mrs. 2 cannot go directly to the Mumbai office of NSDL.

Question (b).
Is she required to pay for the opening of the account and its maintenance?
Answer:
Yes, she is required to pay for the opening of the account and its maintenance.

Question (c).
Does she have to send the shares to the respective company for demating?
Answer:
Yes, she has to send her original share certificate through Depository Participant to the company.

4. Mr. L wants to demat his 25 shares of Peculiar Co. Ltd bearing certificate no 100 and distinctive no 76-100.

Question (a).
Which form is he required to fill as a written request to the DP?
Answer:
Mr. L is required to fill Demat Request Form (DRF) as a written request to DP.

Question (b).
Does he have to fill instrument of transfer if he wishes to transfer the same after demat?
Answer:
No, he needs to fill instrument of transfer after opening Demat A/c.

Question (c).
Does he have to quote certificate no. and distinctive no. if he wishes to transfer his shares after it is in Demat form?
Answer:
No, Mr. L need not quote certificate no. and distinctive no. if he wishes to transfer his shares after it is in Demat form.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Secretarial Practice Solutions Chapter 9 Depository System

5. Mr. S. holds 50 shares of Peculiar Co. Ltd in Demat form. The company has declared a dividend of Rs 5. Per-share and Bonus of 1 : 1 to its shareholders.

Question (a).
How will Mr. S get his dividend?
Answer:
Mr. S will get his dividend credited directly to his Demat A/c.

Question (b).
Will he get a Bonus share in Physical or Demat?
Answer:
He will get Bonus Share in his Demat A/c.

Question (c).
Who is entitled to dividend and Bonus: Mr. S or the depository? (NSDL in this case).
Answer:
Mr. S is entitled to dividends and Bonuses through the depository services.

4. Distinguish between the following.

Question 1.
Dematerialization and Rematerialization.
Answer:

Points Dematerialization Rematerialization
1. Meaning Conversion of physical securities into electronic form is known as ‘Dematerialization’ Conversion of electronic securities into physical form is known as ‘Rematerialization’
2. Conversion Securities in physical/paper form are converted into electronic form The electronic form of securities are converted into physical form
3. Form Used ‘Demat Request Form (DRF) is submitted by the investor to the DP ‘Remat Request Form’ (RRF) is submitted by the investor to the DP
4. Process It is an initial process It is a reverse process
5. Function/Sequence It is a primary and principal function of the depository It is a secondary and supporting function of the depository
6. Distinctive numbers Demat securities have no distinctive numbers Remat securities will have certificates and distinctive numbers issued by the company
7. Securities Maintenance Authority The depository is the custodian of securities and records The issuing company keeps the record. The investor also maintains the record
8. Time Consumed It is an easy and time-saving process It is a complex and time-consuming process

5. Answer in brief.

Question 1.
Explain the disadvantages of the physical mode of holding securities.
Answer:
Securities mean shares, debentures, bonds, units of mutual funds, securities are held in physical form or paper form. Following are the problems/disadvantages of holding the securities in electronic form:
(i) Risk factor:
Paper certificates can be lost, damaged, torn, stolen, or misplaced during transit, etc.

(ii) Efforts in Duplicating:
If the original certificate is lost it becomes difficult to obtain duplicate certificates. It consumes time, effort, and money.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Secretarial Practice Solutions Chapter 9 Depository System

(iii) Delay in the allotment:
Allotment of new securities in physical form requires a longer time.

(iv) Delay in Transfer and Transmission:
Handling and recording physical certificates take a lot of time in the transfer and transmission of securities.

(v) Risk of Bad Delivery:
Buying and selling securities can create problems if the certificates are torn, forged, etc.

Question 2.
Explain any four advantages of the Depository system to investors.
Answer:
Investor refers to the Beneficial Owner, the one who invests in the company’s securities.
Advantages of Depository System to the Investor are as follows:
(i) No Risk:
Risks related to physical certificates like delays, loss of certificates, theft, mutilation, bad deliveries, etc. are totally eliminated.

(ii) Safety of Investment:
The safest and secure way of holding securities is in the form of DEMAT. It is controlled under Depositories Act and monitored by SEBI. For e.g. If we don’t want to deal in securities, for the time being, we can freeze the account instructing DP to avoid unexpected debit or credit.

(iii) Easy Transfer of Shares:

  • There is no need of filling transfer form and submitting documents.
  • Stamp duty is not applicable in this process.
  • Cash realization and security transfer take place very fast.

(iv) Updated information:
The investor receives updated information about his transactions and holdings from DP and also sometimes from Depository.

(v) Loan against securities:
An investor can raise a loan from the banks against the security of Dematerialized securities.

(vi) No ‘Lots’:
The lot system has been abolished. The market lot is one share for dematerialized securities.

(vii) Nomination Facility:
Nomination Facility is allowed under the Depository system. In the event of the death of the investor, the process becomes simple.

(viii) Automatic Credit:
The investor’s account is automatically credited or debited by the company. This is called ‘Corporate Action.’
For e.g. Payment of dividend, Bonus Issue, Right Issue, Redemption, etc.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Secretarial Practice Solutions Chapter 9 Depository System

Question 3.
Explain any four advantages of the Depository system to the company.
Answer:
Benefits/Advantages of Depository System:
(A) Investors:
(i) Safety:
A safe and secure way of holding securities is in electronic form/mode. The depository system is monitored by SEBI. The Investor can keep his account in a ‘Freeze/Lock’ mode to avoid/prevent unexpected debit or credit or both by giving instructions to the DP.

(ii) Easy Transfer of Shares:
These securities can be easily transferred in electronic mode. Filling out the transfer form and uploading the documents can be easily done online. It is a time and efforts saving process. No stamp duty is levied on the depository system.

(iii) Update and Intimation:
The investor can check his status of holding securities at any time. Depository Participant provides investors with his statement of accounts periodically.

(iv) Automatic Credit:
Under, the depository system the investor’s account is automatically credited/debited. This credit or debit of accounts is usually in case of Payment of Dividend, Issue of Bonus Shares, Offering of Rights Shares, Early Redemption of Debentures, Mergers, and Acquisitions, etc.

(B) Companies:
(i) Up-to-date Information:
The depository system enables the company to maintain the information of the investors holding. It also helps the company to keep updated information about its shareholding pattern. The company is able to know the particulars of beneficial owners and their holdings periodically.

(ii) Reduction in costs and efforts:
Due to the depository system, maintaining the documents physically, the printing of certificates has saved a lot of time and cost.

(iii) Better Relationships:
The transfer process under the depository system is prompt and free from defects. So, complaints against the company by an investor are avoided in this regard. This helps the company build a good corporate image.

(iv) International Investment:
Paperless trading is a boon for the company management as it provides better and quicker services to the investors staying within the country and abroad. This attracts investment from abroad.

Question 4.
Explain Depository as a constituent of Depository System.
Answer:

  • The depository is a company registered under the Companies Act, to deal in securities.
  • It holds the securities in electronic form.
  • It is responsible for safeguarding the investor’s securities and preventing any manipulation of records and transactions.
  • There is no direct access of investors with the Depository.
  • It works as a link between the company and investors.
  • Statement of accounts is provided to the investor periodically.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Secretarial Practice Solutions Chapter 9 Depository System

Question 5.
Explain DP as the constituent of the Depository System.
Answer:

  • Depository Participant acts as a link between the Depository and the Investor. In other words, it is an agent of the depository.
  • DP is registered under the SEBI Act. It enjoys rights and obligations as specified under SEBI Regulations of 1996.
  • It is an intermediary appointed by Depository.
  • DP directly deals with customers and sends a statement of accounts periodically.
  • The DP has a unique number for identification.
  • Banks, Financial Institutions, Stock Brokers, etc. can function as Depository Participants.
  • Thus, it is rightly justified that DP is an important constituent of the Depository system.

6. Justify the following statements.

Question 1.
Electronic holding of securities is safer than physical holding.
Answer:

  • Electronic holding of securities means holding the securities in dematerialized form.
  • Conversion of physical certificates into electronic form is known as ‘Dematerialization’.
  • Holding securities in electronic form eliminates a huge volume of paperwork.
  • The use of technology facilitates paperless trading which eliminates storage and handling of certificates. It also helps in reducing costs and efforts.
  • There is no risk of getting lost, damaged, torn, stolen, misplaced during transit, etc.
  • Delay in transfer and allotment of securities is also avoided.
  • Thus, it is rightly justified that, electronic holding of securities is safer than physical holding.

Question 2.
Depository provides easy and quicker transfer of shares.
Answer:

  • Under the Depository system, securities are held in electronic form.
  • Not only the transfer and settlement of securities are done electronically but it also maintains the accounts of the shareholder, collects dividends, bonus shares, etc. on behalf of the shareholder.
  • Depository Participant acts as a link between the Depository and the Investor.
  • No stamp duty is levied on the depository system.
  • Processing time in the transfer of securities is reduced and neither the securities nor the cash is held up for an unnecessarily long time.
  • Hence it is also called a “Scripless trading system”. Thus, it is rightly justified that the Depository provides easy and quicker transfer of shares.

Question 3.
Depository System results in reduced time, cost and efforts.
Answer:

  • The depository System has a very important role to play in the successful functioning of the Capital market.
  • Under Depository System, securities are held in electronic form.
  • The transfer and settlement of securities are done electronically.
  • The Depository system maintains accounts of the shareholder, enables transfer, collects dividends, bonus shares, etc. on behalf of the shareholder.
  • It eliminates a huge volume of paperwork, storage, and handling of physical certificates.
  • Thus, it is rightly justified that, Depository system results in reduced time, cost and efforts.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Secretarial Practice Solutions Chapter 9 Depository System

Question 4.
The depository system is very similar to the Banking system.
Answer:

  • The depository system is similar to the Banking system in many aspects.
  • Depository keeps the securities safe, just like the bank keeps the money of the account holder safe.
  • In banks, funds are held in accounts having unique numbers. Similarly, securities are held in accounts having unique IDs.
  • There is no physical handling of money in the bank. Similarly, there is no physical handling of securities by the depository.
  • Bank facilitates the transfer of funds between accounts. Depository facilitates the transfer of securities between accounts.
  • Thus, it is rightly justified that the Depository system is very similar to the Banking system.

Question 5.
DP is an important constituent of the Depository system.
Answer:

  • Depository Participant acts as a link between the Depository and the Investor. In other words, it is an agent of the depository.
  • DP is registered under the SEBI Act. It enjoys rights and obligations as specified under SEBI Regulations of 1996.
  • It is an intermediary appointed by Depository.
  • DP directly deals with customers and sends a statement of accounts periodically.
  • The DP has a unique number for identification.
  • Banks, Financial Institutions, Stock Brokers, etc. can function as Depository Participants.
  • Thus, it is rightly justified that DP is an important constituent of the Depository system.

Question 6.
Depository system allows both: Physical to electronic and electronic to physical conversion.
Answer:

  • Under the Depository system, physical certificates can be converted into electronic ones known as ‘Dematerialization’.
  • Similarly, the conversion of electronic securities into physical certificates is known as ‘Rematerialization’.
  • Due to Dematerialization transfer of securities takes place fast and transactions are also settled immediately. Whereas in Rematerialization, settlement of transactions in the physical system takes more time.
  • In Rematerialization, storing and handling physical certificates is more time-consuming. Whereas in dematerialization, there is no handling of certificates.
  • There are chances of certificates getting lost, damaged, torn, stolen, misplaced during transit, etc.
  • In this technological world, Demat securities are more preferred over Rematerialized securities.
  • Thus, it is rightly justified that the Depository system allows both: Physical to electronic and electronic to physical conversion.

Question 7.
ISIN is a necessary component of Demat.
Answer:

  • International Securities Identification Number (ISIN) is a code that uniquely identifies a specific securities issue.
  • ISINs are allotted by that country’s NNA (National Numbering Agency).
  • ISIN is a standard numbering system that is accepted globally.
  • The ISIN’s structure is currently defined by the International Organization of Standardization (ISO).
  • ISIN consists of a 12 (twelve) digit alpha-numeric code which is divided into 3 (three) parts.
  • The company has to apply for ISIN for its securities with documents like a prospectus.
  • In India, issuing ISIN to securities is assigned by SEBI to NSDL (for Demat shares). SEBI works as NNA in India.
  • Thus, from the above points, it is rightly justified that ISIN is a necessary component of Demat.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Secretarial Practice Solutions Chapter 9 Depository System

7. Answer the following.

Question 1.
What is Depository System? Explain its advantages?
Answer:
The depository system came into existence in the year 1996. It is a system where securities are held in electronic form. It also maintains accounts of the shareholder, enables transfer, collects dividends, bonus shares, etc. on behalf of the shareholder. In other words, it is also called a scriptless trading system.

Benefits/Advantages of Depository System:
(A) Investors:
(i) Safety:
A safe and secure way of holding securities is in electronic form/mode. The depository system is monitored by SEBI. The Investor can keep his account in a ‘Freeze/Lock’ mode to avoid/ prevent unexpected debit or credit or both by giving instructions to the DP.

(ii) Easy Transfer of Shares:
These securities can be easily transferred in electronic mode. Filling out transfer forms and uploading the documents can be easily done online. It is a time and efforts saving process. No stamp duty is levied on the depository system.

(iii) Update and Intimation:
The investor can check his status of holding securities at any time. Depository Participant provides investors with his statement of accounts periodically.

(iv) Automatic Credit:
Under, the depository system the investor’s account is automatically credited/debited. This credit or debit of accounts is usually in case of Payment of Dividend, Issue of Bonus Shares, Offering of Rights Shares, Early Redemption of Debentures, Mergers, and Acquisitions, etc.

(B) Companies:
(i) Up-to-date Information:
The depository system enables the company to maintain the information of the investors holding. It also helps the company to keep updated information about its shareholding pattern. The company is able to know the particulars of beneficial owners and their holdings periodically.

(ii) Reduction in costs and efforts:
Due to the depository system, maintaining the documents physically, the printing of certificates has saved a lot of time and cost.

(iii) Better Relationships:
The transfer process under the depository system is prompt and free from defects. So, complaints against the company by an investor is avoided in this regard. This helps the company build a good corporate image.

(iv) International Investment:
Paperless trading is a boon for the company management as it provides better and quicker services to the investors staying within the country and abroad. This attracts investment from abroad.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Secretarial Practice Solutions Chapter 9 Depository System

Question 2.
Explain the constituents of the depository system.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Secretarial Practice Solutions Chapter 9 Depository System 7 Q2

(i) Depository:

  • Depository is an organization or a system where securities/shares are held in electric form.
  • Depository transfers securities/shares between accounts on the instruction of the account holders.
  • Depository contacts the customer through a depository participant.
  • Transfer of shares is made through mere computerized book-entry in the depository.
  • This becomes possible because shares are dematerialized.
  • Only those securities which are held in the form of the share certificate are one’s names can be dematerialized.
  • At present, there are two depositories. They are:
    • National Securities Depository Limited (NSDL)
    • Central Depository Services Limited (CDSL).

(ii) Depository Participant:

  • The depository participant is the representative of the depository.
  • Depository participant acts as an intermediary between investors and depositories.
  • The depository participants have an identity number for identification.
  • It has to maintain accounts of securities of each investor.
  • Depository participant gives intimation about holdings from time to time by sending a statement of holding.
  • According to SEBI guidelines financial institutions, banks, stockbrokers can act as a depository participant.

(iii) Beneficial Owner:

  • An investor is known as ‘Beneficial Owner’ on whose name Demat account is opened.
  • He enjoys the rights and benefits of members such as getting dividends, getting bonus shares, to vote at meetings.
  • He is allotted an account number where securities are held.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Secretarial Practice Solutions Chapter 9 Depository System

(iv) Issuer Company:

  • It is a company that makes an issue of securities.
  • It must get registered with the depository.

Maharashtra Board OCM 12th Commerce Solutions Chapter 4 Business Services

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board Organisation of Commerce and Management 12th Textbook Solutions Chapter 4 Business Services Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 12th Organisation of Commerce and Management Solutions Chapter 4 Business Services

1. (A) Select the correct option and rewrite the sentence.

Question 1.
Door to door service is provided by …………….. transport.
(a) railway
(b) road
(c) air
Answer:
(b) road

Question 2.
…………….. creates time utility.
(a) Warehouse
(b) Transport
(c) Communication
Answer:
(a) Warehouse

Maharashtra Board OCM 12th Commerce Solutions Chapter 8 Marketing

Question 3.
…………….. warehouses provide facilities for perishable commodities.
(a) Bonded
(b) Cold storage
(c) Government
Answer:
(b) Cold storage

Question 4.
……………. policy covers all types of risks of a vessel while it is anchored at the port for a particular period of time.
(a) Port risk
(b) Voyage
(c) Floating
Answer:
(a) Port risk

Question 5.
Principle of …………….. is not applicable to life insurance.
(a) insurable interest
(b) utmost good faith
(c) indemnity
Answer:
(c) indemnity

1. (B) Match the pairs.

Question 1.

Group A Group B
(A) Air Transport (1) Time utility
(B) Warehousing (2) Intangible in nature
(C) Money remittance (3) Fastest mode of transport
(D)  Pipeline Transport (4) April,2019
(E) Business Service (5) Western Union Money Transfer
(6) Fixed deposit account
(7) Petroleum and gas
(8) Tangible
(9) Place utility
(10)  Savings account

Answer:

Group A Group B
(A) Air Transport (3) Fastest mode of transport
(B) Warehousing (1) Time utility
(C) Money remittance (5) Western Union Money Transfer
(D)  Pipeline Transport (7) Petroleum and gas
(E) Business Service (2) Intangible in nature

1. (C) Give one word/phrase/term for the following sentence.

Question 1.
These warehouses are owned, managed and controlled by central and state governments or public authorities.
Answer:
government warehouse

Question 2.
An art of exchanging ideas, facts, information etc. from one person or entity to another.
Answer:
Communication

Question 3.
A rail system in which the track consists of a single rail or a beam.
Answer:
monorail

Question 4.
A transport system used to carry petroleum and gases.
Answer:
pipeline transport

Question 5.
A ministry who looks after development of surface transport throughout country.
Answer:
Ministry of Road Transport and Highways

1. (D) State whether following statements are true or false.

Question 1.
Business services are important for the growth of business.
Answer:
True

Question 2.
Current Account is opened by salaried persons.
Answer:
False

Question 3.
NEFT stands for National Electric Fund Transfer.
Answer:
False

Question 4.
Air transport is cheapest mode of transport.
Answer:
False

Question 5.
The Internet is the global system of interconnected computer networks that use the internet protocol suite to link devices worldwide.
Answer:
True

1. (E) Find the odd one.

Question 1.
Primary credit co-operative society, state co-operative bank, district co-operative bank, exchange bank.
Answer:
exchange bank

Question 2.
NABARD, RBI, SIDBI, EXIM.
Answer:
RBI

Question 3.
Direct mail, Logistics post, Business post, Parcel
Answer:
Parcel

Question 4.
Endowment policy, Whole life policy, Money back policy, Blanket policy.
Answer:
Blanket policy.

1. (F) Complete the sentence.

Question 1.
The term bank comes from the French word …………….. .
Answer:
Banco

Question 2.
…………….. warehouses provide facilities for perishable commodities
Answer:
Cold storage

Question 3.
In ……………… policy, several ships belonging to one owner are insured under the same policy.
Answer:
fleet

Question 4.
…………….. banking refers to the use of banking services with the help of mobile phones.
Answer:
Mobile

1. (G) Select the correct option and complete the following table.

(RTGS, SIDBI, apex financial institution in banking industry of country, recurring deposit, long term loans)

Group A Group B
A. …………… fund transfer on real time and gross basis
B. loans to meet long term capital requirements ……………
C. …………… Account  operated  by  salaried  and businessmen both.
D. Central bank ……………
E. …………… Principal financial institution for MSMEs

Answer:

Group A Group B
A. RTGS fund transfer on real time and gross basis
B. loans to meet long term capital requirements long term loans
C. Recurring Deposit Account  operated  by  salaried  and businessmen both.
D. Central bank apex financial institution in banking industry of country
E. SIDBI Principal financial institution for MSMEs

1. (H) Answer in one sentence

Question 1.
What is debit card?
Answer:
A debit card is a card which is used by the cardholders to make purchases and avail of services at different places without making cash payment but payment is deducted from or debited to the account of the debit cardholders immediately.

Question 2.
What is ‘subject matter’ In insurance?
Answer:
‘Subject matter’ In Insurance refers to life, property, cargo or ship, etc. which is Insured against whose insurance policy Is taken.

Maharashtra Board OCM 12th Commerce Solutions Chapter 8 Marketing

Question 3.
What is government warehouse?
Answer:
The warehouses which are owned. managed and controlled by the Central and State Governments or public authorities to assist small farmers, businessmen, traders in storing goods at nominal charges are called government Warehouses.

Question 4.
What is air transport?
Answer:
The mode of transport which is operated above the surface of the earth and carries goods and passengers through airways by using different aircrafts Is called air transport.

Question 5.
What is communication?
Answer:
The term ‘communication’ means any exchange of Ideas, facts, information, messages. feelings and emotions among two or more persons in a way that they share common understanding about it.

1. (I) Correct the underlined word and rewrite the following sentences.

Question 1.
Overdraft facility is available for savings bank account holder.
Answer:
Current

Question 2.
Services are tangible in nature.
Answer:
Intangible

Question 3.
Insurance helps to maximize the risks in the business.
Answer:
Minimise

Question 4.
The foreign bank is the apex financial institution in banking industry in the country.
Answer:
Centrals

Question 5.
RTGS stands for Reasonable Time Gross Settlement.
Answer:
real

1. (J) Arrange in proper order.

Question 1.
Claim, Accident, Taking the policy, Compensation.
Answer:
Taking the policy, Accident, Claim, Compensation

Question 2.
Email, Inland letter, Courier
Answer:
Inland letter, Courier, E-mail

2. Explain the following terms/concepts.

Question 1.
Transport
Answer:
(1) Service or facility which creates physical movement of men, materials, goods. animals. etc. from one place (location) to another is called transport. Transportation can be defined as a means of carrying or transferring goods. people, animals, material. etc. from one place to another.

(2) Usually transportation is carried through various modes like land transport (i.e Railways and Roadways), water transport and air transport. It brings mobility both to human resources and physical resources. Transport plays key role in nations economy and economic development. After 1991, in India. development of infrastructure within the country has made progress at rapid rate and today there are different modes of transport operated in India. Transport helps in production. expands market, create place utility in goods and services, brings stability to prices, creates employment opportunities, improves standard of living of the people, provides help during emergency and facilitates economic development.

Question 2.
Communication
Answer:
(1) The term ‘communication’ means any interchange of ideas, messages, facts, information, feelings and emotions among two or more persons In a way that they share common understanding about it. It Is a process of giving away or passing on any information by any person to some other person with the help of some medium. Thus, receiver after receiving the message understands it in the desired form and acts accordingly.

(2) Means of communication consist of magazines, newspaper, post and telegraphs. telephone. Internet, e-mail, television, etc. Communication facilitates transmit business Information more quickly among the businessmen. The difficulty of distance is effectively solved by various means of communication. Effective communication facilitates the development and growth of domestic and international markets which bring prosperity to the country.

Maharashtra Board OCM 12th Commerce Solutions Chapter 8 Marketing

Question 3.
Banking
Answer:
(1) The term ‘Bank’ Is derived from the French word ‘Banco’ which means a ‘bench’. In olden days, moneylenders used to display coins and currencies on the tables or benches for the purpose of lending or exchanging. An organisation which is dealing with money is called bank. An institution offering certain financial services such as the safe keeping of money and lending money to needy people is called Bank.

(2) According to the Indian Banking Regulation Act, 1949, bankIng company means “any company which transacts the business of banking in India.” The word banking has defined further as “acceptingfor the purpose of lending or investment of deposits of money from the public repayable on demand or otherwise and withdrawable by cheques. drafts, order or otherwise.” Bank accepts deposits repayable on demand by cheques or drafts and lends or invests the surplus money as a part of normal business. It makes a profit by accepting deposits at a lower rate of Interest and lending money at a higher rate of Interest.

Question 4.
Insurance
Answer:
(1) Business involves various risks like accident, fire, theft, flood, cyclone, etc. It is very difficult for a trader to bear risks of loss. Similarly, human life is subject to various risks such as death by accident, premature death, etc. The specialised agency called insurance company has emerged to provide financial protection against the possible loss due to the happening of such events. Insurance company gives financial protection by charging certain amount as a premium. It. is a risk management, primarily meant to hedge or for compensating against the risk of a contingent or uncertain loss.

(2) Insurance is a contract between two parties whereby one of them (the insurer) agrees in return for a premium to indemnify the other (the insured) against a monetary loss that may be suffered by the other on the happening of some specified event. According to Insurance Act of 1938, “Insurance Is defined as, “A provision which a prudent man makes against inevitable contingencies”.

Question 5.
Warehousing
Answer:
(1) Warehousing means storing of goods in a godown to hold them in stock from the time of production or purchase till the time of their sale. It is generally used to denote all those activities which are concerned with the storage of goods in a godown or warehouse. One of the marketing processes or a group activity is to hold the goods in stock from the time of production till the time of consumption. When storage of goods is required to be arranged on a large scale In a specified manner, it is called warchousing’. Warehouse means a building in which especially retail goods are stored.

(2) Warehousing is defined as “an establishment for the storage of or accumulation of goocis.’ Warehousing gives protection to goods and helps businessmen to raise finance. It facilitates and provides space for grading. branding and processing. It creates time utility and help in price stabilisation of goods. Thus, warehousing implies a group of activities connected with the storing and preserving of stored goods from the time of their production or purchase till the Urne of their sale or consumption.

3. Study the following case/situation and express your opinion.

Question 1.
Ms. Harshali has started new business two years ago. Her customers are located in different parts of the country and hence they are directly depositing bill amount in her business account. At the same time she used to pay various payments from this account only.

(i) Identify Type of account maintained by Ms. Harshali.
(ii) Suggest any one modern way of money transfer to Ms.Harshali.
(iii) State any one facility she gets on her bank account?
Answer:
(i) Ms. Harshali is a businesswoman and hence she has maintained current account to suit the needs of her business.

(ii) NEFT which stands for National Electronic Funds Transfer is the one of the modern ways of transferring fund (money) from one branch to another branch or from one bank to another bank safely can be suggested to Ms. Harshall to transfer money.

(iii) Ms. Harshali gets overdraft facility on her current account.

Question 2.
Mr. Jagan is a salaried person. He wants to take policy for his two children which assures them protection as well as completes their financial needs once they become major by age.

(i) Suggest him a policy which can satisfy requirements of his children.
(ii) Who are beneficiaries of policy?
(iii) In above case which principle is involved?
Answer:
(i) Mr. Jagan. a salaried person should take “Child Insurance Policy” to satisfy the financial requirements of his children.
(ii) In child insurance policy, children of the insured person are the beneficiaries.
(iii) In the above case, principle of Insurable interest is involved.

Question 3.
Mr. Sharan is successful manufacturer. He is having production units at various locations. He is having multiple production units, he has large stock of raw material and finished goods. He is worried about safeguarding goods from any unwanted financial loss. He also requires to transfer raw material and finished goods from one unit to other but does not have any facility for that. He also requires funds for expansion.

(i) Name the service which will help him to safeguard goods from any damage?
(ii) Which service will help him to remove difficulty of place?
(iii) From which service sector will he get financial support?
Answer:
(i) Warehousing’ is the service that helps Mr. Sharan to safeguard his goods from any damage.
(ii) Transport service will help Mr. Sharan to remove the difficulty of place.
(iii) Mr. Sharan will get financial support from Banking sector.

Maharashtra Board OCM 12th Commerce Solutions Chapter 8 Marketing

Question 4.
Mr. Amit is a businessman. He has his own factories in Pune and Nashik. He lives in Pune with his wife and 2 daughters aged 5 and 8 years.

(i) Can Mr. Amit take a life insurance policy for his wife and 2 children?
(ii) Can Mr. Amit take a marine insurance policy for his factories?
(iii) Which type of insurance should Mr. Amit take for protecting his factories from loss due to fire?
Answer:
(i) Mr. Amit can take whole life policy or term insurance policy for his wife and child insurance policy or money back policy for his daughters.
(ii) Mr. Amit cannot take marine insurance policy for his factories.
(iii) Mr. Amit can take Floating Fire Insurance Policy for protecting his factories at Pune and Nashik.

4. Distinguish between.

Question 1.
Duty Paid Warehouse and Bonded Warehouse
Answer:

Duty Paid Warehouse Bonded Warehouse
1. Meaning Duty-paid warehouse is a warehouse which stocks on which duty is already paid. Bonded warehouse is the warehouse which stocks goods the goods on which duty is yet to be paid.
2. Location These warehouses are situated near dock area or port. These warehouses are situated within the dock area.
3. Markets Goods stored in duty-paid warehouses are meant mostly for the domestic markets. Goods stored in bonded warehouses are meant mostly for re-export.
4. Supervision These warehouses are free from the supervision of customs authority. However, they are controlled by port authority These warehouses are under the close supervision of customs authority.
5. Delivery Delivery of goods is given only after the payment of rent and service charges of the warehouse. Goods are held in bond and its delivery is given only after the payment of import duty.
6. Ownership This warehouse is owned and managed by the dock (public) authorities. This warehouse is owned by the dock or private authorities.

Question 2.
Central Bank and Commercial Bank
Answer:

Central Bank Commercial Bank
1. Meaning The central bank regulates money supply in the country by exercising control over the commercial banks. A commercial bank accepts deposits from the public, grant loans to businessmen and public.
2. PrInting and Currency The central bank is authorised to print currency notes. The commercial bank is not authorlsed to print currency notes.
3. Acceptance of deposits The central bank does not accept deposit from the public. The commercial bank accepts deposit from general public.
4. Loans The central bank provides loans and advances to banks and other financial institutions. The commercial bank grants loans and advances to businessmen, industry and people.
5. Ownership The central bank is owned and controlled by the Central government of the concerned country. The commercial banks can be owned and controlled by the government as well as private sector organisations.
6. Number There can be only one central bank for the whole country. There is a large network of different commercial banks in the country.

Question 3.
Road Transport and Air Transport
Answer:

Road Transport Air Transport
1. Speed Road Transport vehicles have limited speed particularly over long distances due to rough roads, hilly areas, traffic jams, observation of signaling system, road accidents, etc. Air transport has very high speed. It is fastest mode of transport. It is due to aerial route, no signaling system to observe, straight route, no disturbance in speed, etc.
2. Suitability It is suitable for short distances and for carrying perishable goods such as fruits, fish, vegetables, foodgrains and other consumer goods. Air transport is suitable to carry light, perishable and valuable goods to any part of the world.
3. Door-to-door service It provides door-to-door service. It reaches the goods at the doorsteps of the buyer. It cannot provide door to door services. It carries goods and passengers from one airport to other air port.
4. Cost It requires limited capital investment for construction of roads and their maintenance. It requires relatively huge capital investment in terms of construction of airport, aircraft, runways, air control towers and their maintenance.
5. Means of transport Road transport uses bullock carts, cycles, motor- cycles, autorickshaws, cars, tempos, trucks, buses, etc. Air transport uses aircraft, cargo planes, jets, helicopters, etc.
6. Accidents Chances of accidents are more due to poor road conditions and negligent drivers. Changes of accident are very less because maintenance and appointment of expert and trained pilots.

Question 4.
Life Insurance and Marine Insurance
Answer:

Life Insurance Marine Insurance
1. Meaning Life insurance is a contract whereby the insurance company in consideration of a premium, undertakes to pay a certain sum of money either on death of assured person or on maturity of policy whichever is earlier. Marine insurance is a contract of indemnity against loss or damage to cargo (goods) or ships arising due to perils of sea.
2. Who takes it? Life insurance policy is usually taken by an individual for his own life or for the benefit of his family members. Marine insurance policy is taken by importers, exporters and shipping companies.
3. Subject-matter In life insurance, the life of the insured person is a subject-matter. In marine insurance, goods lying in the ship, cargo and freight are the subject-matter.
4. Period Life insurance is usually a long term contract, usually more than ten years or even death. Marine insurance is usually for a short period which may range from one month to a year.
5. Principle of Indemnity The principle of indemnity is not applicable to life insurance contract because life of human being cannot be valued in terms of money for calculating actual loss. The principle of indemnity is applicable to marine insurance as insurance company indemnifies the financial loss to bring back insured in the same financial condition that he was before the event.
6. Insurable Interest In life insurance contract, insurable interest must exist at the time of contract. The insurable interest must exist at the time of the contract and also at the time of happening of the event.

Question 5.
Savings Account and Current Account
Answer:

Savings Account Current Account
1. Meaning A savings account is a type of bank account meant for any individual for safe keeping of his money and for making savings. A current account is a type of bank account meant for a businessman or a firm or commercial organisations for facilitating regular trading operations.
2. Facilities The facilities of overdraft and cash credit Eire not given to the saving accountholders. Overdraft and cash credit facilities are given to the current accountholders only.
3. Suitability Saving account is suitable for regular income earners and salaried or wage earners. Current account is suitable for traders, businessmen, commercial organisations and institutions.
4. Restrictions on withdrawal There are certain restrictions on the number of withdrawals and the amount to be withdrawn at a time. There are no restrictions on withdrawal of money from this account as long as there is balance in the account.
5. Interest Interest at low rate is credited monthly, quarterly, half-yearly and yearly basis in this account. No interest is paid in this account.
6. Documents The documents like passbook, balance on SMS, account statement, etc. are provide in this account. Banks provide monthly statement of account every month in this account.

Question 6.
Life Insurance and Fire Insurance
Answer:

Life Insurance Fire Insurance
1. Meaning Life insurance is a contract whereby the insurance company in consideration of a premium, undertakes to pay a certain sum of money either on death of assured person or on maturity of policy whichever is earlier. Fire insurance is a contract of indemnity against loss or damage to goods or property arising from fire or related events.
2. Who takes it? Life insurance policy is usually taken by an individual for his own life or for the benefit of his family members. Fire insurance policy is taken by individuals, property owners or businessmen for their goods and business properties.
3. Subject-matter In life insurance, the life of the insured person is a subject-matter. In fire insurance, the property, assets or goods of the insured is the subject-matter.
4. Period Life insurance is usually a long term contract, usually more than ten years or even death. Fire insurance contract is generally for one year or even for a lesser period.
5. Principle of indemnity The principle of indemnity is not applicable to life insurance contract because life of human being cannot be valued in terms of money for calculating actual loss. The principle of indemnity is applicable to fire insurance contract because the amount of loss of property can be calculated easily. The-amount of loss or the policy amount whichever is less is paid to the insured.
6. Insurable interest In life insurance contract, insurable interest must exist at the time of contract. In fire insurance contract, insurable interest must exist both at the time of taking policy and also at the time of event.

Maharashtra Board OCM 12th Commerce Solutions Chapter 8 Marketing

Question 7.
Road Transport and Rail Transport
Answer:

Road Transport Rail Transport
1. Meaning Road Transport vehicles have limited speed particularly over long distances due to rough roads, hilly areas, traffic jams, observation of signaling system, road accidents, etc. Rail transport operates at a high speed due to mechanical devices, straight railway tracks and absence of obstructions on the railway tracks.
2. Suitability It is suitable for short distances and for carrying perishable goods such as fruits, fish, vegetables, foodgrains and other consumer goods. It is suitable for carrying heavy and bulky goods such as machinery, cotton, coal, etc. for long distances.
3. Door to Door services It provides door-to-door services. It reaches the goods at the doorsteps of the buyer. It cannot provide door-to-door services. It carries goods and passengers from one railway station to another.
4. Carrying Capacity It has limited carrying capacity. It has large carrying capacity.
5. Cost of construction and maintenance It requires relatively less capital investment in terms of construction of roads and their maintenance. The cost of construction and maintenance of trains, railway tracks and stations is very high.
6. Transport charges Transport charges are not fixed but they are usually high due to increase in fuel charges. Transport charges are fixed according to the distance and they are relatively low.

Question 8.
Rail Transport and Air Transport
Answer:

Rail Transport Air Transport
1. Speed Railway transport has comparatively low speed. Air transport has very high speed. It is the fastest mode of transport.
2. Carrying capacity Its carrying capacity is very high. Its carrying capacity is comparatively limited.
3. Suitability It is more suitable to carry bulky and heavy goods over long distance. It is suitable to carry light, perishable and valuable goods to any part of the world.
4. Transport charges Transport charges are relatively low. Transport charges are very high.
5. Ownership It is owned only by public sector i.e. the government. It is owned by both public sector as well as private sector.
6. Means of transport It uses passenger trains and goods trains. It uses aircraft, jets, cargo planes, helicopters, etc.

Question 9.
Current Account and Fixed Deposit Account
Answer:

Current Account Fixed Deposit Account
1. Meaning A Current Account is a type of bank account under which there are no restrictions on depositing and withdrawing money. A Fixed Deposit Account is a type of bank account under which fixed amount is deposited for a fixed period of time.
2. Withdrawals There are no restrictions on withdrawal of money from this account as long as there is balance in the account. No withdrawal is permitted before the date of maturity. However, a certain amount by way of loan can be granted against the FDR.
3. Facilities Overdraft and cash credit facilities are given to the current account holders only. Overdraft and Cash credit facilities are not given to the fixed deposit account holders.
4. Rate of interest Generally no interest is paid on the balance standing in this account. Banks offer higher rates of interest. Longer the period, higher will be the rate of interest and vice versa.
5. Duration This account has no fixed duration. It may run as long as the accountholder desires. This account is run for a fixed period after which the amount is repaid along with interest thereon.
6. Receipt Bank provide statement of account at the end of every month to the current accountholders. A Fixed Deposit Receipt (FDR) is issued by the bank to the accountholder.

5. Answer in brief.

Question 1.
State four types of deposits.
Answer:
The different types of deposits are explained below:
(1) Fixed Deposits : Fixed deposit is a type bank account in which certain fixed amount is deposited and kept in the bank for certain fixed period of time bearing fixed interest rate. The rate of interest paid on fixed deposit is higher than the rate of interest paid on other types of deposits. This rate of interest varies with the deposit period. Interest may also be paid periodically or annually. On Premature withdrawal of deposit before maturity date lower rate of interest is given. The deposit holder gets Fixed Deposit Receipt (FDR) issued by the bank. Loan can be obtained against this FDR.

(2) Recurring deposit : Recurring deposit is an account where depositor is required to deposit certain fixed amount at regular interval say monthly for certain fixed period. On the date of maturity, depositor gets the total amount deposited and interest accrued on such deposit amount. Rate of interest paid is higher and varies according to period of time. The depositor is given pass j book to record the entries of deposits, ft is taken by salaried people and businessmen who have regular income.

(3) Demand deposit: The demand deposit is one in which deposited amount is repaid to the accountholder as and when demanded. The amount of money can be withdrawn by the accountholder from the bank by using withdrawal slips, cheques, ATM cards, online transfer, etc.

(4) Savings deposit : A bank account designed for the personal savings is called savings account. The main aim of this deposit account is to inculcate the regular habit of savings among the common people. This account is suitable for those people who have fixed and regular income like salaries, wages, etc. Although there is no restriction on the depositing of money but frequent withdrawals are not permitted by the bank. Interest on balance amount is credited in this account quarterly or half yearly. Pass book, cheque book, balance on SMS, account statement, etc. are provided to the accountholders to know the position of account.

Some banks provide to their accountholders flexi deposit facility which combines the advantages of savings account and fixed deposit account. In case of multiple option deposit account, the excess amount above certain predetermined limit gets automatically transferred from Savings Account to fixed deposit account. Under this type of account, if adequate fund is not available in savings account to honour the cheques, then the funds get transferred automatically from fixed deposit account to savings deposit account.

Question 2.
State four modes of transport.
Answer:
The four modes of transport are explained as follows:
(1) Road transport : Road transport is the oldest mode of transport. It means and includes various means of transport which move on the surface of the earth without the use of railway tracks. Roads are the means which connect people and places on the surface of the land. It provides connectivity on any terrain (land) in comparison to other modes of transport. The different types of vehicles plying on the road include bullock carts, cycles, motor-cycles, autorickshaws, cars, tempos, trucks, buses, etc. They are called means of road transport.

(2) Rail transport : The mode of transport which moves on the surface of the earth with the help of parallel railway tracks is called rail transport. In other words, transportation of goods and passengers over long distances on rail lines through trains is called rail transport. It is an important land transport system of our country. The services of railways are provided by Ministry of Railways. Indian Railways operate different types of trains such as passenger trains, mails, express and cargo or goods trains. Some popular trains run by Indian Railways are Rajdhani Express, Duronto Express, Shatabdi Express, Intercity Express, Vande Bharat Express, holiday special trains, etc. Some luxury trains like Palace on Wheels, Deccan Odyssey, Ramayana Express, Maharaja Express, etc. are run to promote domestic tourism business.

(3) Air transport: The mode of transport which is operated above the surface of the earth i.e., in the sky through airways is called air transport. It has recent origin. Air transport uses different air crafts such as passenger air crafts, cargo aircraft, helicopters, etc. to carry the goods and passengers through airways at distant places. As compared to other modes of transport, air transport has fastest speed. It does not provide door to door services. Air transport is convenient mode in hilly or mountainous areas where other modes of transport cannot reach. It is also suitable mode of transport in emergency situations like war, natural calamities, etc. Air transport is classified into domestic and international air transport. The different national and international private and public sector airways companies are giving services.

(4) Water transport: The mode of transport which is carried out on the surface of water is called water transport. It represents transport facilities in water. It is the cheapest mode of transport. Water transport carries passengers and goods to different places on water ways by using various means like boats, steamers, launches, ships, etc. Water transport can be sub-divided into two categories viz. inland water transport which carries goods and passengers within the country and ocean transport which carries goods and passengers on ocean, sea route. In India, the Ministry of Shipping takes care of development of ocean transport.

Maharashtra Board OCM 12th Commerce Solutions Chapter 8 Marketing

Question 3.
State four life insurance policies.
Answer:
The different types of life insurance policies are explained as follows:
(1) Whole Life Policy : Under this policy, whole life of a person is insured and that he is required to pay premium up to his death. The policy holder (assured) cannot get any benefits i.e. money from insurance policy till he is alive. After his death, the amount of the policy is paid to his nominee or to the legal heir. Such a policy is meant for making a provision for the dependents of the assured. The rate of premium is usually low.

(2) Endowment Insurance Policy : An endowment insurance policy is for a specific period and the amount of such a policy along with bonus is paid after the maturity to the assured himself or on the death of the assured to the nominee or his dependents whichever is earlier.

(3) Term Insurance Policy : This type of policy is issued for a specific period. Premium is very low, fixed and remains unchanged during the term of the policy. In case of untimely death of assured, the nominee or dependents are paid the benefit amount mentioned in the insurance policy.

(4) Annuity Policy : Under this policy, insured has to pay the premium in lump sum or in instalments over certain number of years. After that, a certain amount is paid to the assured ; regularly on monthly basis for fix period or up to his death. It is similar to pension payment scheme.

(5) Money back Policy : Under this policy, the policyholder is paid regular or pre-determined percentage of the sum assured after every 10 years or 5 years during life time of policy and also provided the benefit of full sum assured to the nominee or dependents in the event of untimely death of the assured. Usually money back policy is available for 12 years, 15 years, 20 years, 25 years, etc.

Question 4.
State any four features of business services.
Answer:
The features of business services are explained as follows:
(1) Intangibility : Business services are intangible in nature. This is because business services cannot be seen, touched and smelt. They are not physical or material product. For instance, the building of the insurance company can be seen but insurance services offered by such company cannot be seen. People can avail of the benefits of insurance services although they are intangible in nature. On account of intangibility, services cannot be demonstrated as like goods. Hence services providers have to provide quality services to create good impression on the customers.

(2) Inseparability: One of the important features of business service is that the service and service provider cannot be separated from each other. At the time of rendering the services to the customers, the presence of service provider is must, e.g. medical treatment given by doctor to patient. In the case of services, production and its use (consumption) take place simultaneously.

(3) Inconsistency : Business services are heterogeneous i.e. they are not identical or exactly similar in all cases. They may differ from one person to another and from one place to another although service provider remains same. In fact, business services are heterogeneous, e.g. the services of a salesman in a Mall may have good impact on one customer and may not be liked by another customer.

(4) Perishability : Business services are perishable in nature. Hence, they cannot be stocked. The production and consumption (use) of services cannot be separated because services cannot be stored for future consumption. Since business services are intangible and perishable, there can never be inventory of services. Unlike products services cannot be stored for future sale, e.g. vacant seats of a morning bus from Mumbai to Pune cannot be utilised for evening trip of the same bus.

(5) Non-transferability : Business services are non-transferable in nature. The ownership of business services cannot be exchanged. We can exchange the ownership of products but not of services. A lady goes to a beauty parlour and hires services of the beautician by paying the fees. The lady cannot buy the ownership as its ownership remains with the beautician. If she needs such services again, she has to go to the beauty parlour and pay the beautician again for her services.

(6) Consumer participation : The participation of consumer is important for services. The seller or service provider will not be able to provide its services in absence of a consumer and vice versa. So, the presence or participation of both is necessary.

Question 5.
State money remittance services of postal department.
Answer:
Money remittance services : The money remittance services are explained as follows:
(i) Electronic Money Transfer (eMO) : A money order is the most convenient method of remitting money to distant places. It is an order issued by one post office to another to pay a certain amount of money to a person specified therein. The person to whom money is to be paid is called ‘Payee’. Under this service of the post office, money is delivered at the house or the place of stay of the receiver.

(ii) Instant Money Order (iMO) : Instant Money Order (iMO) is an instant web based money transfer service by which minimum Rs 1000 and maximum Rs 50,000 can be transferred to distant places from designated iMO post offices. It is the instant on-line money transfer service which is safe, convenient, reliable and affordable. The money can be sent to close relative residing at distant place in India. It is simple, quick and economical to send and receive money.

(iii) International Money Transfer : International Money Transfer is the most convenient, quick and easy way of transferring personal remittances from foreign country to family members or other beneficiaries in India. Now this service is made available in all post offices in India by Department of Post, Government of India with the help of Western Union Financial Services. The remittances of money are permitted from around 195 countries to India.

6. Justify the following statements.

Question 1.
Air transport is fastest mode of transport.
Answer:
(1) The mode of transport which is operated above the surface of the earth i.e. in the sky through airways is called air transport. For carrying passengers and goods, air transport uses different aircrafts such as passengers aircrafts, cargo aircraft, helicopters, etc.

(2) Among the means of transport available at present, air transport is the fastest and the quickest means of transport. It uses natural ways and no separate construction of routes is required. It is also due to use of modern and advanced technology and highly qualified and professional technicians. Thick forests, high mountains, vast deserts and oceans cannot obstruct its speed and air routes.

(3) Air transport adopt shortest route to reach destination. It has faster speed without any disturbance of observing signal system speed. Air transport is useful to provide valuable services in hilly and mountainous areas, in situations like war and areas affected by natural calamities such as floods, cyclones, earthquakes, etc.

Maharashtra Board OCM 12th Commerce Solutions Chapter 8 Marketing

Question 2.
Communication is essential for growth of business.
Answer:
(1) Exchange of ideas, facts, information etc. from one person to another is called communication. It is a process of transfer of information from one place to another or from one person to another with the help of some medium. Means of communication comprise magazines, newspapers, post and telegraphs, radio and television, telephone, internet, e-mail, etc. Communication is essential for growth of business, which include industry, commerce, trade, etc.

(2) The difficulty of distance is effectively solved by various means of communication. Communication helps to transmit business information more quickly among the businessmen. Effective communication facilitates carrying required raw materials and other requirements from the place of their origin or market to the place of their production to facilitate large scale production. The communication also helps to carry finished products from the place of production to the places of consumption as well as market.

(3) Communication helps to make goods and services available wherever they are demanded. It helps to widen the market. Effective communications facilitates the development and growth of domestic and international market and bring prosperity to the country.

(4) Effective communication facilitates the reduction in the cost of production and distribution of goods at low prices which increase their demand and widen market. Increase in demand in turn leads to large scale production and supply. Thus, communication is essential for growth of business.

Question 3.
Principle of subrogation is applicable to all contracts of indemnity.
Answer:
(1) The principle of subrogation is a colliery to the principle of indemnity. According to the principle of subrogation, after the insured is fully compensated for the total loss of the property or goods insured by him, all the rights in such property or goods pass on to the insurer.

(2) Insured person cannot claim any right in the property saved from the damage or loss, once he is fully compensated by the insurer. This is necessary because, if part of the goods or property saved from the fire, accident, damage, floods or cyclone, etc. could fetch any price, the same cannot be retained by the policyholder or insured. In that case he would realise more than the actual loss, which is against the principle of indemnity.

(3) As like the principle of indemnity, the principle of subrogation is applicable to all insurance policies except life insurance policies. In life insurance contracts, the question of indemnity and subrogation does not arise. The insurer cannot indemnify the insured because the loss due to death cannot be determined exactly in terms of money.

(4) In all insurance contracts, except life insurance contract, principle of indemnity and principle of subrogation are applicable. On indemnifying the insured, the insurer can sell the remains of the property damaged and reduce his loss. However, this principle is applicable only if the damaged property has any value after the happening of the event.

Question 4.
Warehousing is important.
Answer:
(1) The term ‘warehousing’ is generally used to denote all those activities which are concerned with the storage of goods in a godown or warehouse. In modern days, these is a time gap between production of goods and their distribution. Warehousing is essential to hold the stock of goods till they have suitable demand.

(2) Agricultural goods such as rice, wheat, sugar, spices, etc. are produced seasonally but consumed throughout the year. It is necessary to store them in large quantity. Some goods may be required to be stored for conditioning, canning or processing, e.g. oil seeds, fish, fruits, etc. Some perishable goods such as eggs, meat, butter, fruits, vegetables, medicines, etc. are preserved in cold storage so that their quality remains as it is.

(3) Warehousing plays an important role in price stabilisation. It helps to protect the goods from theft, deterioration, i.e. future risks. Warehouses nowadays provide facilities like packing, processing, grading, etc. Warehousing is necessary to facilitate dispersion of goods from production centres to different markets.

Question 5.
Cash can be withdrawn from ATM at any time.
Answer:
(1) ATM is the abbreviation of Automated Teller Machine. It is popularly known as All Time Money or Any Time Money. ATM is an electronic cash dispensing machine. It is free standing self service terminal. There is no specific time limit for withdrawals of cash from ATM.

(2) ATM is one of important facilities provided by the bank to its savings accountholder. To avail of this facility, bank installs ATM terminals at the places of public utility such as railway stations, shopping malls, airports, post offices, busy streets, etc.

(3) For withdrawal of cash from ATM, every accountholder is given specific code number. By operating this system, the accountholder can withdraw the cash up to a specific limit or the quantum of amount available in the account whichever is less. ATM also provides other information like cash deposits, withdrawals, balance in the account, etc.

(4) Under this system, the accountholder has cent per cent liquidity of banking funds. ATM avails twenty four hours service. Hence, the accountholder can withdraw cash any time, i.e. even after banking hours, on holidays, Sundays or in the case of emergency by operating ATM. This facility is available in different parts of the country as well as outside the country.

7. Attempt the following.

Question 1.
Explain money remittance services of post department.
Answer:
Money remittance services : The money remittance services are explained as follows:
(i) Electronic Money Transfer (eMO) : A money order is the most convenient method of remitting money to distant places. It is an order issued by one post office to another to pay a certain amount of money to a person specified therein. The person to whom money is to be paid is called ‘Payee’. Under this service of the post office, money is delivered at the house or the place of stay of the receiver.

(ii) Instant Money Order (iMO) : Instant Money Order (iMO) is an instant web based money transfer service by which minimum Rs 1000 and maximum Rs 50,000 can be transferred to distant places from designated iMO post offices. It is the instant on-line money transfer service which is safe, convenient, reliable and affordable. The money can be sent to close relative residing at distant place in India. It is simple, quick and economical to send and receive money.

(iii) International Money Transfer : International Money Transfer is the most convenient, quick and easy way of transferring personal remittances from foreign country to family members or other beneficiaries in India. Now this service is made available in all post offices in India by Department of Post, Government of India with the help of Western Union Financial Services. The remittances of money are permitted from around 195 countries to India.

Maharashtra Board OCM 12th Commerce Solutions Chapter 8 Marketing

Question 2.
Explain marine insurance policies.
Answer:
The different types of marine policies are:
(1) Voyage Policy : Under the Voyage Policy, the cargo is insured for a specified voyage, from one port to another, irrespective of the time taken. For instance, the voyage may be from Mumbai to Tokyo. In this type of policy, risk begins as soon as ship starts from Mumbai and ends when it reaches Tokyo.

(2) Time Policy : Under the Time Policy, the subject-matter is insured for a specific period of time. It covers risks of the voyage undertaken during the specified period. Time policy cannot be issued for a period more than 1 year but may contain continuation clause which explains that if voyage is not completed within the specified time, the risk shall be covered until voyage is completed.

(3) Mixed Policy : This policy is the combination of the two policies, viz. time policy and voyage policy. It insures the cargo (i.e. goods loaded on a ship, etc.) on a particular voyage for a specific period of time. For instance, the policy may contain the clause ‘Mumbai to Singapore, for one month starting from 25th February, 2020 to 25th March, 2020’.

(4) Valued Policy : The valued policy is a policy in which the value of the subject-matter is agreed upon between the insurer and the insured at the time of taking out the insurance policy. Agreed amount of policy becomes payable by the insurance company to the insured i.e. policyholder in the event of loss. It facilitates easy settlement of claim, where it is difficult to find out real market value S of the cargo.

(5) Blanket Policy: Under this policy, the maximum limit of the needed amount of protection is estimated and premium is paid in advance. This policy gives information of nature of goods insured, ports and places of voyages, specific route and risks covered. This policy covers multiple 1 risks on one property or it may cover different properties under one policy.

(6) Port Risk Policy : This policy is taken by the shipowner. It undertakes to indemnify the shipowner for any loss that may occur to the ship while it is anchored at a port. This policy is held applicable till the departure of the vessel from the port.

(7) Composite Policy : This policy is purchased from many insurance companies when the amount of insurance is very high. However, the liability of each insurance company to pay the amount of j claim is separate and distinct.

(8) Single vessel policy : The small shipowner having only one ship in different fleets, usually purchases single vessel policy to cover the risk of loss. This policy covers the risk of one vessel of the insured.

(9) Fleet policy and Block policy : The marine policy which insures several ships belonging to one owner is called Fleet Policy. The Block Policy is another marine policy under which the cargo owner is given protection against the loss or damage of cargo in all modes of transport i.e. rail, road and sea.

Question 3.
Explain types of warehouses.
Answer:
The different types of warehouses are:
(1) Private warehouses : The warehouses owned and operated by the big manufacturers and wholesalers for storing their own goods are called private warehouses. Big companies which need large storage capacity on a regular basis, can afford to construct and maintain their own warehouses. Many public sector organisations also have their own private warehouses, e.g. the Food Corporation of India (FCI) has constructed warehouses in different parts of the country for its own use. Usually these warehouses are constructed near to ones business factory or industry for convenience. They have network of warehouses in different parts of the country.

(2) Public warehouses : Warehouses which are established to provide storage facilities to the general public, small manufacturers and traders on rental basis are called public warehouses. These warehouses are owned and managed by an individual or co-operative societies. These warehouses are located near railway junctions, highways, waterways, airport, seaport, etc. They are well guarded and specially designed to protect goods from several types of risks. These warehouses have to obtain licence from the government. They provide warehousing facilities at low cost. Many marketing facilities such as standardisation, grading, labelling, packing, branding, etc. are provided in these warehouses.

(3) Bonded warehouses : Warehouses which are licensed by the government to accept and store imported goods till the customs duties are not paid on such goods are called bonded warehouses. These warehouses are managed and controlled by customs authorities. These warehouses are located near the ports. The importers cannot take possession of goods from such warehouses unless and until the duty on the goods is paid. The warehouse-keeper is required to give undertaking or ‘Bond’ that without the consent of the customs authorities goods will not be removed from the warehouse. Hence, such warehouses are called ‘Bonded Warehouses’. If an importer is unwilling or unable to pay customs duty immediately, he can withdraw them in instalments and pay customs duty proportionately.

(4) Duty-paid warehouses : The duty-paid warehouses provide the facility of storing the imported goods but not yet sold or transported to importers’ place or godown. These warehouses are owned and managed by the dock authorities only and hence they are also known as public warehouses. These warehouses are located near port and dock areas. They are more useful to importers who re-export the imported goods. The concerned authorities take all the due and reasonable care to ensure their safety. Processing of imported goods such as sorting, re-packing is done in these warehouses.

(5) Government warehouses : Warehouses which are owned, managed and controlled by the Central and State Governments or public authorities are called Government warehouses. These warehouses offer storage facilities to small traders, farmers, businessmen, etc. who are in need of the same on payment of reasonable rent. Central Warehousing Corporation of India (CWC), State Warehousing Corporation (SWC) and Food Corporation of India (FCI) own warehouses for keeping stock of foodgrains and other goods In different states and countries.

(6) Co-operative warehouses : These are warehouses owned, run, managed and controlled by co-operative societies to provide warehousing facilities to the members who are farmers in rural areas. These warehouses are similar to private warehouses but they run on the principle of co-operation. They are used for storing agricultural commodities, consumer goods, raw materials, etc. Farmers, small producers and traders are benefited by such warehouses as they charge at economical rates.

(7) Cold storage warehouses : Cold storage warehouses are largely used to store and preserve perishable goods such as flowers, fish, eggs, meat, vegetables, fruits, medicines, dairy products, etc. These products are kept in cold storage warehouses at very low temperature so that their quality and freshness would remain intact. These warehouses ensure continuous supply of seasonal and perishable products throughout the year. International trade for seasonal and perishable goods such as green peas, mangoes, etc., becomes possible only because of cold storage facilities.

Question 4.
Explain utility function of banks.
Answer:
The utility functions of the commercial bank are explained as follows:
(1) Issue of drafts and cheques : The Bank draft/cheque is an order issued by the bank upon the other branch of the same bank or other bank to pay money to the person whose name is specified thereon. The bank issues bank drafts to its accountholders or non-account holders. However, cheque are issued by the bank only to its account holders. For issuing the bank draft, bank charges some commission.

(2) Locker facility: The bank provides safe deposit vaults to the customers for keeping their valuables like gold ornaments, jewels, securities, valuables, documents, etc. in safe custody. Safe deposit vaults/lockers are made available to the customers on rental basis.

(3) Project reports : As per the request of the clients, bank prepare project report and feasibility study (i.e. a study designed to determine practicability of a system or plan) on their behalf. This helps the business organisation to get funds from the market and clearance from the government authorities.

(4) Gift cheques : The commercial banks also issue gift cheques and gold coins to the customers as well as to the general public by charging nominal charges. It is more popular and has wider acceptance in India. Instead of giving gifts in cash, one can give gift cheques as a present on various occasions such as birthdays, weddings, marriage anniversaries, etc.

(5) Underwriting Services : Underwriting services are given by the banks to the companies in which the bank gives guarantee to the issuing company to purchase unsubscribed portion of the shares, debentures, bonds and other securities if the public demand is not enough to fulfil the minimum subscription amount. For this services bank charges underwriting commission.

(6) Gold related services : Nowadays, many commercial banks offer gold related services to its customers. The banks on commercial basis buy and sell gold and gold ornaments to the customers on large scale basis. Some banks even gives advisory services to its customers in regard to gold funds, gold Exchange Traded Fund (ETF) etc.

Question 5.
Explain modes of traditional communication.
Answer:
(I) Postal Services : The postal services in India are provided by the Department of Post which comes under Ministry of Communication and Information Technology. India has the largest postal network in the world with 1,54,965 post offices of which 1,49,067 are in the rural areas. The different types of postal services are explained below:
(1) Mail Services : The different types of mail services are described below:
(i) Inland letters : The inland letter is one of the cheapest means of conveying written message. It contains a blank sheet of paper of prescribed size and folding for writing messages. It is folded and sealed. Only names and addresses of the receiver and sender can be seen from outside. So, it ensures complete secrecy. Inland letters are used for transmission of messages within India only.

(ii) Envelopes : A postal envelope is a small size paper cover with postage stamps affixed on it having one side open to put in papers, written messages and enclosures like cheques, photos, resumes, etc. It ensures maximum secrecy. On the front outside space name and address of receiver are written and on the backside space name and address of sender are written.

(iii) Parcel : Parcels help to send small articles from one place to the other by post. Parcel post provides economical and reliable parcel delivery service. Parcels of specified weight and size can be sent at different places within the country as well as outside the country Anything except those items which are banned can be sent. Parcel can be insured by paying extra charges for insurance. In case of insured parcel is lost in transit post office pays insured amount.

(iv) Book post : Printed materials such as publications, newspapers, printed books, wedding, cards, greeting cards, periodicals, legal documents, etc. can be mailed as book post. The book post packets should simply be closed and should not be sealed. The words ‘Book Post’ should be written on the face of the cover.

Maharashtra Board OCM 12th Commerce Solutions Chapter 8 Marketing

(2) Specialised Postal Services : The following specialised postal services are provided by the post offices:
(i) Business Post : Business post arranges complete mailing services right from preparation of mail to delivery of mail. It is most suitable for small business and large companies. As per requirement, customers can select from a range of cost effective and professional mailing services which include printing, collating (comparing or examining), inserting, sealing and addressing. Indian post has established Business Post centres in major cities to handle business post consignment.

(ii) Logistics Post : Logistics post provides its business customers a cost-effective and timely solution that manages the entire value chain from collection to storage to transmission to distribution throughout the country.

(iii) Bill Mail Service : Communications in the nature of financial statements, bills, monthly account statements or any such other items of similar nature are sent by service providers to the customers by using bill mail service of post office. This service is used at least once in 90 days. Under this service, at a time minimum 5000 articles can be posted. The bill mail service does not include communication in the nature of letter mail or having personal communication or exclusive commercial publicity material. The mail is to be received at specified location provided. Bill mail is to be sorted pin code wide and bundled delivery post office wise.

(3) Money remittance services : The money remittance services are explained as follows:
(i) Electronic Money Transfer (eMO) : A money order is the most convenient method of remitting money to distant places. It is an order issued by one post office to another to pay a certain amount of money to a person specified therein. The person to whom money is to be paid is called ‘Payee’. Under this service of the post office, money is delivered at the house or the place of stay of the receiver.

(ii) Instant Money Order (iMO) : Instant Money Order (iMO) is an instant web based money transfer service by which minimum Rs 1000 and maximum Rs 50,000 can be transferred to distant places from designated iMO post offices. It is the instant on-line money transfer service which is safe, convenient, reliable and affordable. The money can be sent to close relative residing at distant place in India. It is simple, quick and economical to send and receive money.

(iii) International Money Transfer : International Money Transfer is the most convenient, quick and easy way of transferring personal remittances from foreign country to family members or other beneficiaries in India. Now this service is made available in all post offices in India by Department of Post, Government of India with the help of Western Union Financial Services. The remittances of money are permitted from around 195 countries to India.

(4) Retail services : The retail services are explained as follows:
(i) Retail post : Under retail post service, the department of post offers services to general public by making available some products and services of third party available in their areas through selected post offices. Under this, post offices offer a range of services including the collection of electricity bills, telephone bills, insurance premia, collection of taxes and fee for the government, etc. The post office also sells application form.

(ii) e-post : Recently, the department of posts has introduced e-post services, e-post service is service under which printed messages of customers are scanned and transmissed as email through internet. At the destination place or offices, these messages are printed, enveloped and delivered at the postal address. Thus, it is the combination of electronic transmission and physical delivery. Through e-post customers can send their messages to any address in India through network of more than 1,55,000 post offices. Corporate customers get special e-post rates and value additions.

Question 6.
Explain disadvantages of air transport.
Answer:
The disadvantages of air transport are as below:

  1. Costliest mode : In comparison to all other modes of transport air transport is most expensive.
  2. Affected by adverse weather conditions : It is exposed to the vagaries of weather changes, heavy rains, snow, storm, etc.
  3. Unsuitability : Air transport is not suitable for short distances. It is also not suitable for carriage of bulky and heavy goods.
  4. Huge capital investments : As compared to other modes of transport, air transport requires huge capital investment costs like construction of airports, aircrafts, runways, air traffic control tower, etc. Huge capital investment increases freight and fare charges.
  5. International restrictions : Air transport is required to observe international restrictions such as aeroplane of some nations are not permitted to fly over other countries.
  6. Limited carrying capacity : In comparison to other means of transport, the carrying capacity of air transport is very limited. It is not suitable to carry heavy and bulky goods.

Question 7.
Describe the role of transport.
Answer:
The role of transport are explained as follows:
(1) Helps in production : Transport carries raw materials and other requirements from the place of their origin or market to the place of their production to facilitate large scale production. It also carries labour from their residence to place of factory. It carries finished products from the place of production to the places of consumption or markets.

(2) Expanding markets : Producers and consumers are separated by geographical distance. Transport bridges this gap and facilitates distribution. It makes goods available wherever they are demanded. This helps to widen the market. With the development and growth of transport, the domestic and international markets for both agricultural and industrial products expand, bringing the prosperity to the country.

(3) Creates place utility : Transport is a public utility service which creates time and place utilities. Transport mainly creates place utility by carrying goods from the place of plenty to places where they are in more demand but not available, e.g. Apples which are produced on large quantity in Himachal Pradesh are brought over to Mumbai and other places throughout the country by transport to get high prices.

(4) Stability of prices : Transport carries goods from the areas of plenty to the areas of scarcity. It helps to regulate and balance the supply of goods and services in relation to demand and thereby helps to stabilise the prices of goods. The shortage of goods at any place can be easily removed by efficient transport system.

(5) Creates employment : Transport creates job opportunities directly for transport owners, drivers, conductors, cleaners, mechanics, helpers, etc. It helps to move labour and goods from the place of abundance to the place of scarcity. This movement of goods and labour creates indirect employment. Transport an industry by itself has provided job opportunities to millions of people all over the world.

(6) Improves standard of living : By generating employment, transport leads to increase purchasing power with people. Further, it makes products of their choice from different regions available in local markets. This results in higher standard of living.

(7) Cost reduction : Efficient, cheap and quick means of transport facilitate the reduction in the cost of production and distribution of goods. On account of low cost of production, the goods can be sold at low prices which increase their demand and widen market. Increase in demand again leads to large scale production of goods and supply.

(8) Provides help during emergency : The life of the people is badly affected during natural calamities such as floods, earthquakes, landslides, droughts, etc. and also during man-made disasters such as bomb blasts, riots, accidents, etc. In such circumstances, urgent and timely help in the form of food, water, medicines, clothes and other provisions, etc. can be provided quickly with the help of transport to save the lives of affected people. Rescue operations are possible only with the help of helicopters, fire brigades, railways, etc.

(9) Economic development : An efficient transportation system contributes to the rapid development of commerce and industry. Transport also helps to develop agriculture of a country. New industries are established and rapidly developed due to efficient network of transport. Further, a country can make progress in international trade and thereby earn foreign exchange only through efficient transport services.

Question 8.
What are the functions of warehouses?
Answer:
Functions : The functions of warehouses are explained as follows:
Function of Warehouses

  1. Storage
  2. Price Stabilisation
  3. Risk-Bearing
  4. Financing
  5. Grading and Packing
  6. Transportation
  7. Time and Place Utility
  8. Processing

1. Storage : Storage of goods is the basic function of warehousing. Warehouses provide space for storage of goods in large quantity and in good condition. The commodities which are not required immediately are stored in the warehouses. Stored goods are supplied as and when they are required by the customers.

2. Price stabilisation : Warehousing facilitates price stabilisation by maintaining proper balance between demand for and supply of commodities. It is achieved by creation of time utility by warehousing. Usually, large stock of goods is kept in the warehouse. Wherever, there is shortage of goods in the market, goods are released from the warehouse which increases supply and facilitates price stabilisation. Thus, it helps to avoid any rise in prices.

3. Risk-bearing : While the goods are stored in the warehouse, the warehouse-keeper takes reasonable care to protect the goods from risks of loss or damage due to heat, cold, moisture, dryness, insects, fire and thefts. This is because he has to return the goods in the same condition. For any loss or damage of goods during storage, warehouse-keeper will be held liable to the owner of the goods. Thus, the risk is transferred from the owner to the warehouse-keeper.

4. Financing : On the basis of goods stored in the warehouse, loans can be raised from the financial institutions or warehouse-keeper. The goods act as a security for financial institution. This loan can be used to meet other operations of business by the owners of goods.

5. Grading and Packing : Warehousing provides enough space for undertaking various marketing functions like grading, processing and packing of goods. Goods can be packed in suitable sizes as per the instructions of the owner. Thus, services of warehousing are very useful to manufacturers, wholesalers and the importers of goods.

6. Transportation : Some warehouses also provide transport facility to the traders who store large quantity of goods in the warehouse. It brings the goods from the places of production and also sends them to the places of delivery on behalf of depositors.

7. Time and Place Utility: Warehousing creates time utility by storing goods and releasing the same at the time when they are demanded. It also creates place utility by transporting goods at the far away places, where they are required.

8. Processing : For certain commodities processing is necessary to make them consumable or useable. This is because those commodities cannot be consumed in the form they are produced in the nature, e.g. paddy, raw fruits, etc. The activities such as polishing the paddy, ripening the fruits, etc. are undertaken by the warehouses on behalf of the owners.

8. Answer the following.

Question 1.
What is insurance ? Explain principles of insurance.
Answer:
[A] Meaning : The term insurance refers to the method (means) of protection from financial loss which may occur due to happening of specific uncertain events. It is a type of risk management primarily used to compensate against the risk of a contingent loss. Insurance is a contract between two parties whereby one of them (the insurer) agrees in return for a consideration (premium) to indemnify (compensate) the other (the insured) against a monetary loss that may be suffered by the other on the happening of some specified event.

According to Insurance Act of 1938, Insurance is defined as, “A provision which a prudent man makes against inevitable contingencies”.

[B] Principles of insurance : The different principles of insurance are:

  1. Principle of Utmost Good Faith
  2. Principle of Insurable Interest
  3. Principle of Indemnity
  4. Principle of Subrogation
  5. Principle of Contribution
  6. Principle of Mitigation of Loss
  7. Principle of Causa-Proxima

1. Principle of Utmost Good Faith : The principle of utmost good faith is applicable to all types of insurance. According to this principle, both the parties in an insurance contract are under am obligation to make the fullest disclosure of all material facts relating to the insurance contract clearly, correctly and completely. Insured must provide correct and complete information of the subject-matter of the insurance whereas insurer must provide correct and complete information about the terms and conditions of the insurance contract. Failure to provide correct, complete information on the part of insured may lead to non-settlement of claim by the insurer.

For example, Mr. Hari has not given information about his kidney ailment to the insurance company while taking policy. So, if the insurance company discovers it after his death, then his family will not get compensation.

Maharashtra Board OCM 12th Commerce Solutions Chapter 8 Marketing

2. Principle of Insurable Interest : No person can enter into a valid insurance contract unless he has insurable interest in the object insured. Insurable interest of an insured is said to have in the subject matter if the existence of it provides financial benefit to the insured and non-existence of that subject matter put the insured to financial loss. Principle of insurable interest is applicable to all contracts of insurance. In the case of life insurance it is enough if the insurable interest s exists at the time of entering into the contract. In the case of marine and fire insurance interest the insurable must exist both at the time of the contract as well as at the time of the happening of the event.

A person has insurable interest in his own life and his property. A businessman has insurable interest in the goods he trades and in his property. Similarly, a wife has insurable interest in the life of her husband and vice versa.

3. Principle of Indemnity : Indemnity refers to a guarantee or assurance given by the insurer to place the insured in same financial position in which he was before the happening of the uncertain event. Principle of indemnity is applicable to marine, fire and general insurance as in such cases actual loss can be measured in terms of 1 money. Under this principle, the insurer undertakes to indemnify the policyholder or insured to the extent of the policy amount or the actual monetary loss suffered, whichever is lower, e.g. if a property owner has insured his property for Rs 5 lakh and it is destroyed by fire and incurred a loss of Rs 2 lakh, then the property owner will be paid only Rs 2 lakh i.e. the actual loss. This principle prevents a policyholder from making a profit out of his actual loss. However, in case of death of the insured, insurance company pays the actual sum assured to the nominee of the insured.

4. Principle of Subrogation : The principle of subrogation is a corollary to the principle of indemnity and is applicable to all contracts of j indemnity. According to it, after the insured is fully compensated for the total loss of the property or goods insured by him, all the remaining rights in such property or goods pass on to the insurer. Suppose a car owner has insured his car for Rs 2,00,000 against risk of loss due to accidents. If his car meets with an accident and is completely damaged, the insurance company pays Rs 2,00,000, the policy amount, to the car owner. On indemnifying the insured, the insurer can sell the remains of the car in scrap and reduce his loss.

5. Principle of Contribution : The principle of contribution is applicable to all contracts of indemnity. A person can insure his property with two or more insurance companies. It is done mainly to have better security, i.e. if one insurer fails to pay the claim, it can be recovered from another insurer. In the case of loss, the insured cannot recover compensation from both the insurance companies. All the insurers will jointly compensate the total amount of loss. According to the principle of contribution, each insurance company will contribute to the loss in proportion to the amount of policy undertaken from each company. If the insured chooses to collect the amount of compensation from one particular insurer, the insurer can in turn recover proportionate amount from the other insurers.

For instance, Dr, Ashok has insured his property of Rs 2,00,000 with two insurance companies viz. with X insurance company for Rs 1,20,000 (i.e. 60% of property value) and with Y insurance company for Rs 80,000 (i.e. 40% of property value).

If Dr. Ashok’s property is destroyed and he incurred a loss of Rs 1,50,000, then both the insurance companies will contribute towards actual loss of Rs 1,50,000. Here X insurance company will pay Rs 90,000 (i.e. 60% of Rs 1,50,000) and Y insurance company will pay Rs 60,000 (i.e. 40% of Rs 1,50,000).

6. Principle of Mitigation of Loss : Under this principle, the insured is required to take all possible steps to minimise the loss to the insured property on the happening of the event. He should not remain indifferent merely because the property which is getting damaged is insured. For example, Mr. Kishor’s house is on fire due to short circuit. In this case Mr. Kishor, must take necessary steps to put off the fire and to save the insured property as much as possible.

7. Principle of Causa-Proxima : The term ‘Causa-Proxima’ means a proximate, i.e. nearest or immediate cause or reason. Accordingly, when loss is occurred due to more than one cause, then proximate or nearest cause of loss is taken into consideration to fix the liability of insurer. If proximate cause is one of the causes from list of insured causes, then insurer is liable to pay compensation. In other words, the insurance company will indemnify the insured only if it is definitely established that the said loss is caused directly by the occurrence of the event covered by the policy.

Question 2.
Define bank. Explain. Different types of banks.
Answer:
[A] Definition : Bank is a dealer in money and credit. It is a financial institution whose basic activities are to accept deposits and advance, lend money and provide other related services, According to The Indian Banking Regulation Act, 1949, “any company which transacts the business of banking in India.” The term banking is further defined as, “accepting for the purpose of lending or investment of deposits from the public, repayable on demand or otherwise and withdrawable by cheque, draft and order or otherwise.”

Types of Bank:

  1. Central Bank
  2. Commercial Bank
  3. Co-operative Bank
  4. Industrial Development Bank
  5. Exchange Bank
  6. Regional Rural Bank
  7. Savings Bank
  8. Investment Bank
  9. Specialised Bank

The different types of banks are explained below:
1. Central Bank: The central bank in a country is the financial institution at the top (apex) of all the banking institutions operating in the country. In India, The Reserve Bank of India was established in 1945 under a special statute called the Reserve Bank of India Act, 1944. It performs the functions like framing monetary policy, issuing currency notes, acting as a banker to the Government and acting as the banker’s bank to commercial and other banks in India.

2. Commercial Bank : The Commercial bank plays key role in the economic, industrial and social development of a country. It performs broadly two functions such as (i) Primary functions which include accepting deposits and lending money in different forms and (ii) Secondary function which include agency functions and utility functions. The different types of commercial banks in India are as follows:
(i) Public Sector Banks : The banks in which majority of the share capital or stake (interest) is held by the Government of India are called Public Sector Bank, e.g. State Bank of India, Bank of India, etc.

(ii) Private Sector Banks : The banks in which majority of the share capital or stake is held by private individuals are called Private Sector Banks, e.g. Axis Bank, HDFC Bank, etc.

(iii) Foreign Banks : The banks which are registered and have their headquarters in foreign country but operate in different countries including India through their branches established there, are called Foreign banks e.g. Standard Chartered Bank, American Express Bank, HSBC, etc.

3. Co-operative Banks : Co-operative banks are formed, registered and organised under the Indian Co-operative Societies Act and regulated under Banking Regulation Act. These banks are more popular in rural and semi-urban areas. These banks are primarily meant for catering to the financial needs of economically backward people, farmers and small scale units. They operate at three different levels:
(a) Primary Credit Societies : The primary credit societies work at village level. These credit societies collect the savings and surplus money in the form of deposits from members and common people. They are also financed by the State Co¬operative Banks and District Co-operative Banks for the purpose of lending to needy people for productive purpose.

(b) District Central Co-operative Banks : The District Central Co-operative Banks operating at district level and financed by the State Co-operative Bank for the purpose of providing finance to primary credit societies.

(c) State Co-operative Banks : The State Co-, operative Banks Eire working at state level. These banks provide funds to District Central Co-operative Banks and Primary Credit Societies to enable them to provide finance to rural and semi urban areas. Apart from this, they also supervise the working of district banks and credit co-operative societies.

4. Industrial Development Banks : The banks which provide medium and long term equipment, latest technology, expansion and modernisation of business, etc. are called Industrial Development Banks. Industrial Finance Corporation of India (IFCI), State Financial Corporations (SFCs), Maharashtra State Finance Corporation (MSFC), etc. are the examples of Industrial Development Banks. These banks perform the following functions:

  1. Provide medium and long term finance to business organisations for expansion and modernisation.
  2. Underwriting i.e. giving guarantee to buy shares issued by public limited companies.
  3. Purchase debentures and bonds.

5. Exchange Banks : An exchange bank specialises in financing import and export trade and in foreign exchange transactions. The American Express Bank, Bank of Tokyo, Barclays Bank, etc. are the examples of Exchange Banks functioning in India. The Exchange Banks perform the following functions:

  1. Finance foreign trade transactions,
  2. Issue letter of credit on behalf of importer,
  3. Discount foreign bills of exchange,
  4. Remit dividend, interests and profits.

6. Regional Rural Banks : These banks were constituted (established) in 1975 and are sponsored by large public sector banks. 50%, 35% and 15% of the capital of these banks are provided by the Central Government, sponsored banks and State Government respectively. These banks collect (mobilise) funds in the form of deposits from rural and semi-urban areas. They provide loans and advances to small and marginal farmers, agricultural workers, rural artisans for productive purpose.

7. Savings Bank : A savings bank is one which has the main object of inculcating the habit of saving among the community. It collects scattered savings of the community especially from rural areas and invests the same in good securities. In India, Postal Savings Bank is an example of such a bank. Commercial Banks and Co-operative Banks act as savings banks as they have separate savings accounts departments.

8. Investment Bank : Investment banks offer financial and advisory assistance to their customers which usually include business firms and government organisations. These banks provide advice on investment decisions and facilitate mergers and acquisitions by undertaking research. These Banks do not directly deal with the common people.

9. Specialised Banks: The banks which make available to the requirements of the business and provide possible support to set up business activities in specific area are called Specialised Banks. The different types of specialised banks are:
(a) Export Import Bank of India (EXIM Bank) : These banks provide the needed financial assistance and support to the exporters and importers in setting up business for exporting and importing products respectively. They work to expand and promote country’s international trade.

(b) Small Industries Development Bank of India (SIDBI) : SIDBI was established on 2nd April, 1990 under the Act of Parliament of India. Its main function is to act as the main institution for financing, promoting and developing the Micro, Small and Medium Enterprises (MSMEs) as well as co-ordinator of the institutions engaged in similar activities.

(c) National Bank for Agricultural and Rural Development (NABARD) : NABARD has been established to work as an apex institution to finance agricultural and rural sector. It provides long term and short term loans through regional rural banks. It provides loans to financial institutions and not individuals. It is also concerned with the function of policy planning and operations relating to agricultural credit and credit for other activities in rural areas.

Question 3.
What is warehouse? Explain its different functions.
Answer:
[A] Meaning : A warehouse can be defined as, “an establishment for the storage or accumulation of goods.” The term ‘warehousing’ is generally used to denote storage of goods and consists of all those activities which are connected with the storage and preservation of goods in a godown or warehouse. One of the group activity or functions is to hold the goods in stock from the time of production till the time of consumption is called storage of goods. When storage of goods is required to be arranged on a large scale in a specified manner, it is called ‘warehousing’.

[B] Functions : The functions of warehouses are explained as follows :
Function of Warehouses

  1. Storage
  2. Price Stabilisation
  3. Risk-Bearing
  4. Financing
  5. Grading and Packing
  6. Transportation
  7. Time and Place Utility
  8. Processing

1. Storage : Storage of goods is the basic function of warehousing. Warehouses provide space for storage of goods in large quantity and in good condition. The commodities which are not required immediately are stored in the warehouses. Stored goods are supplied as and when they are required by the customers.

2. Price stabilisation : Warehousing facilitates price stabilisation by maintaining proper balance between demand for and supply of commodities. It is achieved by creation of time utility by warehousing. Usually, large stock of goods is kept in the warehouse. Wherever, there is shortage of goods in the market, goods are released from the warehouse which increases supply and facilitates price stabilisation. Thus, it helps to avoid any rise in prices.

3. Risk-bearing : While the goods are stored in the warehouse, the warehouse-keeper takes reasonable care to protect the goods from risks of loss or damage due to heat, cold, moisture, dryness, insects, fire and thefts. This is because he has to return the goods in the same condition. For any loss or damage of goods during storage, warehouse-keeper will be held liable to the owner of the goods. Thus, the risk is transferred from the owner to the warehouse-keeper.

4. Financing : On the basis of goods stored in the warehouse, loans can be raised from the financial institutions or warehouse-keeper. The goods act as a security for financial institution. This loan can be used to meet other operations of business by the owners of goods.

5. Grading and Packing : Warehousing provides enough space for undertaking various marketing functions like grading, processing and packing of goods. Goods can be packed in suitable sizes as per the instructions of the owner. Thus, services of warehousing are very useful to manufacturers, wholesalers and the importers of goods.

6. Transportation : Some warehouses also provide transport facility to the traders who store large quantity of goods in the warehouse. It brings the goods from the places of production and also sends them to the places of delivery on behalf of depositors.

7. Time and Place Utility: Warehousing creates time utility by storing goods and releasing the same at the time when they are demanded. It also creates place utility by transporting goods at the far away places, where they are required.

8. Processing : For certain commodities processing is necessary to make them consumable or useable. This is because those commodities cannot be consumed in the form they are produced in the nature, e.g. paddy, raw fruits, etc. The activities such as polishing the paddy, ripening the fruits, etc. are undertaken by the warehouses on behalf of the owners.

Question 4.
What is Services? Explain in detail different business services.
Answer:
[A] Meaning : A service is an act of performance that one party offer to another for certain consideration. Service is essentially intangible i.e. cannot be touched, seen and felt. Services are neither manufactured nor stocked or transported. They are produced and consumed simultaneously. So, Services are intangible, heterogeneous, inseparable, inconsistent, instantly perishable in nature, not transferable and require consumer participation. Services which help in successful running of a business are called business services.

Business cannot be run without business services. These services are provided to the customers which fulfil their needs. Banking, insurance, transport, warehousing, communication, etc. are the examples of business services. According to American Marketing Association, services implies, “Activities, benefits or satisfaction which are offered for sale or provided in connection with the sale of goods.”

[B] Types : The different types of services are shown:

  1. Banking
  2. Insurance services
  3. Transport services
  4. Warehousing
  5. Communication

The different types of business services are explained as follows:
1. Banking : As the production has to take place on a large scale, adequate finance is required. Further, there must be facilities for the exchange of goods. Banks provide necessary finance and to facilitate exchange issue different types of facilities such as cheques, drafts, debit card, credit card, net banking, mobile banking, etc. The banks also provide loans to the business and industry to buy properties and to pay for routine expenses.

2. Insurance services : There are several business risks involved during the period from the stage of production to the stage of consumption. Insurance company in consideration of a definite fees called premium, undertakes all such risks through fire, marine, life and other insurance contracts. Insurance is a service contract in which insurance company in consideration of specific premium amount promises to pay a fixed amount to insured person either on the expiry of pre-determined fixed period or in case of happening of any unlucky accident whichever is earlier. Thus, by protecting the traders against the risks, an
insurance company enables the traders to concentrate on their day-to-day business activities.

3. Transport services : Transport is a service or facility which creates place utility by carrying essential products, raw materials and human resources from one place to another. It plays an important role in the development of all sectors of the economy. Transport helps to widen the market for agriculture and manufactured goods. The efficient transport network facilitates development of commercial activities. It facilitates movement of labour and capital assets from different areas to developed areas.

Maharashtra Board OCM 12th Commerce Solutions Chapter 8 Marketing

4. Warehousing : Warehouse is a place or a room or a building where goods are stored prior to their use, distribution or sale. Warehousing creates time utility. It solves the problem of holding the stock of goods during the time-gap between production and consumption. It also provides enough place to perform certain marketing services like grading, weighing, packing, branding, labelling, etc. Warehousing also equalises demand for and supply of goods in the market and helps to stabilise the prices of goods.

5. Communication : George Terry defines communication as, ‘the process of transmitting and interchanging ideas, facts and actions’. It is a main aid to trade. Communication services such as post, telegraph, telephone, cell phones, telex, fax, courier, e-mail, internet, etc. help to transmit and communicate business information quickly among the businessmen

Question 5.
What is communication? Explain in detail various types of communication.
Answer:
[A] Meaning : The term ‘communication’ means any interchange of ideas, messages, facts, information, feelings and emotions among two or more persons In a way that they share common understanding about it. It Is a process of giving away or passing on any information by any person to some other person with the help of some medium. Thus, receiver after receiving the message understands it in the desired form and acts accordingly.

[B] Types of Communication : The different types of communication are shown in the following diagram:
Maharashtra Board OCM 12th Commerce Solutions Chapter 4 Business Services 1
The different types of communication are explained below:
(I) Postal Services : The postal services in India are provided by the Department of Post which comes under Ministry of Communication and Information Technology. India has the largest postal network in the world with 1,54,965 post offices of which 1,49,067 are in the rural areas. The different types of postal services are explained below:
(1) Mail Services : The different types of mail services are described below:
(i) Inland letters : The inland letter is one of the cheapest means of conveying written message. It contains a blank sheet of paper of prescribed size and folding for writing messages. It is folded and sealed. Only names and addresses of the receiver and sender can be seen from outside. So, it ensures complete secrecy. Inland letters are used for transmission of messages within India only.

(ii) Envelopes : A postal envelope is a small size paper cover with postage stamps affixed on it having one side open to put in papers, written messages and enclosures like cheques, photos, resumes, etc. It ensures maximum secrecy. On the front outside space name and address of receiver are written and on the backside space name and address of sender are written.

(iii) Parcel : Parcels help to send small articles from one place to the other by post. Parcel post provides economical and reliable parcel delivery service. Parcels of specified weight and size can be sent at different places within the country as well as outside the country Anything except those items which are banned can be sent. Parcel can be insured by paying extra charges for insurance. In case of insured parcel is lost in transit post office pays insured amount.

(iv) Book post : Printed materials such as publications, newspapers, printed books, wedding, cards, greeting cards, periodicals, legal documents, etc. can be mailed as book post. The book post packets should simply be closed and should not be sealed. The words ‘Book Post’ should be written on the face of the cover.

(2) Specialised Postal Services : The following specialised postal services are provided by the post offices:
(i) Business Post : Business post arranges complete mailing services right from preparation of mail to delivery of mail. It is most suitable for small business and large companies. As per requirement, customers can select from a range of cost effective and professional mailing services ! which include printing, collating (comparing or examining), inserting, sealing and addressing. Indian post has established Business Post centres in major cities to handle business post consignment.

(ii) Logistics Post : Logistics post provides its business customers a cost-effective and timely solution that manages the entire value chain from collection to storage to transmission to distribution throughout the country.

(iii) Bill Mail Service : Communications in the nature of financial statements, bills, monthly account statements or any such other items of similar nature are sent by service providers to the customers by using bill mail service of post office. This service is used at least once in 90 days. Under this service, at a time minimum 5000 articles can be posted. The bill mail service does not include communication in the nature of letter mail or having personal communication or exclusive commercial publicity material. The mail is to be received at specified location provided. Bill mail is to be sorted pin code wide and bundled delivery post office wise.

(3) Money remittance services : The money remittance services are explained as follows:
(i) Electronic Money Transfer (eMO) : A money order is the most convenient method of remitting money to distant places. It is an order issued by one post office to another to pay a certain amount of money to a person specified therein. The person to whom money is to be paid is called ‘Payee’. Under this service of the post office, money is delivered at the house or the place of stay of the receiver.

(ii) Instant Money Order (iMO) : Instant Money Order (iMO) is an instant web based money transfer service by which minimum Rs 1000 and maximum Rs 50,000 can be transferred to distant places from designated iMO post offices. It is the instant on-line money transfer service which is safe, convenient, reliable and affordable. The money can be sent to close relative residing at distant place in India. It is simple, quick and economical to send and receive money.

(iii) International Money Transfer : International Money Transfer is the most convenient, quick and easy way of transferring personal remittances from foreign country to family members or other beneficiaries in India. Now this service is made available in all post offices in India by Department of Post, Government of India with the help of Western Union Financial Services. The remittances of money are permitted from around 195 countries to India.

(4) Retail services : The retail services are explained as follows:
(i) Retail post : Under retail post service, the department of post offers services to general public by making available some products and services of third party available in their areas through selected post offices. Under this, post offices offer a range of services including the collection of electricity bills, telephone bills, insurance premia, collection of taxes and fee for the government, etc. The post office also sells application form.

(ii) e-post : Recently, the department of posts has introduced e-post services, e-post service is service under which printed messages of customers are scanned and transmissed as email through internet. At the destination place or offices, these messages are printed, enveloped and delivered at the postal address. Thus, it is the combination of electronic transmission and physical delivery. Through e-post customers can send their messages to any address in India through network of more than 1,55,000 post offices. Corporate customers get special e-post rates and value additions.

(II) Modern means of communications : The modern means of communication are explained as follows:
(i) Courier Service : A courier service is a service that allows someone to send a parcel or consignment from one place to some other distant place. Usually, courier services are provided by a company and charge flat rates to the parties using the courier service regularly. Courier services differ from ordinary mail services in respect to speed, security, tracking, signature, delivery time, etc. Usually, premium courier services are more expensive as compared to ordinary mail services. DHL, DTDC, etc. are the examples of courier services.

(ii) Internet : The internet is one, in which users at one computer can, if it has permission, get information from other computer. It is a networking infrastructure. It connects millions of computers together globally, framing a network in which any computer can communicate with any other computer as long as they are both connected to internet. It is a network of networks that include of private, public, academic, business and government networks of local to global scope linked by a broad array of electronic, wireless and services such as world wide web, etc.

(iii) E-mail : E-mail stands for Electronic mail. E-mail refers to the transmission of information, from one computer terminal to another. It is a method of exchanging mail between the users of electronic devices. E-mail servers accept, forward, deliver and store messages. Users are not required to be online simultaneously. They are required to connect to a mail server briefly for as long as it takes to send or receive messages.

Question 6.
What is road transport. Explain its advantages and disadvantages.
Answer:
[A] Meaning : Road transport is the oldest mode of transport. It means and includes various means of transport which move on the surface of the earth without the use of railway tracks. Roads are the means which connect people and places on the surface of the land. It provides connectivity on any terrain (land) in comparison to other modes of transport. The different types of vehicles plying on the road include bullock carts, cycles, motor-cycles, autorickshaws, cars, tempos, trucks, buses, etc. They are called means of road transport.

[B] Advantages : The advantages of road transport are explained as follows:
(1) Cheaper mode of transport : As compared to other modes of transport, road transport is relatively cheaper mode of transport. Its operational cost is relatively low.

(2) Useful for perishable goods : Road transport is suitable and more useful to carry and deliver perishable goods such as milk, vegetable, fish, mutton, fruits, flowers, eggs, etc., over a short distance and that too at a faster speed.

(3) Flexible mode of transport : Road transport is flexible mode of transport because loading and unloading of goods are possible at any destination. Similarly, it is more flexible because of the choice of different routes, timings and types of vehicles.

(4) Door-to-Door service : Road transport facilitates door-to-door delivery of goods. It carries the goods and passengers directly to the godowns, factories and places of residence, i.e. user.

(5) Good reach : Roads constructed in plain areas and also in hilly areas can be used by different road vehicles such as trucks, tempos, motor cars and even carts driven by animals for carrying goods and passengers from one place to another. Wherever any other mode of transport cannot reach, road vehicles can easily reach and thus cover even hilly areas.

(6) Less capital investment : The cost of construction and maintenance of a road system is relatively less than that of railways.

Maharashtra Board OCM 12th Commerce Solutions Chapter 8 Marketing

[C] Disadvantages : The disadvantages of road transport are explained as follows:
(1) Not economical for long distance : In comparison to other modes of transport carrying capacity of road transport is very limited. High cost of fuel, tolls, etc. make the road transport uneconomical for long distance transportation.

(2) Not suitable for heavy and bulky goods : Road transport is not suitable for carrying heavy and bulky goods for any distance and involves high cost.

(3) Affected by adverse weather conditions : Road transport is affected more by adverse weather conditions such as fogs often greatly reducing visibility, heavy rain, floods, landslides, storm, etc.

(4) Accidents : The possibility of road accidents is frequent due to poor condition of roads and negligent drivers.

(5) Causes pollution : The vehicles plying on the road release smokes and gases. So, it creates air pollution which affect the health of the people.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Secretarial Practice Solutions Chapter 7 Correspondence with Debentureholders

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board Class 12 Secretarial Practice Solutions Chapter 7 Correspondence with Debentureholders Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board Class 12 Secretarial Practice Solutions Chapter 7 Correspondence with Debentureholders

1A. Select the correct answer from the options given below and rewrite the statements.

Question 1.
Debenture Capital is a ______________ capital of a company.
(a) borrowed
(b) owned
(c) permanent
Answer:
(a) borrowed

Question 2.
Debenture holders are ______________ of the company.
(a) Owner
(b) Creditors
(c) Debtors
Answer:
(b) Creditors

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Secretarial Practice Solutions Chapter 7 Correspondence with Debentureholders

Question 3.
Borrowed capital is provided to the company by ______________
(a) Equity shareholder
(b) Debenture holders
(c) Reference Shareholders
Answer:
(b) Debenture holders

Question 4.
Interest on Registered Debentures is given through ______________
(a) Interest Coupons
(b) Interest Warrant
(c) Refund order
Answer:
(b) Interest Warrant

Question 5.
______________ are the creditors of the company.
(a) Shareholders
(b) Debenture holders
(c) Directors
Answer:
(b) Debenture holders

Question 6
Bearer Debenture holders get interest though ______________
(a) Interest Warrants
(b) Refund Orders
(c) Interest Coupons
Answer:
(c) Interest Coupons

Question 7.
Return of income on debentures is ______________ at fixed rate.
(a) Dividend
(b) Loan
(c) Interest
Answer:
(c) Interest

Question 8.
______________ is an acknowledgement of debt issued by the company under common seal.
(a) Debentures
(b) Shares
(c) Reserve
Answer:
(a) Debentures

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Secretarial Practice Solutions Chapter 7 Correspondence with Debentureholders

Question 9.
Debentures repayable after a certain period are ______________ debentures.
(a) Convertible
(b) Registered
(c) Redeemable
Answer:
(c) Redeemable

Question 10.
The rate of interest payable on Debentures is ______________
(a) uncertain
(b) Floating
(c) Fixed
Answer:
(c) Fixed

Question 11.
Debenture holders receive ______________ Certificate from the company.
(a) Share
(b) Bond
(c) Debenture
Answer:
(c) Debenture

Question 12.
Interest Warrants are sent to ______________ of the company.
(a) Shareholders
(b) Debenture holders
(c) Owners
Answer:
(b) Debenture holders

1B. Match the pairs.

Question 1.

Group ‘A’ Group ‘B’
(a) Debenture holder (1) Borrowed Capital
(b) Interest on Debentures (2) Interest Coupons
(c) Convertible Debentures (3) Evidence of Loan
(d) Debenture Certificate (4) Safe and secure investment
(e) Investment in Debentures (5) Interest Warrant
(f) Redeemable Debentures (6) Conversion into Debentures
(g) Debentures (7) Risky investment
(8) Evidence of shares
(9) Creditors
(10) Conversion into equity shares
(11) Redeemed after a fixed period
(12) Redeemed at winding up of the company
(13) Owner
(14) Owned Capital

Answer:

Group ‘A’ Group ‘B’
(a) Debenture holder (9) Creditors
(b) Interest on Debentures (5) Interest Warrant
(c) Convertible Debentures (10) Conversion into equity shares
(d) Debenture Certificate (3) Evidence of Loan
(e) Investment in Debentures (4) Safe and secure investment
(f) Redeemable Debentures (11) Redeemed after a fixed period
(g) Debentures (1) Borrowed Capital

1C. Write a word or a term or a phrase that can substitute each of the following statements.

Question 1.
Return on investment in debentures.
Answer:
Interest

Question 2.
Documentary evidence of holding the debentures.
Answer:
Debenture Certificate

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Secretarial Practice Solutions Chapter 7 Correspondence with Debentureholders

Question 3.
Status of Debenture holders.
Answer:
Creditor

Question 4.
Debentures can be converted into equity shares.
Answer:
Convertible Debentures

Question 5.
The person who purchases debentures of the company.
Answer:
Debenture holders

Question 6.
An acknowledgment of debt issued by the company under its common seal.
Answer:
Debenture

Question 7.
Debentures whose name is mentioned in the Register of Debentures holders.
Answer:
Registered Debentures

1D. State whether the following statements are true or false.

Question 1.
Debenture holders get regular dividends.
Answer:
False

Question 2.
The debenture is the loan capital of the company.
Answer:
True

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Secretarial Practice Solutions Chapter 7 Correspondence with Debentureholders

Question 3.
Convertible Debentures can be converted into equity shares.
Answer:
True

Question 4.
Interest on Debentures is paid notwithstanding the volume of profit.
Answer:
True

Question 5.
Debenture holders enjoy full membership rights of the company.
Answer:
False

Question 6.
Dividend warrants are used to pay interest to the debenture holders.
Answer:
False

Question 7.
All types of debentures are eligible for conversion into equity shares.
Answer:
False

Question 8.
Debentures are never redeemed by the company.
Answer:
False

Question 9.
Debenture holders are the owners of the company.
Answer:
False

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Secretarial Practice Solutions Chapter 7 Correspondence with Debentureholders

Question 10.
Debentures are always fully paid up.
Answer:
True

1E. Find the odd one.

Question 1.
Depository Interest, Dividend.
Answer:
Depository

Question 2.
Interest Warrant, Dividend Warrant, Demat.
Answer:
Demat

Question 3.
Debenture holders, Shareholders, Dematerialisation.
Answer:
Dematerialization

Question 4.
Debenture holders, Shareholders, SEBI.
Answer:
SEBI

1F. Complete the Sentences.

Question 1.
Debenture holder is a ______________ of a company.
Answer:
Creditor

Question 2.
Company issues ______________ certificate to the Debenture holder after allotment of Debentures.
Answer:
Debenture

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Secretarial Practice Solutions Chapter 7 Correspondence with Debentureholders

Question 3.
Debenture holder gets ______________ at fixed rate as a return or income.
Answer:
Interest

Question 4.
In case of Registered Debentures, Interest ______________ are used to pay interest.
Answer:
Warrants

Question 5.
The ______________ has to correspond with Debenture holders on important occasions.
Answer:
Secretary

Question 6.
The person who purchases the Debentures of a company is called ______________
Answer:
Debenture holder

Question 7.
Interest does not depend upon ______________ of the company.
Answer:
Profit

Question 8.
Company cannot issue Debentures with ______________ rights.
Answer:
Voting

Question 9.
Debenture Certificate should be issued within a period of ______________ months, from the date of allotment of Debentures.
Answer:
6

Question 10.
A company cannot issue Debentures to more than 500 people without appointing a ______________
Answer:
Debenture trustee

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Secretarial Practice Solutions Chapter 7 Correspondence with Debentureholders

Question 11.
The power to issue Debentures has been vested with the ______________
Answer:
Board of Directors

1G. Select the correct option from the bracket.

Question 1.

Group ‘A’ Group ‘B’
(a) Return on Debentures (1) ………………………….
(b) Debenture Certificate (2) …………………………
(c) ………………………… (3) Debenture holders
(d) ……………………….. (4) Debenture
(e) ……………………….. (5) Power to issue Debentures

(Debt capital, Board of Directors, Creditors, Issued within 6 months, Interest)
Answer:

Group ‘A’ Group ‘B’
(a) Return on Debentures (1) Interest
(b) Debenture Certificate (2) Issued within 6 months
(c) Creditors (3) Debenture holders
(d) Debt capital (4) Debenture
(e) Board of Directors (5) Power to issue Debentures

1H. Answer in one sentence.

Question 1.
Who is the Debenture holder?
Answer:
The person who purchases Debentures of the company is known as a Debenture holder.

Question 2.
What is the income of Debentures holder?
Answer:
The income received by the Debenture holder is the fixed rate of interest.

Question 3.
What is Debenture?
Answer:
A debenture is an acknowledgment of debt received by the company.

Question 4.
What are Convertible Debentures?
Answer:
Convertible Debentures are the Debentures that are converted into equity shares.

Question 5.
Who takes the decision to allot the debentures?
Answer:
The Board of Directors takes the decision to allot the Debentures.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Secretarial Practice Solutions Chapter 7 Correspondence with Debentureholders

Question 6.
Which form is enclosed along with the letter of redemption of debentures?
Answer:
The debenture Redemption form is enclosed along with the letter of redemption of Debentures.

Question 7.
Which certificate will be issued after the Allotment of debenture?
Answer:
A debenture Certificate will be issued after the allotment of the debenture.

1I. Correct the underlined words and rewrite the following sentence.

Question 1.
The person who purchases debentures of the company is called Shareholders.
Answer:
The person who purchases Debentures of the company is called a Debenture holder.

Question 2.
Debenture holders get regular dividends at a fixed rate.
Answer:
Debenture holders get regular interest at a fixed rate.

Question 3.
A Share Certificate must be issued after the allotment of debentures.
Answer:
A Debenture Certificate must be issued after allotment of debentures.

Question 4.
A Debenture Redemption Reserve Fund is created by the company for the redemption of shares.
Answer:
A Debenture Redemption Reserve Fund is created by the company for the redemption of debentures.

Question 5.
A Demat Request Form is sent along with the letter of redemption of debentures.
Answer:
A Debenture Redemption Form is sent along with the Letter of Redemption of Debentures.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Secretarial Practice Solutions Chapter 7 Correspondence with Debentureholders

Question 6.
A company must issue a Debenture Certificate within 8 months of allotment of debentures.
Answer:
A company must issue a Debentures certificate within 6 months of allotment of debentures.

1J. Arrange in proper order.

Question 1.
(a) Board Resolution
(b) Allotment of Debentures
(c) Board Meeting.
Answer:
(a) Board Meeting
(b) Board Resolution
(c) Allotment of Debentures

Question 2.
(a) Interest Warrant
(b) Allotment of debentures
(c) Board meeting.
Answer:
(a) Board Meeting
(b) Allotment of Debentures
(c) Interest Warrant

2. Explain the following terms/concepts.

Question 1.
Debentures
Answer:

  • Debentures represent the borrowed capital of the company.
  • A debenture is an acknowledgment of debt given to the company.
  • Debenture Capital is also known as the ‘Supporting Capital’ of the company.

Question 2.
Debenture holder
Answer:

  • The person who buys Debentures of the company is known as ‘Debenture holders’.
  • The debenture holder is the creditor of the company and has no right to participate in the management of the company.
  • They get a fixed rate of interest as a return on their investment.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Secretarial Practice Solutions Chapter 7 Correspondence with Debentureholders

Question 3.
Interest on Debentures
Answer:

  • The returns paid on investment in Debentures are known as ‘Interest’.
  • The Rate of interest on Debentures is decided at the time of issue of Debentures.
  • Debenture holders get a fixed rate of interest which does not depend upon the profit of the company.

Question 4.
Redemption of Debentures
Answer:

  • Redemption means repayment.
  • Debenture represents borrowed capital of the company and hence, it has to be repaid.
  • Redeemable Debentures are repaid at the time of maturity. It is medium-term capital.

Question 5.
Conversion of Debentures
Answer:

  • Conversion of Debentures means converting Debentures into equity shares.
  • Convertible Debentures are those Debentures that are not repaid on maturity but converted into equity shares.
  • Before conversion, they enjoy all rights of creditors whereas after conversion they get all benefits of the owner.

Question 6.
Interest Warrant
Answer:

  • An interest Warrant is an instrument or payment of interest to the Debenture holders.
  • It is like a crossed cheque that can be encashed through the Debenture holder’s bank account.

Question 7.
Conciseness
Answer:

  • Conciseness refers to avoiding irrelevant and unnecessary information.
  • As far as possible the letter should be brief, short, and to the point so that, the reader should develop an interest in reading it.

Question 8.
Precise Information
Answer:

  • Precise information refers to providing timely and up-to-date information.
  • The data given in the letter must be accurate and based on factual information.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Secretarial Practice Solutions Chapter 7 Correspondence with Debentureholders

Question 9.
Courtesy
Answer:

  • Courtesy means politeness.
  • The secretary has to be polite while corresponding with debenture holders. Due respect should be given to them being the Creditors of the company.
  • The language in the letter should be courteous. Rude and harsh words should be avoided.

Question 10.
Debenture Certificate
Answer:

  • A debenture Certificate is an acknowledgment of debt given to the company.
  • It is issued under the common seal and signature of two directors of the company as a witness.
  • It contains the name of the Debenture holder, number of Debentures, type of Debenture, rate of interest, maturity, etc.

3. Answer in brief.

Question 1.
Which are the precautions to be taken by the Secretary while corresponding with debenture holders?
Answer:
The following precautions are to be kept in mind by the secretary while corresponding with the debentures.
(i) Transparency:
Transparency means disclosing the correct and accurate information of the company. Including the credit rating of the company, true and real facts of companies’ affairs, etc. in correspondence.

(ii) Quick Response:
Secretary should promptly respond to the queries and complaints of debenture holders without any delay.

(iii) Courtesy:

  • As debenture holders are the creditors of the company, proper respect should be given to them in correspondence.
  • The wordings in the letter should be courteous. Rude and harsh words should be strictly avoided.

(iv) Conciseness:
Letters to the debenture holders should be brief and to the point avoiding unnecessary information.

(v) Accuracy:
The secretary should provide precise and up-to-date information to debenture holders. The information must be true and correct.

(vi) Confidentiality:
As a confidential officer of the company, the secretary must take due care and should not disclose any secret information about the company while writing letters.

(vii) Reputation of the company:
While corresponding with debenture holders, the secretary should try to maintain goodwill and create a good image of the company in the mind of debentures.

(viii) Legal Provisions:
The secretary should follow the statutory provisions of the Companies Act, 2013 and other related laws while corresponding with debenture holders. Secretary must be very careful in corresponding as it can cause legal consequences.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Secretarial Practice Solutions Chapter 7 Correspondence with Debentureholders

Question 2.
What are the circumstances under which correspondence can be made with debenture holders?
Answer:
Debenture holders are the creditors of the company. They have the right to know about the decisions taken by the management of the company and other information. The secretary corresponds with the debenture holders under various circumstances. The following are the few circumstances under which the secretary enters into correspondence with the debenture holders:

  • Informing the applicant about the allotment of debentures.
  • Informing about payment of interest through:
    • Interest Warrant
    • Electronic Mode
  • Letter for the conversion of debentures into equity shares.
  • Informing the debenture holders about the redemption of their debentures.

4. Justify the following statements.

Question 1.
The company secretary should take certain precautions while corresponding with debenture holders.
Answer:

  • Secretary has to be more careful while drafting the letters. The languages used in the letter should be courteous, i.e. showing due respect to the shareholders.
  • A prompt reply should be given to the queries raised by the debenture holder.
  • The letter should be short and precise containing important information. The data provided in the letter should be up to date.
  • It is also necessary for the secretary to keep in mind the goodwill of the company. Simultaneously, it is also necessary to be aware that the company follows all the legal provisions of the Companies Act, 2013.
  • Thus, it is rightly justified that, the company secretary should take certain precautions while corresponding with debenture holders.

Question 2.
There are certain circumstances when a secretary has to correspond with debenture holders.
Answer:

  • (i) Debenture holders are the creditors of the company and are entitled to receive the interest.
  • (ii) Secretary being the link between the company and debenture holders has to draft various letters:
    • Allotment letter has to be sent to Debenture holders when the Debentures are allotted.
    • Letter for payment of interest has to be written to Debenture holders to inform them.
    • Payment can be done either through an interest warrant or ECS/ NEFT.
    • Letter informing the Debenture holders about conversion of debentures into equity shares.
    • Letter informing the Debenture holders about the redemption (repayment) of Debentures.
    • Thus, it is rightly justified that, there are different circumstances when a secretary has to correspond with Debenture holders.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Secretarial Practice Solutions Chapter 7 Correspondence with Debentureholders

5. Attempt the following.

Question 1.
Draft a ‘Letter of Allotment’ to debenture holders.
Answer:

RADHIKA INDUSTRIES LIMITED
50/A, Bandra-Kurla Complex, Bandra (East), Mumbai: 400 051
CIN: L46001 MH 2002 PLC 503433

Website: www.radhikalimited.com
Email: radhika4@gmail.com
Date: 14th May 2019

Tel. No.: 022-24761524
Fax No.: 022-24881242
Ref. No.: D/DH/2018-19

Mr. Amit Desai,
C/23, LIC colony,
L.J Road, Mahim,
Mumbai – 400 096

Sub.: Public issue of 10,00,000 @ 12.5% non-convertible debentures of ₹ 100 each at par.

Dear Sir,
In response to your application AD- 1884 dated 19th April 2019, I am directed by the Board of Directors to inform you that, you have been allotted 100,12.5% non-convertible debentures of ₹ 100 each. The period of debentures is for 7 years.

These debentures are allotted to you as per the resolution passed at the Board Meeting held on 8th May 2019 and as per the terms and conditions of Debenture Trust Deed and Articles of Association of the company.

Details of allotment are as follows:

1 2 3 4
Folio No. No. of Debentures Distinctive Nos. Amount received
Applied Allotted From To
B-520 100 100 101 200 ₹ 10,000

The debenture Certificate will be sent to you within the stipulated period.
Thanking you,

Yours faithfully,
For, Radhika Industries Limited.

Sign
Company Secretary

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Secretarial Practice Solutions Chapter 7 Correspondence with Debentureholders

Question 2.
Write a letter to debenture holders regarding payment of interest through an Interest Warrant.
Answer:

RADHIKA INDUSTRIES LIMITED
50/A, Bandra-Kurla Complex, Bandra (East), Mumbai: 400 051
CIN: L46001 MH 2002 PLC 503433

Website: www.radhikalimited.com
Email: radhika4@gmail.com
Date: 10th Jan 2019

Tel. No.: 022-24761524
Fax No.: 022-24881242
Ref. No.: D/DH/2018-19

Mrs. Bharati Nikumbh,
A/22, BPT colony,
N.K Road, Mahim,
Mumbai – 400 096

Sub.: Payment of interest on debentures.

Dear Madam,
As per the board resolution passed in the Board Meeting held on 20th Jan 2019, this is to inform you that, the payment on your 10% non-convertible debentures of ₹ 100 each is due.

The details of the amount of interest payable to you are as follows:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Folio No. No. of Debentures Distinctive Nos. Gross Amount of Interest T.D.S (10% on interest) Net Amount of interest Interest Warrant No.
From To
B-110 100 101 200 ₹ 1,000 NIL ₹ 1,000 TW-1242

The interest warrant is enclosed herewith. Please acknowledge the receipt.
Thanking you,

Yours faithfully,
For, Radhika Industries Limited.

Sign
Company Secretary

Encl: Interest Warrant No. IW-1242.

Question 3.
Draft a letter to the debenture holder informing him about the redemption of debentures.
Answer:

SWARG MARBLE LIMITED
40/B, C-Ramchandra Road, Khar (East), Mumbai: 400 053
CIN: L24308 MH2006 PLC211388

Website: www.swarglimited.com
Email: swarglimitedl2@gmail.com
Date: 16th March 2019

Tel. No.: 022-4133242
Fax No.: 022-4215212
Ref. No.: R/DH/14/18-19

Mr. Amit Berde
A/21, Swastik Colony,
Bhadkamkar Marg,
Fort, Mumbai 400 020

Sub: Redemption of debentures.

Dear Sir,
In accordance with the terms decided at the time of issue of 1,00,000, 10% Non-convertible debentures, this is to inform you that, the said debentures are due for redemption on 30th April 2019.

According to Board Resolution No. 4432 passed at the Board meeting held on 15th March 2019, said debentures shall be redeemed out of the Debentures Redemption Reserve of the company.

Please arrange to submit a duly filled up Debentures Redemption Form along with a duly discharged debenture certificate at the Registered Office of the company on or before 7th April 2019.

On completion of the above formalities, the redemption amount will be credited to your bank account. You are requested to provide us your bank account details.
Thanking you,

Yours faithfully,
For, Swarg Marble Limited.

Sign
Company Secretary

Encl: Debenture Redemption Form.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Secretarial Practice Solutions Chapter 7 Correspondence with Debentureholders

Question 4.
Draft a letter to debenture holder informing him about conversion of debentures into equity shares.
Answer:

SUNRISE INDUSTRIES LIMITED
50/A, Swami Narayan Road, Tunga Village, Mumbai: 400 072
CIN: L42105 MR 2005 PLC: 402512

Tel. No.: 022-23731242
Fax No.: 022-23738656
Ref. No.: D/DH/2018-19

Email: sunrise5@gmail.com
Website: www.sunriselimited.com
Date: 2nd May 2019

Mr. Uddhav Ansurkar
20, Hilton Complex,
Laxmi Road,
Solapur- 413018

Sub: Conversion of Debentures into Equity shares.

Dear Sir,
In accordance with the terms decided at the time of issue of 1,00,000, 10% fully Convertible debentures, this is to inform you that, the said debentures are due for conversion.

Accordingly, a special resolution was passed at the Extra Ordinary General Meeting held on 20th April 2019 for approval of the conversion of debentures into equity shares in the ratio of 5: 1. As per your letter of option, you have been allotted 10 equity shares in lieu of your 50 debentures.

Details of your holding after conversion are as follows:

1 2 3 4 5
Folio No. No. of Debentures held No. of Equity Shares issued Distinctive Nos. Share certificate No.
From To
225 50 10 201 210 1210

A duly signed and executed shares Certificate is enclosed.
Debenture Certificate will be null and void w.e.f. 30th April 2019.
Thanking you,

Yours faithfully
For, Sunrise Industries Limited.

Sign
Company Secretary

Encl: Share Certificate No. 1210

Question 5.
Write a letter to debenture holders regarding payment of interest electronically.
Answer:

RADHIKA INDUSTRIES LIMITED
50/A, Bandra-Kurla Complex, Bandra (East), Mumbai: 400 051
CIN: L46001 MH 2002 PLC 503433.

Tel. No.: 022-24761524
Fax No.: 022-24881242
Ref. No.: D/DH/2018-19

Email: radhika4@gmail.com
Website: www.radhikalimited.com
Date: 10th March 2019

Mrs. Shweta Gawde.
B/20 Mahindra Tower,
Tardeo Road, Mumbai Central,
Mumbai – 400 034

Sub.: Payment of interest on debenture through ECS or NEFT.

Dear Madam,
As per the Board resolution passed in the Board Meeting held on 8th March 2019, this is to inform you that, the board is finalizing to pay interest @10% on Redeemable Debentures of ₹ 100 each for the year ending 31st March 2019.

We have complied with all the provisions relating to the payment of interest on debentures.

Details of your interest payment are as follows:

1 2 3 4 5 6
Register No. No. of Debentures Distinctive Nos. Gross Amount of Interest T.D.S (10% on interest) Net Amount of interest
From To
E-340 100 201 300 ₹ 1,000 NIL ₹ 1,000

Interest will be paid through ECS or NEFT transfer by crediting your bank account as per details provided by you to the company.
Thanking you,

Yours faithfully,
For, Radhika Industries Limited.

Sign
Company Secretary